Home

Inventory User`s Manual OPEN SYSTEMS

Contents

1. Itan Loc amp tinns Irem Loo Leet lon CAODODI Dem rigrinn Cleserical Package Unit Ferice Imfocmetion Tait Qguancity Srmakr IB Unies Average FELlCE base Pri e SLAC PELGE Elhimum PEL amp PER LT eM PE E G20 P400 815 230 n ITF DDD Line Ho IC6000i cf DECRE Currcmmr lavmlm Cust Eu Deeb ipl ion kaj Bese R qusbmeme Prom ACEi ioe Builders Comrat Galo price ED 0DON TES Line Ho joO0001 of GD 08323 Tab Cumt Lvl Beet Poor Lert Firzt Cee lUcmtiuns czzErml Binz View Field Definitions The information on this screen comes from the Price Information screen in the File Maintenance Item Locations function 4 44 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Item Locations Command Bar Definitions Command Tab Cust Lvl Next Prev Last First Item Locations General Bins View Saving and Exiting Description Press Tab to go to the Customer Levels or the Unit Price Information section of the screen Press N to view the next item location record on file Press P to view the previous item location record on file Press L to view the last item location record on file Press F to view the first item location record on file Press I to go to the Item ID field and enter a different item ID Press O to view the other locations for the item The Locations screen appears Press G to view general information about the item location The General scr
2. so OOONW Va OOONW Va OOONW Va 000NW Va OOONW Va OOONW Va OOONW Md OOONW Md TOOONW Oud qI UoT3e20T IVISSIVA WIV IVSH WIV IlV3H WIV IVSH WIV IVSH WIV IlV3H WIV IVSH osz ZOTITPTUNH 009002 dung dumg 005002 Zeus os 1e3eM 007007 ieuorirpuo ITY 00 00c je3eeH 1eqeM 002002 ocuzna 00100c ebeyoeg but ooj butieeH WIV IVSH IVISSIVA 00 ebexoeq burqumqd OST xog iexeeag pue s3eqano eoT432e u S PNTOUI abeyoeg eoriaoe u IVISSIVA 001 uoradiauoseq edaxsd uoradraosed OL T9SEST p9 bLbZZV PL SEO9LS ZE0 S6ZT 00002vZ 850926 eoueT1eA 1Z 109 3802 pepuejxg 6L 1986 L 096 16 86082 IST SL 00008 69 Z9ZE eoueT1eA 00 08 3802 pepuejxg 69 2v9 8 89717 69 G78Ll 0006 Lv 00008 ch ZE68 eouer1eA 026101 390 pepueixg 9 1866 9S 9168S 6 t9687 000 LZT 00008 L6 02862 eoUeT1eA 09 6 v 3802 pepuejxg LG 097 LL GbbL6T 0Z S8TP9T 0096 62b 00008 86 688SI eoueT1eA 2 0 8T 4sop pepuejxg cC OTLLT S6 v16v01 L POZL8 00S LZZ 0000 8 62 66992 eouer1eA ZS SE0E 390 pepueixg 18 PEL6Z PT 8LPELI bLEVT 00vv 6LE 00008 00 00 00 0000 0000 lP v6116 eoueT1eA G6 ZT9 1 3802 pepuejxg 97 T8SLL 8E EZOE6T 26 lev STI 00 6 L06 0000 ST 9L LE06b eoueT1eA G9 106 3802 pepuejxg IT 9ETT G9 v196L2 9L 0SLOZE 00GS Eve 0000 z oueTeg pug ebueu 3e
3. Lot History Report Features The Lot History Report shows historical purchase and sales information for lotted items Reports A sample Lot History Report is on page 7 30 Screen Use Screen Description Lot History Report Use the Lot History Report screen to select the items locations product lines and lot numbers that you want in the report Inventory User s Manual 7 27 Lot History Report Reports Lot History Report Screen F MSAN TAA Lot Eimztory Bmport Pick rem 13 Trom O3i i Enc lude t Thru S111007 Zmlam TES L bparicoam ID From CRUUDI Purcras s TES Thru THONI Harerial Rgoimiricza TE Frnduct Ling From AFSLIAMCI Builda YES THEW BMATEBRIAL Ad uszmenrs TER Lor Hahei Fros Trereteca TES Thru En oice Dare FEGI Output chrvirg fFbrizzgr pF evinr m ilg Spcrmen E za Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Enter the range of items locations product lines lot numbers and invoice dates you want in the report Include Enter Y for each selection you want to include in the report Enter N for each selection you want to exclude 7 28 Inventory User s Manual Reports Lot History Report Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the report to a printer File Select F to send the report to a file Screen Select S to send the report to the screen End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Reports menu Saving and E
4. Description Enter or change the last price paid for each unit regardless of the costing method you are using If Accounts Payable Purchase Order are interfaced with Inventory this field is updated Enter or change the cost of the unit If you entered a carrying cost percent in the Locations function it is displayed Enter the amount you want to override the carrying cost by When you override the carrying cost you allow for an increase or a decrease to the item s carrying cost as a result of abnormal conditions If you entered an ordering cost in the Locations function it is displayed Enter the amount you want to override the ordering cost by When you override the ordering cost you allow for an increase or a decrease to the item s ordering cost as a result of abnormal conditions If you are using the standard costing valuation method enter the standard cost codes The description of the standard cost code is displayed Enter or change the amount of the cost bucket The standard cost total total of the costs entered is displayed The first time the order was purchased is displayed The cost detail information is not available for serialized items The quantities are updated on the Serial Numbers screen when items are purchased or sold The quantity of items in stock at the location is displayed If you elected to edit quantities in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function you can edit the quanti
5. Inventory User s Manual 6 10 Generate Purchase Requisitions Features Use the Generate Purchase Requisitions function on the Reorder Processing menu to create purchase requisitions for the items that need to be reordered Before you can use the Generate Purchase Requisitions function Purchase Order must be interfaced with Inventory and the Auto Reorder flag on the General Information screen in the Items function must be set to YES Reports No report is associated with this function Screen Use Screen Description Generate Purchase Use the Generate Purchase Requisitions screen to select the Requisitions calculation method you want to use when purchase requisitions are generated Inventory User s Manual 6 11 Generate Purchase Requisitions Reorder Processing Generate Purchase Requisitions Screen esas ni Gating La font kin r Goce te Poecchees Bequizitions Calcojacion Bechod 1 Ete Fue am p 3 Bin Hex q Laast guancity 5 GremLesL Ouanrtity ti r U mrifirmticum Frgmm PugDKr gt n proceed Field Definitions Field Name Description Calculation Method Select the calculation method you want to use when purchase requisitions are generated 1 for the EOQ method 2 for the Forecast method 3 for the Min Max method 4 for the least quantity calculated of the three methods or 5 for the greatest quantity calculated of the three methods Command Bar Definitions This screen has no c
6. 12 31 1228 11 30 1528 Loy 31 12248 Fa 30 1228 LEER E OT IL 19240 Enter the forecast type whose information you want to add or change This field appears if you entered a new forecast type Enter the forecast type whose information you want to copy Enter or change the description of the forecast type The periods specified in the Period Setup function in Resource Manager are displayed Enter or change the weight factor for each period The amounts you enter must total 100 percent Inventory User s Manual Code Maintenance Forecast Types Field Name Description Pd Year The current period and year according to how you set up your system are displayed Begin Date The first day of the period is displayed End Date The last day of the period is displayed Adjustment 96 Enter or change the percentage of increase decrease you expect Command Bar Definitions This screen has no command bar Saving and Exiting To save your entries use the Proceed PgDn command To exit to the Code Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 12 15 Standard Cost Makeup Codes Features Use the Standard Cost Makeup Codes function on the Code Maintenance menu to define the cost components used in determining the standard cost of an item The information entered here is used on the Cost Information screen in the Item Locations function Reports To produce a list of the information e
7. e Use the arrow keys and press Enter Click the selection Hold the mouse over the selection From any application menu you can select a button from the previous menu to move directly to that menu If you are several menu levels away from the Main menu you can return to the Main menu by clicking items on previous menus Inventory User s Manual 1 15 Graphical Style Menus Introduction Graphical Main Menu De le iin per num Bs neyo cR Dare E Live Dita SYSTEMS ING You can exit from a Graphical menu in these ways e select a button from a previous menu e press the Tab key to go to the Main menu e Click the Close box in the upper right hand corner of the window to close OSAS use the Exit F7 command to close OSAS select Exit from the File Menu to close OSAS Inventory User s Manual Introduction Graphical Style Menus Start Main Menu PB lam Fgcsn Uma Hum Esdr 2j gigi 5 19l Died rica You can exit from a menu in these ways press the left arrow key to go to the previous menu one menu up hold the mouse over a different menu item press the Tab key to go to the Main menu click the Close box in the upper right hand corner to close OSAS use the Exit F7 command to close OSAS select Exit from the File Menu to close OSAS Inventory User s Manual 1 17 Graphical Style Menus Introduction Special Commands in Graphical menus Right click to display the Spec
8. Command Bar Definitions Command Definition Enter edit Move the prompt gt to the line you want to edit and press Enter The Edit Lotted Serial Number window appears Append Press A to add lot numbers to the item The Append Lotted Serial Number window appears Done Press D to save your entries when you are finished adding or editing information about serial numbers Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the transaction window you were working with press D Inventory User s Manual 5 27 Inventory Transactions Daily Work Append Edit Lotted Serial Number Window F MSAN TA Saing a Pn bp Invmntczy Trezauct icon raot ber EsrEu Tram ID i0000 Dishwasher Braun Lcc ID moo EHIHMERFOLIZ WRBEHODUTI nica EA mequeszed ULF L O Sariml Merhar Tnit Coat mes Lal Bamber 000001 of 00000 Ferial Me rag oy Fulfill ory Backood i cane DLE Field Definitions Field Name Description Serial No Enter the serial number of the item being adjusted sold or purchased Lot No Enter or change the lot number of the item being adjusted sold or purchased Auto Generate This field appears if you entered goods received or a purchase transaction with invoice status If you want the system to generate serial numbers enter Y if not enter N When you enter Y the maximum number of serial numbers available to order appears Orig Qty The original quantity of the item is
9. Description Wallpaper Canrsmpcrarwy Lut Mzrhmr z WDOTId Dette FOLL Tran Gace Type bop JP Hr ID Referennse Ert kmounr CFIATIT 1T T LITION LES Furch HHOOCL DoOoccoum 224 DDOD 130 Good CTER Wan Loy 150 cee Tzuzz EWZEP te return fo Lot InguirzT Field Definitions The information on the Lot Inquiry screen comes from the Lot Information screen in the File Maintenance Item Locations function Command Bar This screen has no command bar Saving and Exiting To exit to the Lot Numbers screen press Enter 4 58 Inventory User s Manual Serial Numbers Features Use the Serial Numbers function on the Information Inquiry menu to look at costs prices and transaction information for serialized items Reports No report is associated with this function Screen Use Screen Serial Numbers View Serial Numbers window Inventory User s Manual Description Use the Serial Numbers screen to view the serial numbers for the item costs and prices and the status of the serial number To add or change information on this screen use the File Maintenance Item Locations function Use the View Serial Numbers window to view purchase and sales information about the serial numbers 4 59 Serial Numbers Information Inquiry Serial Numbers Screen sas nii gura La Ded bp rial Sober Irem iB un Locetion EH UDU Description BesfTrigermaror lesk BeriaL Humbe
10. End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Master Code Lists menu Saving and Exiting After the list is produced the Master Code Lists menu appears Inventory User s Manual 14 17 Master Codes List Account Codes List Account Codes List T bea 000701 000706 000207 O0vv0T 000106 000107 31odey jo puq sleriejew Mey s Tes l 3eH c0 000 06 00000 000706 000706 000706 002 v0 000 06 00bv0 000706 000706 000706 007 v0 399 3902 suei poy Cpv N 39ov py qunop s ua 39ov Cpv 900 3929V AeA d uound 399V dIM ASTT Sepo qunooov Ajtddns szepttng PPW NI 39oV 900 399X seTes uoridraioseq 9poo 3unooov WY 0S 6 6661 70 80 Inventory User s Manual 14 18 Forecast Types List Features Use the Forecast Types List function on the Master Code Lists menu to produce a list of the forecast types that have been set up Use it as a reference when you assign forecast types to items Reports A sample Forecast Types List is on page 14 22 Screen Use Screen Description Forecast Types List Use the Forecast Types List screen to select the forecast types that you want in the list Inventory User s Manual 14 19 Forecast Types List Master Codes List Forecast Types List Screen HAS IDH oemt Typmm Lint Pick Fnrscamr Typs From HTH Thru SEAS fPbrizzgr p F evirt m ilg 3pccesn E zd Fie
11. Entering Location Transfers Use the Location Transfers function to move inventory items from one location source location to another destination location When you enter a transfer the system updates the quantities and files online The quantity on hand and available for the source location is decreased by the number of items sent to the destination location The quantity on hand and available for the destination location is increased by the number of items sent from the source location The default value in the Unit Cost field is based on the type of costing method you are using and cannot be changed The unit cost is the total cost divided by the total quantity transferred If the transfer incurs expenses you can allocate them If you track serial or lot numbers one of three screens appears The item must have serial tracking or lot tracking status e Ifyou are working with a lotted item the Lot Entry window appears Ifyou are working with a serialized item the Serial Number Entry window appears Ifyou are working with both a serialized and lotted item and you elected to sort by serial number then lot the Serial Lot Number Entry window appears If you are transferring serialized items the serial number must be in the INSNxxx file you can add the transfer cost but the unit cost of the item cannot be changed If you are transferring a lotted item you can add destination lots and transfer costs but you cannot c
12. Inventory User s Manual 4 21 Movement History Information Inquiry Movement History Screen 0545 Tim Gating La Pw kin Acwament Higtocy Irem LD quu Eleprrical Package Locwrtan Woni Pec ied 7T Tear 199p Unite FEL NE Quantity Coat Beginning 225 0000 T SEA B5 Faz e eel tu m 1i mui Berupned uuu U Ld r00 200 WO OD Ber ar reed OC Dn Ramerisi Beg UE 00 Transtar In Da Transfer Git DnD uae OD Bret Lom Dn lzauks DD COO bd asrmeenrs on Endizg 328 K 1128715 Bn Cm Hand LB 6123 90 Wari E 24 1i7OES 76 o o Eugveamenz history found beyond srnrers d yewr psricd Hert iiem Tzuv item Firat item Lest item Zeudrr nitzr Field Definitions Field Name Description Item ID Enter the ID of the item whose movement history you want to view Location Enter the location ID for the item Period Enter the range of periods and years you want to view Year Enter the range of years you want to view Units Enter a unit of measure for the item you want to view 4 22 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Movement History Command Bar Definitions Command Description Next item Press N to view the next item record on file Prev item Press P to view the previous item record on file First item Press F to view the first item record on file Last item Press L to view the last item record on file Header Press H to go to the Item ID field an
13. Item entered is not set up for the location entered Set up the item location in the Items function or enter a different location Item status is xxxxxx discontinued obsolete superseded You cannot change the location status Use the Items function to change the status Items do not have the same base unit of measure You cannot transfer items with different base units of measure to a different location Change the unit of measure in the Items function for one of the items transfer an item to a different location or transfer a different item Location does not exist in locations file Enter a different location or set up the location in the Locations function Must use Tag Entry for this batch You selected Worksheet Entry when you were using a tag entry batch Select a tag entry batch No General Ledger Adjustments are on file No COGS or purchase price variance adjustments are in the INCJxxx file for the GL Adjustments Journal or to post No locations are on file for this item Set up a location for the item in the Items function No transactions or transfers are on file Enter transactions before posting B 2 Inventory User s Manual References System Messages RMTB file not found Set up the RMTB file in Resource Manager See the Resource Manager User s Manual Secondary sort cannot be the same as primary sort Tertiary sort cannot be the same as primary or secondary sort You cannot use a user define
14. Post GL adjustments D Od cL ON AM Re taa Adding Items You usually use the Items function to add items but you can also use the Maintenance F6 command in the Inventory Transactions and Location Transfers functions If you use the Maintenance F6 command you must know the numbering system your business uses If you use the Maintenance F6 command to add items in the Inventory Transactions and Location Transfers functions only some of the information listed below appears You must follow the steps to add information about the item When you add items follow these steps Enter the following information about the item in the Items function general information user defined fields units of measure alternates and location information Inventory User s Manual 3 3 Daily Tasks Work Flow 2 Enter the following location information in the Item Locations function or in the Items function item location defaults quantities pricing costs and vendors Entering Transactions You can enter three types of inventory transactions adjustments sales and purchases Adjustment and purchase transactions are updated online sales transactions are updated when you post When you enter transactions the default value in the Cost field depends on the type of transaction you are working with If you track serial or lot numbers one of four screens appears when you enter an adjustment a purchase or a sale The item mus
15. 00v v C6v6T 00 S 002v 0026 16281 0025 L0906 00 6 Z86TST 006S v298 7 39d Wjorla quNouy zotda Gross Profit Analysis Report Gross Profit Analysis Report 0018 Sv 90Y 00S2 8877 OIHIOWTM O0Zl 8TIPTl 0079 STESTT ONICTING OTHIONTH 0069 LZZZ6Z 0019 61GL0 ONICTING OOS P88STh 0068 167908 SNIGIIDd OOTS Z9T6ST O0vP GPTITIE ONICTING ONIGIING 00Z8 TZL9SZ O01v 9vEG6v ONICTING queunzedeq 3509 Te301 Soad e3oL uoraeor ddy eur Wad qI Wey Ag qos qyrodey srs euy i1goaq ssor9 Ajtddns szepting qrodey jo pus TWLOL GNV45 OOT O3 THIOL abeyoeg TeOT142 TH IWIYALYWN TOOOXL 001 ebexoeg eoraa32e u IVIWSIVN TOOONN 001 007 YOI TWLOL abeyoeg BurTooo burqe H WIV IVSH TOOOXL 002 abeyoeg BurTooo burqe H WIV IVHH TOOONW 002 uotqdtz9seq yonporg Uuor3eooT qI wg S66T ZT MAUL S66T TO Potted Wd 69 7 666T L0 80 Inventory User s Manual 8 22 Trend Analysis Report Features The Trend Analysis Report shows the quantity of items sold during a particular period Use it to analyze trends in your inventory items Reports A sample Trend Analysis Report is on page 8 27 Screen Use Screen Description Trend Analysis Report Use the Trend Analysis Report screen to select the items locations product lines and periods and years that you want in the report Inventory User s Manual 8 23 Trend Analysis Report Analysis Reports Trend Analysis Report Scre
16. End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Master Code Lists menu Saving and Exiting After the list is produced the Master Code Lists menu appears Inventory User s Manual 14 13 Master Codes List Product Lines List Product Lines List T abeg sTerz qeW SutpT tng nbg ity pue utge sau uoduoo eouer ddv uoridraoseqg ASTI seur 3onpoid Ajtddns szepttng 33odew jo pug IVISAIVA WIV IVSH JINSNOdWOO SONVI IddV eur 3onpoud Wd vS 1 6661 L0 80 Inventory User s Manual 14 14 Account Codes List Features Use the Account Codes List to make sure that the account codes are correct and as a reference when you assign account codes to items Reports A sample Account Codes List is on page 14 18 Screen Use Screen Description Account Codes List Use the Account Codes List screen to select the account codes that you want in the list Inventory User s Manual 14 15 Account Codes List Master Codes List Account Codes List Screen C SAS ID Output chvirg fFbrizzgr p E mEvirw dE iis spcrsmn E ad Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Enter the range of account codes you want in the list 14 16 Inventory User s Manual Master Codes List Account Codes List Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the list to a printer File Select F to send the list to a file Screen Select S to send the list to the screen
17. Screen Description Summary History The Summary History screen has two sections Use the default Summary History screen to view the totals of the items purchased or returned COGS COGS returned and requisitions When you press M the second section of the screen appears and you can view the totals of transfers adjustments builds and issues To add or change information on this screen use the Inventory Transactions function or the Location Transfers function Inventory User s Manual 4 13 Summary History Information Inquiry Summary History Screen 0545 To Being La Pw tjip Irem ID quu Sammy Himcory El amp eprrieal Package Lozwrtan Wanni FEgricd T Tuar 199p Cumnti cimm Unita PEG Pec Tr Furrhamem Purck amp Rerurnm Fala Jalsa Rerurn Har Fega j od Oc un Loo 0000 2000 uuu Ma nia DOOUD Lod Ooo ooo nooo 5 D cO UC Lin O ood eun occ par Lata zunn ocou iGc uu 20 0000 0000 Oooo OS Ls ODUU 00 200 G00 nooo unun Dir ie Ma erin Meri el DH M00 moo OLS live od 2000 25 0000 0000 nunn 12719 z75 0000 2000 Lod 2000 daon roni iiim t30 00h od Pl oo mio mith 107 1992 ODOU conn z0 0000 0000 0000 ng Lae Ln5 ooug 0000 62 0000 ooon onoo UDE 1258 B00 ono 75 000 woo gapt L2 f gt 1000 2000 Ocnn 1080 2000 0000 nunn TTD z5z 00 4 0000 Ban o00n0 woo gag Eucg Next item Pray item Fitrit tte Laat item Headec Change wigw Unita_ Field Definitions Field Name It
18. Serial Number The serial numbers that are in the lot are displayed Unit Cost The unit cost of the serialized item is displayed 5 30 Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Inventory Transactions Field Name Description Unit Price The unit price of the serialized item is displayed Command Bar Definitions Command Definition Enter edit Move the prompt gt to the line you want to edit and press Enter The Edit Lotted Serial Number window appears Append Press A to add lot numbers to the item The Append Lotted Serial Number window appears Lot number Press L to enter a different lot number Done Press D to save your entries when you are finished adding or editing information about serial numbers Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the transaction screen you were working with press D Inventory User s Manual 5 31 Inventory Transactions Daily Work Append Edit Lotted Serial Number Window pss TUR Tyra Purchases PurczasE Purchase Furctamzm Purchase Field Definitions 5 32 Field Name Serial No Auto Generate Orig Qty Fulfill Qty Backord Qty Inventory Trzumrticzs Loo II QuanritT Unite Dars Tar HOG znun ococg EX Livi Laos 4 EHD001 Z CO Ek Leis igs 4 NHnno1 sn coo Ek LEi LODE 4 EHD2OI Inn oocu EA lz 15 19B2 4 HDD E D Cm EA 12 15 1999 4 Line M000 of DOOOOUS Entec edit Adjustoest D ls Purchase Description Enter th
19. Slow Fast Movement Report 8 11 Sales Analysis Report 8 15 Gross Profit Analysis Report 8 19 Trend Analysis Report 8 23 Movement Trending Report 8 27 Inventory User s Manual Periodic Process Item Price Change 9 3 Cost Changes 9 7 Quantity Cross Verification 9 11 Year End Maintenance 9 15 Purge Selected Files 9 19 Rebuild Item Quantities 9 23 Physical Inventory Physical Inventory Selection 10 3 Freeze Quantities 10 7 Print Physical Inventory Tags 10 11 Print Physical Inventory Worksheets 10 15 Physical Counts Tag Entry 10 19 Physical Counts Worksheet Entry 10 27 Batch List 10 33 Physical Count List 10 37 Variance Report 10 41 Physical Count Valuation Report 10 45 Update Perpetual Inventory 10 49 File Maintenance Items 11 3 Item Locations 11 17 Locations 11 51 Price Structures 11 55 Promotional Pricing 11 59 Tables 11 63 Code Maintenance Sales Categories 12 3 Customer Levels 12 5 Product Lines 12 7 Account Codes 12 9 Forecast Types 12 13 Inventory User s Manual Standard Cost Makeup Codes 12 17 User Defined Fields 12 19 User Defined Field Sorts 12 23 Master File Item Detail List 13 3 Item Summary List 13 7 Item Locations List 13 11 Location Detail List 13 15 Price Structure List 13 19 Promotional Pricing List 13 23 Tables List 13 27 Master Codes List Sales Categories List 14 3 Customer Levels List 14 7 Product Lines List 14 11 Account Codes List 14 15 Forecast Types List 14 19 Co
20. entering physical entering physical counts for the batch If you enter N the inventory for the Physical Inventory menu appears batches Note You must also produce the Variance Report before you update your perpetual inventory You cannot reconstruct this report after you post Enter batches to update Enter the batches whose quantities you want to update 10 50 Inventory User s Manual Physical Inventory Update Perpetual Inventory Field Name Description Post variance amount to If Inventory is not interfaced with General Ledger N is General Ledger displayed If Inventory is interfaced with General Ledger and you want to post directly enter Y if not enter N Post to General Ledger Enter 1 to post the current year s files to General Ledger or 2 to post last year s files to General Ledger Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the log to a printer File Select F to send the log to a file End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Physical Inventory menu Saving and Exiting After the log is produced the Physical Inventory menu appears Inventory User s Manual 10 51 Physical Inventory Update Perpetual Inventory Log Update Perpetual Inventory c9 v c9 v cl potted 03 peasod co9 v 00070S Z000NN 00P00L ELVE c9 v 000701 000NW 00v00L l1vd 31pezj 31qed 3unooov 19 S ON 3oT TeTz S qI 20T qr Asoau aur dI yo eg AxoqueAu enaedaeq e3epdn Wd priz Il 3bW
21. 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 L2T 0000 0000 TOZ 0000 0000 S 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 L2T 0000 0000 107 0000 0000 S 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 L2T 0000 0000 TOZ 0000 0000 SF 0000 0000 9 0000 Idav ufi Idav ufi Idav ufi Idav ufi Idav ufi Idav ufi Idav ufi Idav ufi Idav ufi Idav ufi Idav ufi Idav ufi Idav ufi Va UIV IVH S661 60 7 S661 60 7 S661 v0 0 S661 60 7 S661 60 7 S661 v0 0 S661 60 7 S661 60 7 S661 v0 0 S66T ZT T Va WIV IVSH 000W 000 9 000XL OOONW 0000W 000 9 000XL 000NI 000W 000 9 000XL OOONW 0000W 007007 jeuejjog 1 eM 007002 SUuoT4TPUOD 1euorirpuo5 1euorirpuo5 1euorjrpuo5 IW 00 00c ai 00 00c i 00 00c i 00 00c qe yee qe yee qe yee qe yee 197M 002002 iej3eM 002002 197M 002002 zeyem 002002 eoeuinj 00 eoeuinj 00 eoeuinj 00 eoeuinj 00 00 00 00 00 uoridragoseq QI weil 0 0 0000 0000 0 0 0 0 008 ISL 008 TSL 0 0 0000 0000 POT 0 0 0068 8cttG 0068 8ZEEs 0 0 0000 0000 C19 0 0 006L L9 68 006L LIESE 0 0 0000 0000 0 0 0 0 0086 S6881 0086 6881
22. 0000 1 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Uuoradidoseq eqixq won uorjdraoseq GI dO0pueA uor3eooT qI uejl WY cS 6 S661 87 S0 00800 pue 00t00L O0OTOOL sted jo dn spew INS sa urqeo HSINI3 1000NA 00L Va 40 X OE MoputM paepueis OONIL OOONN 019 Va 40 X bz MOpUTM paepueis OOWIL TOOONW 009 Oud Xeo ebexoeg xaoMTTTW OOTIN 000NW SSS 9d abeyoeg YIOMTTTW OOTIN OOONN 0S6 Va ZOUCTITPUCD ATW QOOHL OOONN 00 00c Va eoeuang 000HI OOONN 00100c vd ebexoeq BurTooo Burae H 000HL TOOONW ooz xXoo3s Ajeges abeg STACT TEAL eso ur pe31muuo 3epao uo 3u uqazed q urT 3onpoad pueg uo uorqeorTddv snqeqs qI W31 Ag Z000NW qI uor3eooT 31odey aae v yooIs Aaeges Atddns szepttng 0000 YOTYAINI IVIWXIVI 0000 LANTEWO ATPY 0000 HOINWHIXN IVISXIVI 0000 8 SMOGNIM p nurTquoosrq 0000 HOINWHIXN IVISXIVI 0000 c SMOQNIM penurquoosrd 0000 YOTYAINI INITSXIVI 0000 ONTCTING 3a Tosqo 0000 YOTYAINI IVISXIVI 0000 SNIGIInH AT3OV 0000 ONIGTING WIV IVUH 0000 8 Tdd UW SATIOV 0000 ONIGTING WIV IVSH 0000 8 Tdd UW SATIOYV 0000 ONIGTING WIV IVSH 0000 SNIGIInH AT3OV 3epao uo 3ueujg1edeq eur 3onpoud puey uo uoraeor ddy snqeqs GI ue3I Aq TOOONW GI Uor3e2o1 31odey aae v xooas Aaeges Aqddng szepttng uor3dr3os q eqixq Won uoradrzoseq GI JopueA uor3eooT qI ue3r WY S 6 6661 82 S0 Inventory Use
23. Frinr Farra DPesoriprion BE Disaconrimesd TES Feint Ep Location Mo San Luru FES Print Lot Detail TES Frinr Serisi becail YES Frint lcar 551d Jeria Humbarm EO etek chr LEE CPheiztec p P evirt D s ilg Spcrmsmn E zd Field Definitions Field Name Pick Print By Include Status Print extra description Print by location Description Enter the range of items locations product lines and user defined fields you want in the report Select the option by which you want to organize the report Enter Y for each item status you want to include in the report Enter N for each status you want to exclude If you want the report to include additional descriptions enter Y if not enter N You can enter Y only if you elected to use additional descriptions in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function If you want to separate the information by location enter Y if not enter N Inventory User s Manual Reports Item Status Report Field Name Print lot detail Print serial detail Print lost sold serial numbers Description If you want to print lot detail enter Y if not enter N If you want to print serial detail enter Y if not enter N If you want to print serial numbers for lost or sold items enter Y if not enter N Command Bar Definitions Command Printer File Screen End Saving and Exiting Description Select P to send the report to a pr
24. Inquiry Inquiry flag appears at the bottom of the screen F3 Delete the information on the screen Since this command can Delete delete an entire record use it with caution F4 Open a menu of utilities A calculator and Global Inquiry Other which consolidates and presents information from other applications are some of the utilities on the Other Commands menu See the Resource Manager User s Manual for information about the utilities on the Other Commands menu F5 Move the cursor back to the first field on the screen or to the Abandon first field after the key field The entries and changes you made are erased Inventory User s Manual 1 29 Function Commands Introduction 1 30 Key F6 Maintenance F7 Exit F8 List Shift F2 Information PgUp Start over PgDn Proceed Tab Jump Enter or Down Arrow Enter Up Arrow Ctrl V Verification on off Ctrl G Bell on off Ctrl F Quick on off Operation Go directly to the appropriate File Maintenance function to update information about the field you are in if the Maint flag appears at the bottom of the screen Exit from a screen or a window and disregard everything you entered Send the contents of the screen to a printer or a text file Open an Information menu Each selection on the menu is an information window that you can access if the Info flag appears at the bottom of the screen Each window contains
25. Quantity Cross Verification function 9 11 log 9 14 Quick entry turning on or off 1 30 R Rebuild Item Quantities log 9 26 Reorder Processing menu functions 1 5 Reorder Report function 6 7 producing 3 16 sample 6 10 Inventory User s Manual reorders calculating 3 15 report commands 1 34 Down Arrow 1 35 End 1 34 Exit 1 34 F7 1 34 Home 1 34 PgDn 1 34 PgUp 1 34 Right Arrow 1 34 Tab 1 34 Up Arrow 1 35 Reports conventions 1 37 including all information 1 37 limiting information 1 37 selecting information for 1 37 reports printing 3 26 Reports menu functions 1 5 Resource Manager backing up 2 33 operating systems 1 3 Options and Interfaces 2 10 Right Arrow report command 1 34 S safety stock 2 27 Safety Stock Alert Report function 8 3 sample 8 6 Sales Analysis Report function 8 15 sample 8 18 Sales Categories definition 2 14 function 12 3 setting up 2 14 2 21 Sales Categories List function 14 3 sample 14 6 Sales Order interface 2 9 2 10 5 3 11 55 IX 9 Index sales T accounts 3 12 sales transactions 3 5 invoice 3 6 miscellaneous credit 3 6 new order 3 5 verify order 3 5 Sales Trending function 4 25 scroll region commands 1 35 Down Arrow 1 35 End 1 35 Enter 1 35 F3 1 35 Home 1 35 Ins 1 35 PgDn 1 35 PgUp 1 35 Up Arrow 1 35 seasonal items using forecast reordering method 3 16 serial history option 2 11 serial information se
26. SSS TAIT BEG Saran Cat Pu bep alaa Ceregory it BEE Lpr los Agpliamies r Umriftrmticm Pome lt Pgin gt n proceed Field Definitions Field Name Description Sales Category Enter the sales category whose information you want to add or change Description Enter a description of the sales category Command Bar Definitions This screen has no command bar Saving and Exiting To save your entries use the Proceed PgDn command To exit to the Code Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command 12 4 Inventory User s Manual Customer Levels Features Use the Customer Levels function on the Code Maintenance menu to categorize your customers This information is used in Accounts Receivable the Price Structures function and the Promotional Pricing function Reports To produce a list of the information entered in the Customer Levels function use the Customer Levels List function on the Master Code Lists menu Screen Use Screen Description Customer Levels Use the Customer Levels screen to set up your customer level codes Inventory User s Manual 12 5 Customer Levels Code Maintenance Customer Levels Screen ea TOON Be Baig Dat Fei bjp Curtomec Levels Customer level amp cEnni Dee Lp pc Rce Builders COREE BT r Umriftrmticm Frgmm lt Pgin gt u prccgmd Field Definitions Field Name Description Customer Level Enter the customer level whose information you want to add or
27. The Sales Categories List shows the information stored in the INCAxxx Sales Categories file sales categories and descriptions You can use the list as a reference when you assign sales categories to items Reports A sample Sales Categories List is on page 14 6 Screen Use Screen Description Sales Categories List Use the Sales Categories List screen to select the category codes that you want in the list Inventory User s Manual 14 3 Sales Categories List Master Codes List Sales Categories List Screen DEAS DD gu Ls Du kjp Isler Categories Liszt Bick Cacegery From ki Thru uz Cutgut rict fPbrizzgr p F evirt m ilg 3pccesn E zd Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Enter the range of sales categories you want in the list 14 4 Inventory User s Manual Master Codes List Sales Categories List Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the list to a printer File Select F to send the list to a file Screen Select S to send the list to the screen End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Master Code Lists menu Saving and Exiting After the list is produced the Master Code Lists menu appears Inventory User s Manual 14 5 Master Codes List Sales Categories List I obeq Sales Categories List 331odew jo pug SMOPUTM T SMOpUTM sTe1njonias p speriejew Meu STeTIe3eN MEY I STeriejew Meu sobexoeq TER
28. Wa 12000000 TOOWIL ZOOONN Uozna vp66l GT LO S610Z Wa 0000 SZZ 00S2 Z 0000 Wa 17000000 100 000NI oand p66T ST L0 S6TOZ Wa 0000 Sc 00Sz z 0000 Wa 12000000 100 Z000NI oand 66T ST LO S610Z Wa 0000 Scc 0062 7 0000 Wa 12000000 TOOWIL ZOOONN yoma H66T ST LO S610Z Wa 0000 Sc 00Sz Z 0000 Wa 12000000 100 000NI oand p66T ST L0 S6TOZ Wa 0000 Sc 00Sz Z 0000 V3 12000000 100 000NI oand p66T ST L0 S6107 V3 0000 Scc 0062 7 0000 Wa 12000000 TOOWIL ZOOONN omma H66T ST LO S610Z Wa 0000 Sc 00Sz Z 0000 Wa 12000000 100 000NI oand p66T ST L0 S6TOZ Wa 0000 Sc 00Sz Z 0000 V3 12000000 100 000NI oand p661 ST L0 S6107 V3 0000 Scc 00Sz Z 0000 Wa 12000000 TOOWIL ZOOONN yoana vp66l GT LO S610Z Wa 0000 Scc 00Sz Z 0000 V3 17000000 100 000NI oand p66T ST L0 S6TOZ Wa 0000 SC 00Sz z 0000 Wa 12000000 100 000NI oand p66T ST L0 S610Z Wa 0000 Scc 0062 7 0000 Wa 12000000 TOOWIL ZOOONN Uozna H66T ST LO S610Z Wa 0000 Scc 00S2 Z 0000 V3 12000000 100 000NI oand vP66l GSI L0 S610Z Wa 0000 Sc 00Sz Z 0000 Wa 12000000 100 000NI oand p661 ST L0 S6107 V3 0000 Scc 0062 7 0000 Wa 12000000 TOOWIL ZOOONN Uoznd v66l GT LO S610Z Wa 0000 Sc 00Sz Z 0000 V3 12000000 100 000NI oand vP66l GST L0 S610Z Wa 0000 SC 00Sz Z 0000 V3 12000000 100 000NI oand 66T ST LO S610Z Wa 0000 Scc 00Sz Z 0000 Wa 12000000 TOOWIL ZOOONN Uozna v66l GT LO S610Z Wa 0000 Sc 00Sz Z 0000 V3 12000000 100 000NI oand p66T ST L0 S6TOZ Wa 0000 Ge 00sz Z 0
29. customer levels adjustment types adjustment bases and adjustment amounts Reports A sample Price Structure List is on page 13 22 Screen Use Screen Description Price Structure List Use the Price Structure List screen to select the price IDs that you want in the list Inventory User s Manual 13 19 Price Structure List Master File Price Structure List Screen E aan ia Suis Ex fmi ki r Fric Fructus List Fick Price ID From APPL Ticu ATRL Cutgut Eyice Fbirizzmgr p F evirt di iia S crmmn E zd Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Enter the range of price IDs you want in the list 13 20 Inventory User s Manual Master File Price Structure List Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the list to a printer File Select F to send the list to a file Screen Select S to send the list to the screen End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Master File Lists menu Saving and Exiting After the list is produced the Master File Lists menu appears Inventory User s Manual 13 21 Master File Price Structure List Price Structure List 0000 01 0000 0000 0T 0000 01 0000 0000 S 0000 0000 S 0000 S 0000 0000 0T 0000 0000 0T 0000 01 0000 ya orza orzd orzd eod eojad orzd eotad eoTad 1802 eseg noted noTeO 1902 eseg noted 39802 eseg
30. noted noreo 3802 eseg noted 1802 eseg noted noT e5 1802 eseg noted Ur ae Ur ae oe Ur oe Ur de oe Ur ae Ur ae oe jeuojsn Tes TouM Hutotzg z uo3sno TTY zeuoysng reqqor 3oezquoo s3ep rng eov aTnej q eznjonz4s eotad jeuojsn e ese ouM butotzg z uo3sno TTJA jeuojsn reqqor joe13u0 s3ep rng eov aTnej q eznjonz4s eotad qeuiojsng Tes TouM Hutotzg z uo3sno TTJA jeuojsn reqqor 3oezquoo s3ep rng eov aTnej q eunijona3g eotad ISHM TIVIN Wagon 0032 ANON ISHM TIVI Wagon 0032 ANON ISHM TIVIN Wagon 0032 ANON 31odey jo pus Sxeexg eor1d STeTIe3EW THIVA ser ddng upra ating syeerg eorag eouer ddy Tdaw qunouy queuysn py oseg 3ueursnt py uootydtz0seq T A T ASTI INPONIJS eotid Tddns szepttng I9Ae1 1euo3sno uoradragoseq qI d Wd 90 7 666T L0 80 Inventory User s Manual 13 22 Promotional Pricing List Features Use the Promotional Pricing List function on the Master File Lists menu to produce a list of promotional price IDs amounts start and end dates and items affected Reports A sample Promotional Pricing List is on page 13 26 Screen Use Screen Description Promotional Pricing List Use the Promotional Pricing List screen to select the promotional price IDs and start dates that you want in the list Inventory User s Manual 13 23 Promotional Pricing List Master File Promotional Pricing Li
31. qeq VJS WY GS 6 6661 8 S0 Inventory User s Manual 13 26 Tables List Features Produce the Tables List to get information from a particular Inventory table This function is useful if you plan to change a table and want a list to compare it against Reports A sample Tables List is on page 13 30 Screen Use Screen Description Tables List Use the Tables List screen to select the table IDs that you want in the list Inventory User s Manual 13 27 Tables List Master File Tables List Screen TUNI Faing La Fmi bjp Tables Liat kpplicetiza From IH Thre IH Table 1p Fron Thru Huppreasm Blank Lines TEA Fase Breet Per Table TEE Cutgut chovrice fPbrizzgr p F evinr m ilg S crzgmen E zd Field Definitions Field Name Description Application IN is displayed as the application ID You cannot change it Table ID Enter the range of table IDs whose information you want in the list Suppress blank lines Most tables do not hold information in all 18 lines If you want the list to include blank lines enter Y if not enter N Page break per table If you want a page break between each table enter Y if not enter N 13 28 Inventory User s Manual Master File Tables List Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the list to a printer File Select F to send the list to a file Screen Select S to send the list to the screen End Selec
32. 0 0 0000 0000 0 0 0 0 009P 6ISC 009 6TSZ 0 0 0000 0000 V vOL 0 0 0018 vcCt8C 0018 v7 8C 0 0 0000 0000 T T9 0 0 00 0 9L0Sv 00 0 9L0SY 0 0 0000 0000 0 0 0 0 00SE 9E00T 00SE 9E00T 0 0 0000 0000 0 0 0 0 008T BEET 0081 8EET 0 0 0000 0000 POT 0 0 00T0 6899F 0010 68997 0 0 0000 0000 6 88 0 0 O0EL PTSZL OOEL PTISZL 0 0 0000 0000 0 0 0 0 00SE tvG9T OOSE EPS9T 0 0 0000 0000 0 0 0 0 008L S0cc 008L S072 0 0 0000 0000 sum pa Junouy squewjsnlpy renuuy 3rgoag pue s909 1 obeq Se eg Aqtquend queunzedag uotqeotTddy 3s 3sejd O3 ysemots sates Ag 31odey stsATeuy seTes Aqddng saeprrna Tes ase Won eUTT 3onpoud SOT WY LS 6 666T 82 S0 Inventory User s Manual 8 18 Gross Profit Analysis Report Features The Gross Profit Analysis Report shows the gross profit margin on items for a particular period Reports A sample Gross Profit Analysis Report is on page 8 23 Screen Use Screen Description Gross Profit Analysis Use the Gross Profit Analysis Report screen to select the Report items locations product lines user defined fields percent of profit and periods and years that you want in the report Inventory User s Manual 8 19 Gross Profit Analysis Report Analysis Reports Gross Profit Analysis Report Screen E MSAN TANA roms Froftt Analysis Fepoct Bi
33. 3 Enter the program you want to call 4 Enter the parameter if any for the program 5 Use the Proceed PgDn command to start the program 6 Press Enter to return to the field where you accessed Other commands D 6 Inventory User s Manual References Other Commands Product Suggestions From any field you can make edit and save suggestions for improving the product If you have a suggestion fax or mail it to Open Systems Select Product Suggestions from the Other Commands menu F4 twice from a menu F4 once from a field The function screen appears E SAn Tiii r Froduczt Zuggestiorn ye mr ici Cart THE LE H For Printed Lash Mosiriedgs s D4 19958 Applinmricni Version EL Mamu Itam Froduct Jagpertion r ax Field Definitions Field Description Suggestion This number identifies the suggestion Identification numbers start at 0001 If you want to create a new suggestion press Enter the editor creates a new suggestion number one unit higher than your last number if any If you want to recall a suggestion for editing enter the number of the suggestion Application Enter the application you want to make a suggestion for Inventory User s Manual D 7 Other Commands References Field Version Menu Item Status Last Modified Description Description Enter the version number of the application 4 5 4 53 etc Enter the name of the menu item you want to make a suggestion f
34. 3509 3x9 3s02 arun 00 00 00 SG Ee 00 00 00 00 00 00 8 ccv SG ETE 00 SG ETE eoTid pepueixs 3902 pepueaxs Uor3eoo ueij Ag aurdd Teuznop uor3oesuei Atddng szepttng Dud S661 80 0000 T S661 L0 80 010000 dqiina 10032V Oud S661 80 0000 T S66T L0 80 800000 Oud S661 80 0000 1 8661 L0 80 L00000 QI S9f4d I A T 380 sarun reek pd Aqrquend e3eq suezy ON bas uotTjecoT ueqy Ag pad Teuinop uoraoesuei Atddns szepttng qrodey jo puq STeIOL 3Tded snosueTTSosTH STeIOL OTOAUI dV STeIOL peateosy spoo9 av STe3oL I P10 M N STeIOL 3Tpez2 snoeue 9os TW S e30 SOTOAUT uv STe30I Tepz0 JT3I A uv STe3oL 1ep3o0 M N s e3ol queujgsnfpy eseez0eq S e30l queuwqsn py eseedou adh uor3oesuei Wd Spite S661 L0 80 ebexoeg TeOT1I3O TH 39p40 Od TOOONN 001 ebexoeg TeOT1I3O TH Tepz0 OS I000NW 001 ebexoeg eoti3oe H zour pV TOOONN 001 3u eunoo uoradizoseq d L qI 201 QI w Wd Sv t 6661 10 80 Inventory User s Manual 5 58 Transfers Journal Features Use the Transfers Journal function on the Daily Work menu to print the transfers that were entered in the Location Transfers function Reports A sample Transfers Journal is on page 5 62 Screen Use Screen Description Transfers Journal Use the Transfers Journal screen to select the locations and items that you want in the journal Inventory User s Manual 5 59 Transfers Journal Daily
35. 4 Adi Ameunt rm Umriftrmrica Tmmr Ezd Clcmmnut Fromctinnml Tzirirgz Geert Bars 32 01 1998 End Tatum 12 31 1928 Proms ion Sriceria Units From Thre Fredurr Liam From Thr Mpphigsrics From Thru Dipit imirt From Thr Frice Information price 10 0000 Poems lt Pgln gt n prccggmd Field Definitions Field Name Promo ID Copy From Description Start Date End Date Promotion Criteria 11 60 Description Enter the ID of the promotion you are setting up This field appears if you entered a new promotional ID Enter the ID of the promotion you want to copy Enter a description of the promotion Enter the date the promotional pricing will start Enter the date the promotional pricing will end Enter the range of price IDs customer levels item IDs locations IDs units product lines and user defined fields you want in the promotional pricing Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Promotional Pricing Field Name Adj Base Adj Type Adj Amount Description Enter the adjustment base for the promotional pricing No base fixed dollar amount Standard cost cost of the item determined by the cost of the components Base cost fixed cost Average price weighted average of selling prices Price selling base price List price published price Minimum price lowest selling price Calculated price price at the time the price break is calculated Enter to use a p
36. 5 TaeE beTinged SGEE 1 6 Wasr bedined 3arr 3 1 z Tou Fant to Print rhe Reporr By Loosrics TE lmr uda Tee That Ara Kwa Order Point Ha Cutmgut chovrice Field Definitions Field Name Calculation Method Print By Do you want to print the report by location Include items that are above order point 6 8 Faccdec Fagnrt fPbrizzgr p F evirt D s ilg i S crzgmn E zd Description Select the calculation method you want in the report 1 for the EOQ method 2 for the Forecast method 3 for the Min Max method or 4 for all the calculation methods Select the option by which you want to organize the report If you want to separate the reorder quantity for each location enter Y if not enter N If you want to include items whose quantity is above the order point enter Y if not enter N Inventory User s Manual Reorder Processing Reorder Report Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the report to a printer File Select F to send the report to a file Screen Select S to send the report to the screen End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Reorder Processing menu Saving and Exiting After the report is produced the Reorder Processing menu appears Inventory User s Manual 6 9 Reorder Processing Reorder Report Reorder Report 00007 GIT 00007 06 0000 WH 0000 0000 0000 0000 40 X OE MOPUTM pxepueis WH 0
37. Adjustment COGS Adjustment Purch Price Variance Phys Count Variance Transfer Cost On Hand Inventory User s Manual Item Locations Description If you changed the amount of the safety stock enter M manual If the system calculates the safety stock the safety stock status is calculated If you want to freeze the current order point quantity enter F Enter or change the most economic order quantity you usually order from the vendor If you changed the EOQ amount enter M manual If the system calculates EOQ the EOQ status is calculated If you want to freeze the current EOQ quantity enter F Enter or change the minimum quantity you want to order Enter or change the GL account code you want to use The sales account code is displayed The COGS account code is displayed The inventory account code is displayed The WIP account code is displayed The inventory adjustment account code is displayed The COGS adjustment account code is displayed The purchase price variance account code is displayed The physical count variance account code is displayed The transfer cost account code is displayed The quantity on hand at the location is displayed 11 23 Item Locations File Maintenance Field Name Committed In Use Available On Order Description Enter or change the number of units of the item on order for customers or otherwise reserved If Inventory is interfaced with Sales Order
38. Append Edit Lot Number Window sas TANA Invmntczy Traramrticza Lor EMEY Iram ID 000001 Wallpaper cConrsemwpcrary L Lcc ID THunni EIHMERFOLTIZ WABEHOCUEI Unltd FEL Requested ry 1 0 Ordarmd Guentity Fulfilled ory Ext Coat 000001 of DODOCUD Lppend Lort Humbar Lot Hn zT1pPG710 Trig ry OOOO toa 4 2000 Eas Cost 2 40 Fulfill ory 2 0000 Backood i oon Can hi r r Variftrariom Poems PugDKR gt u proceed Field Definitions Field Name Description Lot No Enter the lot number of the item being adjusted sold or purchased The quantity on hand and available appear at the bottom of the screen Orig Qty The original quantity of the lot is displayed If you are entering a new purchase or sales order enter the quantity Fulfill Qty Enter or change the quantity of the lot needed to fill the transaction If you are entering a new order this field is skipped Backord Qty The quantity on backorder is displayed Cost The cost of the lot is displayed 5 20 Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Inventory Transactions Field Name Description Ext Cost The extended cost quantity x cost is displayed Comment Enter additional information about the lot Command Bar Definitions This window has no command bar Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the Lot Entry window use the Proceed PgDn command Inventory User s Manual 5 21 Inventory Transactions Daily Work Seria
39. Application Info Window Title Bar Menus works only with Start style menu Displays the a functions display box Switch between text and graphical menu styles without going into Defaults Displays information about the applications you have installed When working using the graphical menus you can use the pull down menus and tool buttons graphical icons to access functions without using the function keys While the function keys still work in the graphical menus the menu bar and icons offers you a choice in how you access certain functions Using the mouse move the cursor to the menu and click once or click on an icon for the function desired Pictured below is the OSAS pull down menu icon selection 1000 OMN brit CES Accounting Salina Fe Tew Faewhe he pep le 21 8n ss Inventory User s Manual 1 19 Graphical Style Menus File Menu R nee cues uem Command Icon Key Access code F4 Sample data set F5 or Live Data set Workstation date F6 Exit F7 Access Code dialog box 1 Enter the access code Introduction Result Displays the Access Code dialog box See Access Code dialog box below Toggles between the Sample Data and the Live Data Displays the Workstation date dialog box See Workstation Date dialog box below Exits from OSAS 2 Click OK to save your entry and return to the Main Menu or Exit to abandon the dialog box and return to the Main menu 1 20 Inventory
40. Daily Tasks Work Flow When you enter a verify order for a serialized item the serial number must be in the INSNxxx file and have available status When you enter a verify order for a lotted item you must enter a lot number that is on file and the quantity Invoice Use the invoice status to record sales activity Sales invoices are items that are sold and shipped at the same time An invoice combines the new order and verify order statuses increases the quantity in use and decreases the quantity available When you enter an invoice the costing method you are using FIFO LIFO average or standard appears in the Cost field and cannot be changed When you enter an invoice for a serialized item the serial number must be in the INSNxxx file and have available status When you enter an invoice for a lotted item you must enter a lot number that is on file and the quantity Miscellaneous Credit Use the miscellaneous credit status when a customer returns goods to you A miscellaneous credit decreases the quantity in use and increases the quantity available When you enter a miscellaneous credit the costing method you are using FIFO LIFO average or standard appears in the Cost field but you can change it When you enter a miscellaneous credit for a serialized item either the serial number cannot be in the INSNxxx file or if the serial number is in the INSNxxx file it must have sold status If the serial number is in the IN
41. EInvmntzczy Trazumrticza Lor ExrrEu Tram ID 000i Wallpaper Conrsmpcrary L Lex ID THununi EKIHMERFCOLIS WABEHOUEI nina FEL aequested ULF 1 0060 Orcdarmd Guectity Fulfilled ory Ext Coat 000001 of DODCUD Line MOODS of DOS Entec mit Append Too Field Definition Field Name Description Item ID The ID of the item you are working with is displayed Loc ID The ID of the location you are working with is displayed Units The unit of measure you are working with is displayed Requested Qty The quantity being sold adjusted or purchased is displayed Lot Number The lot numbers for the item are displayed Ordered Quantity The quantity ordered for the lot is displayed Fulfilled Qty The quantity available to fill the order for the lot is displayed Ext Cost The extended cost quantity x cost of the lot is displayed 5 18 Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Inventory Transactions Command Bar Definitions Command Definition Enter edit Move the prompt gt to the line you want to edit and press Enter The Edit Lot Number window appears Append Press A to add lot numbers to the item The Append Lot Number window appears Done Press D to save your entries when you are finished adding or editing information about lots Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the transaction window you were working with press D Inventory User s Manual 5 19 Inventory Transactions Daily Work
42. End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Reports menu Saving and Exiting After the report is produced the Reports menu appears Inventory User s Manual 7 25 Reports Serialized History Report Serialized History Report 9661 82 50 00Sc c S10000 9661 82 50 766T LZ LO pra 0ccx1c 0cv Sc 9661 82 50 TOOWIL 00Sc c 12000000 9661 82 S0 v661 Sl LO eseupand 0ccx1C 9661 82 50 00Sc c S10000 9661 82 50 766T LZ LO pra 61e TC 0cv Sc 9661 82 50 TOOWIL 00Sc c 12000000 9661 82 S0 v661 Sl LO eseupand 61e TC 9661 82 50 00Sc c S10000 9661 82 50 766T LZ LO PT tN 81eXT1C 0cv Sc 9661 82 50 TOOWIL 00Sc c 12000000 9661 82 S0 P66T ST LO eseupand 81exT1C 9661 82 80 00Sc c S10000 9661 82 50 766T LZ LO PT tng LITZ 0cv Sc 9661 82 80 TOOWIL 00Sc c 12000000 9661 82 S0 v661 Sl LO eseupand LT WIZ 9661 82 50 00Sc c S10000 9661 82 50 766T LZ LO pra 91e TC 0cv Sc 9661 82 50 TOOWIL 00Sc c 12000000 9661 82 S0 v661 STl LO eseupand 91e TC 0cv Sc 9661 82 50 TOOWIL 00Sc c 12000000 9661 82 S0 P66T ST LO eseupand 0001 2 0cv Sc 9661 82 50 TOOWIL 00Sc c 12000000 9661 82 S0 v661 Sl LO eseupand 0001 1 SNIWQLOVAONVA SITIOgVSNNIN ZOOONN ON AUT qeq AUT 3sn5 pueA qu wuog orza 3soo ON pIo oO wW drus eqeq zepio d r uery dey zequiny Terz s uotydtzoseq qI 20T iequnN series 00800 W71 uoraeooT ue3l Ag 3aodey 1ojstH p zrTer s WY S 6 I obegd Aqddng szepirng 6661 82 80 Inventory User s Manual 7 26
43. Enter or change the serial number in the lot Source Lot Enter the lot the serial number is being transferred from Destination Lot Enter the lot the serial number is being transferred to Cost The cost of the lotted serialized item is displayed Trans Cost Enter the cost of transferring the item to the destination lot Comment Enter additional information about the serialized item being transferred Command Bar Definitions 5 52 Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Location Transfers This window has no command bar Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the Serial Lot Number Entry window use the Proceed PgDn command To exit to the Serial Lot Number Entry window without saving your entries use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 53 Transactions Journal Features Use the Transactions Journal function on the Daily Work menu to print transactions that were entered in the Inventory Transactions function Reports A sample Transactions Journal is on page 5 58 Screen Use Screen Description Transactions Journal Use the Transactions Journal screen to select the locations items and types of transactions that you want in the journal Inventory User s Manual 5 55 Transactions Journal Daily Work Transactions Journal Screen SAS Ve Gaig Cat Pow be r Yr Trunraction Journal Pick Location TE From Cano Thru TXDOCGL Irem TE From ino Thru zn Frit byi 1 Irumm lccmticn z
44. File Lists menu appears Inventory User s Manual 13 9 Master File Item Summary List Item Summary List qrodey jo pus ON pezr eraesuoN 0 Dud SNIGIIDG WIV INSH ON AT3OV ebexoeg BurTooo purae H 0 Dud SNIGIIDH Td Sak ating 002 ON p zZTTETI SUON 0 9d OINIONTH IVTHSLVA SHA SAT3OV ebexoeg eori32e s 0 Dud ONTCTING Td ON ating 001 3ubr M Won 3ATnej q Z piedi aesn eur 3onpo4ud amp S30T MOBIL d r uoradragosed sseTO Xe Won eseg T preig aesQ ZA3oDeqeo se es cadepaooey OMY snjeijs weql QUe3I peqqty qI sotzd qI wy Ag ISTI xeuung uejr Wd 0 Z T bea Aqddng szepttng 6661 10 80 Inventory User s Manual 13 10 Item Locations List Features Use the Item Locations List function on the Master File Lists menu to produce a list of location price cost vendor bin lot and serial information about your inventory items Reports A sample Item Locations List is on page 13 14 Screen Use Screen Description Item Locations List Use the Item Locations List screen to select the items locations and user defined fields that you want in the list Inventory User s Manual 13 11 Item Locations List Master File Item Locations List Screen MAAS DNT Gating Cat Pmi biip teem Loceticas List Bick Irem 13 Trm io Prime py Thru 200 1 Itum ID L carica TE MTOUUI z Ppoaert Line Thru THONI 3 Applicaricn Applicm zinn Frmz BUELDISE 4 Dapar mant TRE ME APPL User Defined Berk I Bepsrrmer
45. Home To jump to the last application on the menu press End To select a function from an application menu highlight and select your choices the same way you do on the Main menu with one exception you can press PgDn only when an option leads to another menu and you must press Enter to select a function On an application menu you can press PgUp to move to the menu immediately above it If you are several menu levels away from the Main menu you can return to the Main menu by pressing PgUp repeatedly or by pressing the Tab key You can exit from a menu in these ways Press the PgUp key to go to the previous menu one menu up Press the Tab key to go to the Main menu e Use the Exit F7 command to go to the operating system Function Keys Used in the Text menu Most keyboards have a set of function keys usually labeled with the letter F and a number Within the menu commands are assigned to these function keys You can use the commands to work with data entry screens 1 12 Inventory User s Manual Text Menu Except for the Command Help Esc the Jump Tab commands and the Enter key you can use the Keyboard function in Resource Manager to reassign any function key to any command Key Esc Command help F1 Function Help F2 Favorites Menu F3 Change Company F4 Access Code F4 twice Other Menu F5 Live Sample swap F6 Workstation Date F7 Exit F9 Application Setup
46. ID The ID of the transferred item is displayed To Loc ID The ID of the location the item is being transferred to is displayed Requested Qty The quantity that is being transferred is displayed Source Lot Number The lot that the item is being transferred from is displayed 5 42 Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Location Transfers Field Name Description Dest Lot Number The lot that the item is being transferred to is displayed Ext Cost The total cost item cost x quantity is displayed Command Bar Definitions Command Description Enter edit Move the prompt gt to the lot number you want to edit and press Enter The Edit Lot Number window appears Append Press A to add a lot number The Append Lot Number window appears Done Press D to go to the Location Transfers screen Saving and Exiting To exit to the Location Transfers screen press D or use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 43 Location Transfers Daily Work Append Edit Lot Number Window DEAS IDH Saige Kak Dni bep From Trap From Loc Unkle LL Source lot maca Lot Desrinarion Lor Jmatity Trana Cot Ee a DE r Umrifirmticm Location Tranafgrz Lot IME To Toe ED anani Tc Loc IJ ESUDD1 kequespte GEF L DOTI Tage Lot Kumbar Ext Coat 000001 of DODOCUD ippend Let Humbar Z qDUT14 ora 1 0000 Com 1 7800 Ert Comt 1 74 0000 Frees lt Pgln gt n proceed Field Definition
47. LSE 00 IZZ 00 12z 00 SLZ 00 SLZ Fpa 3tqed Suor3oesued 3sod Atddns sz pTrng QI w Wd Lv 6661 10 80 Inventory User s Manual 5 66 GL Adjustments Journal Features Use the GL Adjustments Journal function on the Daily Work menu to list COGS adjustments in the INCJxxx COGS Journal file If Accounts Payable Purchase Order are interfaced with Inventory COGS adjustments from those applications are also posted through this function Reports A sample GL Adjustments Journal is on page 5 70 Screen Use Screen Description GL Adjustments Journal Use the GL Adjustments Journal screen to select locations and items for the journal Inventory User s Manual 5 67 GL Adjustments Journal Daily Work GL Adjustments Journal Screen E aan ni Gating La Pes kin r GL Kkdjusxtmwntz Journal Fick Location IP From f a a Thru TXDWROE Iram ID From Loo Thru pira Print by 1 Item Loeb pon i GU Periodi Tear 1 Sequence Number Jutgut cavice CPhciztec p F evirt i ilg SPzrzsmn E zd Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Enter the range of locations and items whose information you want in the journal Print By Select the option by which you want to organize the journal Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the journal to a printer File Select F to send the journal to a file 5 68 Inventory User s Manual Daily Work GL Adjus
48. Master File Lists functions to print lists of information about item detail item location price structure and tables These lists are useful if you are planning to make changes want to add information or keep a record of information that is on your system Master Code Lists Use the Master Code Lists functions to print lists of information about sales categories accounts codes and user defined fields 1 6 Inventory User s Manual Conventions Your manual will help you to install OSAS on any standard machine within many popular operating systems and help you with your accounting software questions In the manual we use the term Conventions or standards to help describe complicated processes new terms and to help you use your OSAS applications Manual Conventions This User s Manual is divided into these sections made up of several chapters e The Introduction provides an overview of this application and the OSAS system including installation procedures graphical and text based application features and function key references e Installation explains the steps necessary to begin using this application in your company including how to install the application on your system e The last part of your manual is made of several chapters each chapter describing a function group within this application Mouse Conventions The standard mouse has two buttons left and right each performing certain functio
49. Previous screen Saving and Exiting Description Move the prompt gt to the line you want to edit and press Enter Press A to add a unit of measure to the list Press D to go to the Default field and edit the default unit of measure set up on the General Information screen Press N to go to the next screen you selected or to return to the Items screen if the Units of Measure screen is the last screen you selected Press P to go to the previous screen or to return to the Items screen if the Units of Measure screen is the first screen you selected To save the information and go to the next or previous screen press N or P respectively To exit to the File Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command 11 10 Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Items Items Alternate Items Screen F SAS Vie r Iera Alternatg liam Irem iB LOW Description Cleseriocal Package Alte Enablf Type See ID Alternate Irem LD Brart Date En re p Ber Code 83740 6FSEE Cumcuamar part ACEDDI1 13528X9 3D Cu aer Baer ZHUD1 3444 12 H alias ELECTRIC Wardnr part ELEDOL 7572232HIE Lime H jo00001 of ODDS Ester edit igpend West zzcrEEn Feevice mceruam Field Definitions Field Name Description Item ID The ID of the item you are working with is displayed Description The description of the item you are working with is displayed Alternate Type Enter the type of alternate you want to use aLias Al
50. Print By Select the option by which you want to organize the report Print by location If you want the information to be separated by location enter Y if not enter N Print lot detail If you want the report to include lot detail information enter Y if not enter N 7 20 Inventory User s Manual Reports Cost Variance Report Field Name Description Print extra description If you want the report to include additional descriptions enter Y if not enter N You can enter Y only if you elected to use additional descriptions in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function Print year to date If you want the report to show year to date information enter Y if not enter N Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the report to a printer File Select F to send the report to a file Screen Select S to send the report to the screen End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Reports menu Saving and Exiting After the report is produced the Reports menu appears Inventory User s Manual 7 21 Reports Inventory User s Manual Cost Variance Report Cost Variance Report 0000 0000W WIV IVSH 00100c oeoeuing 0000 000v5 WIV IVSH 001002 abeyoeg BurTooo burqe H 0000 000XL WIV IVSH 002 abeyoeg BurTooo burqe H 0000 000NW WIV IVSH 002 abeyoeg BurTooo burqe H 0000 0000W WIV IVSH 00
51. Reorders screen but did not use the Generate Purchase Requisitions function If you want the system to remove previous calculations and start over enter Y if not enter N If you enter Y you cannot replace overlapping calculations This field appears if you entered information on the Calculate Reorders screen but did not use the Generate Purchase Requisitions function If you want existing calculations to be replaced by current calculations that overlap enter Y if not enter N If you enter Y previous calculations that overlap will be removed Command Bar Definitions This screen has no command bar Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the Reorder Processing menu use the Proceed PgDn command Inventory User s Manual 6 5 Reorder Report Features Use the Reorder Report function on the Reorder Processing menu to print a list of the items you need to reorder based on the calculations in the Calculate Reorders function Reports A sample Reorder Report is on page 6 10 Screen Use Screen Description Reorder Report Use the Reorder Report screen to enter the calculation method you want in the report and to select the option by which to organize the report Inventory User s Manual 6 7 Reorder Report Reorder Processing Reorder Report Screen sas Toe Calculmricm Meche Beant Bw 1 EGY 1 Item II 2 Formas ce TEDUuCT Ll 1 Hir Bax 3 Applicazinn 4 ALI Zumpmrtrmnt 1
52. Report sample 8 14 source files deleting after conversion A 3 standard cost 2 9 2 16 2 29 Standard Cost Makeup Codes function 12 17 Start Over function key 1 14 1 30 statuses goods received 3 7 invoice purchase transactions 3 7 sales transactions 3 5 item 2 20 2 27 Inventory User s Manual Index item location 2 26 lost 2 31 miscellaneous credit 3 6 new order purchase transactions 3 7 sales transactions 3 5 verify order 3 5 Summary History function 4 13 superseded alternate items 2 24 Support Information command D 14 system messages B 1 T T accounts for adjustments 3 12 for COGS 3 14 for purchase price variance 3 14 for purchases 3 12 for sales 3 12 for transfers 3 12 updating perpetual inventory 3 22 Tab function key 1 30 report command 1 34 Tables entering data 2 13 function 11 63 INPDxxx 2 14 11 66 INSTDxxx 11 66 INUDSxxx 11 66 INUSRxxx 11 66 Tables List function 13 27 sample 13 30 tag numbers 3 17 tags and worksheets 3 18 printing 3 19 tax class 2 21 terminal parameter 1 9 toggle between halves of reports 1 34 Inventory User s Manual Transaction History Report function 7 31 sample 7 34 transaction item entry option 2 12 transactions adjustments 3 4 costs 3 9 entering 3 4 lotted items 3 4 lotted serialized items 3 4 posting 3 11 purchases 3 6 relationship with quantities 3 8 sales 3 5 serialized items 3 4 serialized lotted
53. Report Reports Serialized History Report Screen pss TUR r Zarimlized Hirtocy Report Bick Irem 13 From 0 Primr By Thru F02 1 Itam Lacarioca ID Fete CAUDUI 2 Lat Lon Thru TE DDi Frnducz Lina From APPLIANCE Thru EATEPTAL Loc Humber From Thru Serial Humber Fem Thru Invoice Dmra From TRE Print kiriramm and Fone Mumbar Darail o Frint Extes Pescriptiun no Output arice KPhirirzmr pF evinr W ile Spzrmemn E zd Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Enter the range of items locations product lines lot numbers serial numbers and invoice dates you want in the report Print By Select the option by which you want to organize the report Print address and phone If you want the report to include address and phone number number detail detail enter Y if not enter N You can enter Y only if Accounts Payable Purchase Order or Accounts Receivable Sales Order are interfaced with Inventory Print extra description If you want the report to include additional descriptions enter Y if not enter N You can enter Y only if you elected to use additional descriptions in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function 7 24 Inventory User s Manual Reports Serialized History Report Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the report to a printer File Select F to send the report to a file Screen Select S to send the report to the screen
54. Sales Order 2 9 2 10 INUDSxxx table 11 66 INUSRxxx table 11 66 Inventory functions 4 1 installing 2 3 inventory search commands 1 33 Shift F5 1 34 Shift F6 1 34 Shift F7 1 34 Shift F8 1 34 Inventory Transactions function 5 3 Lot Serial Number Entry window 5 30 service items 5 3 Inventory User s Manual updated 5 3 inventory value setting up 2 27 invoice status item purchase transactions 3 7 sales transactions 3 6 adding 3 3 changing costs 3 22 changing prices 3 22 defining types 2 5 IDs alternate 2 23 setting up 2 7 2 20 locations setting up 2 25 nonserial 2 5 organizing 2 5 quantities setting up 2 28 updating 3 25 serial 2 5 service 2 5 status 2 20 2 27 vs item location status 2 26 item description lookup command 1 34 Item Detail List function 13 3 sample 13 6 Item Locations File Maintenance Edit Serial Numbers window 11 48 function 11 17 screen 11 19 Item Locations Information Inquiry function 4 39 Item Locations List function 13 11 sample 13 14 Item Price Change function 9 3 log 9 6 Item Status Report function 7 3 7 7 sample 7 10 IX 5 Index Item Summary List function 13 7 sample 13 10 Items File Maintenance function 11 3 Items Information Inquiry function 4 29 J Jump function key 1 14 1 30 K keeping detail history option 2 11 keeping lot detail option 2 11 keeping serial history o
55. Un 1 00 n io G 0nn nn ADDON Mannin BOG UnD 1 0000 3 0000 5 0000 AIMEE L i OU 1 0000 17 0000 6 0000 TED amp COH io 3 0000 jn n0 n nn Tora 21 0000 ono 3 0000 14 0000 11 0000 ext Frew Last Firat Item Unita Generel Altgrnmtus Field Definitions The information on this screen comes from the Item Locations screen in the File Maintenance Items function 4 36 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Items Command Bar Definitions Command Next Prev Last First Item Units General Alternates Saving and Exiting Description Press N to view the next item record on file Press P to view the previous item record on file Press L to view the last item record on file Press F to view the first item record on file Press I to go to the Item ID field and enter a different item ID Press U to view additional units of measure for the item The Units of Measure screen appears Press G to view general information about the item The General Information screen appears Press A to view alternate items for the item you are working with The Alternate Items screen appears To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 4 37 Item Locations Features Use the Item Locations function on the Information Inquiry menu to view location detail for items location defaults GL accounts order quantities item quantities pricing c
56. Work Transfers Journal Screen DEAS DD gu La D bjp r Trmmnzfgrs Jcurnml Sack Location IP From CADOGE Thru TXDEROE ram ID From Loo Thru Da Print by 1 Item Loenbti n i Logan igm Irem 1 Sequence Hursar Cutgut rice fPbrizzgr p E Evirw X ilg i S crzgmn E zd Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Enter the range of locations and items whose information you want in the journal Print By Select the option by which you want to organize the journal 5 60 Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Transfers Journal Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the journal to a printer File Select F to send the journal to a file Screen Select S to send the journal to the screen End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Daily Work menu Saving and Exiting After the journal is produced the Daily Work menu appears Inventory User s Manual 5 61 Daily Work Transfers Journal Transfers Journal 00 00 0000 0000 00 00 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 T 00 Va 0000 0000 T 00000 S66T 90 S661 S1 90 1000VO 0001 1 jequnN elieg 008001 S6TOZT S6TOZT 301 OL 301 uoz iequnN setaeg 000NW 00S00L 3802 axg OL suea axg 38509 Wun or sueaj FuN I obegq 350 3x3 34 sarun 3s05 IFUN a4 AqTqUeNd ON b g I2 4 pd qeq suea qI 20T uoraeooT ueil Ag JU Teuxnop sadegjsuei Ajtddns s
57. a category of information about the field you are in Move the cursor back to the first field on the screen or to the first field after the key field without erasing the entries or changes you made Approve the data on the screen change the file accordingly and proceed to the next spot field or screen Move the cursor to the next block of data on the screen or to the next field that requires an entry Move the cursor to the next field and accept the data entered Move the cursor up or back one field If you changed the information in the field you were in before you used this command the change is lost when you move the cursor up If verification is turned on you must press a key twice to verify that you want to perform that operation If the bell is turned on it sounds at an error or when you must verify a command To turn off the bell use this command or the Defaults function in chapter 3 To turn the bell back on use this command again If this option is turned off the cursor stops at every field possible To make the cursor skip the fields that do not require an entry use this command to turn the option on Inventory User s Manual Introduction Function Commands Key Operation Ctrl O If this option is turned on the applicable function keys are Show hide function displayed on the screen If this option is turned off no keys are keys displayed Help Commands When you use the Help F1 command thr
58. and functions that provide confidential information or are sensitive to change use the Resource Manager Access Codes function to set up access codes on your system Access codes are company specific When you set up an access code for a user the code is assigned the company you are in After you set up your access codes print a list of the codes and store it in a safe place 2 12 Inventory User s Manual Entering Your Data When you set up your inventory items gather and enter the information in the order below As you complete the setup steps use the Master File Lists and Master Code Lists functions to print the information you entered in each step use the lists as references throughout the setup process 1 Setup the INPDxxx table 2 Enter sales categories 3 Enter customer levels 4 Enter product lines 5 Enter account codes 6 Define forecast types 7 Define standard cost makeup codes 8 Define user defined fields 9 Define user defined field sorts 10 Enter locations 11 Setup price structures Mt Enter item IDs and descriptions 13 Enter general information for items 14 Define units of measure 15 Set up alternate items 16 Enter item locations 17 Enter location information 18 Enter location price information 19 Enter location cost information 20 Enter vendor information 21 Enter bin information 22 Enter lot information 23 Enter serial information 24 Set up
59. as a kit set the flag to YES If you plan to set up lots for the item you must set the flag to YES If you want the system to calculate the reorder point for the item set the flag to YES If you are planning to use the Generate Purchase Requisitions function this flag must be set to YES Enter the smallest unit of measure for the item which is your base unit of measure Initially the base unit is also your default unit of measure but you can change the default unit of measure on the Units of Measure screen If you want assign a sales category to the item If you want assign a product line to the item Enter the price ID you want to use for the item Enter the tax class for the item Enter the weight of the item The user defined fields you set up in the User Defined Fields function are displayed Select and assign the user defined fields for the item Inventory User s Manual 2 21 Entering Your Data Setup 2 22 Units of Measure You can assign an item a default unit of measure unlimited alternate units of measure a conversion factor and a penalty amount The base unit of measure must be your smallest unit of measure You cannot change your base unit of measure if quantities are on file If the smallest unit of measure is EACH you might use the following alternate units a BOX of 10 a PKG package of 100 a CARTN carton of 500 and a CASE of 1000 The conversion factor tells the system what portion of
60. class the item belongs to Location Enter or change the location of the item you want to work with Bin No Enter or change the number of the bin where the item is stored Price ID Enter or change the price ID for the item at the location level Status Enter or change the status of the item at the location Active Discontinued Superseded Obsolete Base Cost Enter or change the base cost of the item GL Code Enter or change the general ledger account code you want to use Command Bar Definitions This screen has no command bar Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the transaction screen you were working with use the Proceed PgDn command To exit to the transaction screen you were working with without saving your entries use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 9 Inventory Transactions Daily Work Units of Measure Screen TUNI Eu LE Emi bjp i Unitz of Humzura Dsm riptinn Unit cf Menura PEG Unit oF Measure infIDrcmATtLlOn Cnmwarzinn fector L DDC Benaijty Type ii Penalty Amousr DOE Field Definitions Field Name Description Item ID Enter the ID of the item whose information you want to add or change Description The description of the item is displayed Unit of Measure Enter a unit of measure for the item Conversion Factor The conversion factor tells the system what portion of the base unit the alternate unit is Enter the conversion factor for the unit of measure 5 1
61. command the Global Inquiry command and then the Inventory option window A appears When you use a command at the bottom of the screen window B appears When you use a command at the bottom of the screen window C appears You continue to use commands until you reach window G Windows are not lettered like this they are lettered in the example to simplify the model If you wanted to return to one of the previous six windows that were displayed you could use the Global Inquiry command again but a simpler route would be to use the Inquiry F2 command where you would find six sequence numbers 001001 001002 001003 001004 001005 001006 Each number would appear with a description of a window 001001 would be paired with the description of window A 001002 would be paired with the description of window B and so forth In the window you could move the prompt gt to the number that corresponds to the description of the window you want The sequence number s notation carries two pieces of information the number of times you used the Global Inquiry command and the number of windows you accessed As explained above the number 001002 provides two details you have used the Global Inquiry command only once 001 and this window was the second window you accessed during the usage of the Global Inquiry command Therefore 001002 indicates the second window you accessed during your first usage of the Global Inquiry command Had you used t
62. field appears for sales transactions Enter the price of the serialized item Ext Price This field appears for sales transactions The extended price is displayed Comment Enter additional information about the serialized item Command Bar Definitions This window has no command bar Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the Serial Number Entry window use the Proceed PgDn command To exit to the Serial Number Entry window without saving your entries use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 25 Inventory Transactions Daily Work Serial Lot Number Entry Window ISAS TAID Inventory Trazzmrticzs perial Munber Entry Tram ID 80004 BDi mhuashar Black Lcc ID THunni EHIHMERFOLIS WRBEHODUTI nica EA Bequested ULF 1 0010 Tnit Coat Bambee P00001 of DOOCUD Line jGO00DIS of DODOS Entec edit Append Too Field Definitions Field Name Description Item ID The ID of the item you are working with is displayed Loc ID The ID of the location you are working with is displayed Units The unit of measure you are working with is displayed Requested Qty The quantity being sold adjusted or purchased is displayed Serial Number The serial numbers for the item are displayed Unit Cost The unit cost of the serialized item is displayed Unit Price The unit price of the serialized item is displayed 5 26 Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Inventory Transactions
63. first item record on file Press L to view the last item record on file Press H to go to the header portion of the screen Press U to change the displayed unit of measure To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 4 27 Items Features Use the Items function on the Information Inquiry menu to look at the following item information general information alternate items units of measure and location information To add or change information use the File Maintenance Items function Reports No report is associated with this function Screen Use Screen Description Items General Use the General Information screen to view general Information information about an item default values and user defined fields Items Alternate Items Use the Alternate Items screen to view alternate customer superseded bar codes and vendor part numbers for an item Items Units of Measure Use the Units of Measure screen to view alternate and default units of measure for an item Item Locations Locations Use the Item Locations screen to view the locations set up for the item and quantities for the locations for that item Inventory User s Manual 4 29 Items Information Inquiry Items General Information Screen E aan ia gud CE fei bjp Irem iB Lum Description Elezcrrical Package General In crmmricrn Brat Active Sales caregory F1 Irem Type L Rassrimitre
64. fmi biip r Iien Lncmticza Pin Information Irem iB mui Loca Lon CAUDO Dem rigrinn Elezcrrical Packmge Unitas PEG Last FEySILAI Fount Bin M Tag Huxiber Dares Count Qz7 Unita etoh E 10 1511 12 13 15 7 0000 FEG BATL lt file gt Lire Ho jO00001 of ODEs ippend Hert zcrggn Frregwicud m rumn Field Definitions Field Name Description Item ID The ID of the item you are working with is displayed Location The location you selected on the Item Locations screen is displayed Description The description of the item is displayed Units The unit of measure you are working with is displayed Bin No If you entered a bin number on the Location Information screen it is displayed Tag Number If a tag number was assigned to the bin during the last physical count it is displayed 11 34 Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Item Locations Field Name Date Count Qty Units Batch Description The last date a physical count was taken is displayed The quantity counted during the last physical count is displayed The unit of measure the last physical count was based on is displayed The batch ID used in the last physical count is displayed Command Bar Definitions Command Append Next screen Previous screen Saving and Exiting Description Press A to add a bin number to the item Press N to go to the next screen you selected or to return to the Item Loc
65. information on this screen comes from the Vendor Information screen in the File Maintenance Item Locations function 4 52 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Costs and Vendors Command Bar Definitions Command Next Prev Last First Item Location Costs View Saving and Exiting Description Press N to view the next item location record on file Press P to view the previous item location record on file Press L to view the last item location record on file Press F to view the first item location record on file Press I to go to the Item ID field and enter a different item ID Press O to go to the Location field and enter a different location ID Press C to view cost information about the item The Cost Information screen appears Press V to view vendor quantity breaks The View Price Information window appears To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 4 53 Costs and Vendors Information Inquiry View Price Information Window ETERNI Faing Ld Ped bep co cCuatzs wnd Vercors Yendnr lIzfnrmatiun Irem iB LOU Location EM D Description Elezcrrical Packsge Unitas FE Lasr P Vereder WVern cr m Parr Humber Lead Quanri amp ruy Unit Camsr bacs ELLOGL 75T223DHIE s n 2 0000 3 3500 13721 1799 n h O n N_ Vi u frice Izefarwertan Vendor ID ELLOOL Hem ELLIS ELECTHICAL ZUFFLE Lam Tima 3 0 UO
66. is a decrease in inventory enter a debit account If you are entering a new order this field is skipped Enter or change the quantity that was sold Enter the unit of measure you want to work with The cost of the item is displayed Enter or change the price of the item that was sold The extended cost quantity x cost is displayed The extended price quantity x price is displayed Enter additional information about the transaction Command Bar Definitions This window has no command bar Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the Inventory Transactions screen use the Proceed PgDn command To exit to the Inventory Transactions screen without saving your entries use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 15 Inventory Transactions Daily Work Append Edit Inventory Purchases Window STETERIT Inventory Trazumrticza Typa Iran Lnr TI Quantity Unirs pars Irar ippend Inventory Purchases rarum Hem Order Large FRILL Fertnd D Teer Rpp Loc TD ccul EIHHEAPILIS HARFIHCOUSZE Item LD Lon Eieerpical Package Adjust Acct Quantity L Cort 341 35300 Est Cort 2341 33 Units FR Sha Cost unn Exe Sha 00 C resen RE Line MOODS of DOOOOS Field Definitions Field Name Description Status Enter N if you are recording a new order G if you are recording goods received I if you are recording an invoice or M if you are recording a miscellaneous debit Date E
67. item in several units of measure you must set prices for each unit using the average base list and minimum pricing fields In addition you can define quantity break pricing for each unit of measure Item Locations Price Information screen To price items for customer groups use customer level pricing in the Item Locations function Promotional Pricing Use promotional pricing for short term specials You can specify beginning and ending dates for promotional prices Set up price IDs to store customer level pricing information an adjustment base and adjustment amounts Price IDs can be assigned to an item in the Items function and to an item location in the Item Locations function If a different price ID is set up at the location level from the price ID set up at the item level the price ID set up at the item level is the default You can also assign a price ID to a transaction in the Inventory Transactions function Select Price Structures from the File Maintenance menu and enter a price ID or copy an existing ID Then enter a description of the price ID a customer level a description of the customer level an adjustment base an adjustment type or 96 and the amount of the price adjustment Inventory User s Manual 2 19 Entering Your Data Setup 2 20 If a customer level is not found when the price is calculated the default customer level NONE is used Item IDs and Descriptions Item IDs and desc
68. items 2 5 2 20 0 online editing of quantities option 2 11 options additional descriptions 2 11 allow discounts on serialized items 2 12 check for alias on report options 2 12 costing method 2 11 entering prices for sales transactions 2 11 keeping detail history 2 11 keeping lot detail 2 11 keeping serial history 2 11 online editing of quantities 2 11 post detail to General Ledger 2 11 show costs in price and availability lookup 2 12 show costs in sale transactions 2 11 transaction item entry 2 12 zero quantity costing method 2 11 options and interfaces 2 9 order quantities setting up 2 27 ordering cost 2 18 organizing items 2 5 OSAS conventions 1 8 general information 1 3 running 1 8 structure 1 3 Other Command menu accessing 1 13 1 29 Other Commands Applications Options Inquiry D 8 Calculator D 1 Call a BBx Program D 6 Execute an Operating System Command D 5 General Information Inquiry D 12 Global Inquiry D 9 Product Suggestions D 7 Support Information D 14 User Comments D 15 Inventory User s Manual Other function key 1 29 output device printer 1 38 overriding cost information EOQ 2 29 Overstock Report function 8 7 sample 8 10 P parameters access code 1 9 command to start OSAS 1 9 company ID 1 9 format 1 9 general expression 1 9 order 1 9 terminal ID 1 9 partial key inquiry 1 32 1 33 penalty amount 2 22 Periodic Processing menu functions 1 6 p
69. items 3 4 Transactions Journal function 5 55 producing 3 11 sample 5 58 Transfers Journal function 5 59 producing 3 11 sample 5 62 transfers T accounts 3 12 Trend Analysis Report function 8 23 sample 8 26 types of inventory items 2 5 U units of measure 2 21 alternate 2 21 base amount 2 22 penalty amount 2 22 setting up 2 21 2 28 Up Arrow function key 1 30 inquiry command 1 33 report command 1 35 scroll region command 1 35 Update Perpetual Inventory function 10 49 log 10 37 IX 11 Index updating perpetual inventory 3 21 T accounts 3 22 programs A 1 upgrading from previous versions A 1 User Comments function D 15 screen D 15 user s manual conventions 1 7 organization 1 7 User Defined Field Sorts function 12 23 setting up 2 17 User Defined Field Sorts List function 14 31 sample 14 34 User Defined Fields function 12 19 setting up 2 17 2 21 User Defined Fields List function 14 27 sample 14 30 utilities Applications Options Inquiry D 8 Calculator D 1 Call a BBx Program D 6 Execute an Operating System Command D 5 General Information Inquiry D 12 Global Inquiry D 9 Product Suggestions D 7 Support Information D 14 User Comments D 15 V Valuation Report function 7 15 sample 7 18 variance cost 3 13 price 3 13 Variance Report function 10 41 producing 3 20 sample 10 44 IX 12 vendor ID alternate 2 24 vendor information setting up 2
70. items and their quantities and values in dollars Reports A sample Physical Count Valuation Report is on page 10 48 Screen Use Screen Description Physical Count Valuation Use the Physical Count Valuation Report screen to select Report the batches you want in the report Inventory User s Manual 10 45 Physical Count Valuation Report Physical Inventory Physical Count Valuation Report Screen sas nia Entar Betches to Frint RETI Dutput cavrice fFbrizzgr p P evirt m ilg Screen E zd Field Definitions Field Name Description Enter Batches To Print Enter the batches you want in the report 10 46 Inventory User s Manual Physical Inventory Physical Count Valuation Report Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the report to a printer File Select F to send the report to a file Screen Select S to send the report to the screen End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Physical Inventory menu Saving and Exiting After the report is produced the Physical Inventory menu appears Inventory User s Manual 10 47 Physical Inventory Physical Count Valuation Report Physical Count Valuation Report 00 L 89789 L 89789 Te3oL ZOOONW GI uorqesooT 00 00 vv 00 vv TeqOL OOPPOT 3unooov 00 00 vr 00 vv TeqIOL 10 pOO T 00 00 vY 00 vv 0000 0000 8 0000 8 V4 c000NW 00S500L elvd 00 cL vc189 cL vcCT89 Tea
71. number for the unit Enter or change the lot number for the unit Enter information you want to note about the item Enter or change the cost for the unit Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Field Name Status Init Date Price Vendor ID Name PO Number PO Date Invoice Number Invoice Date Cost Customer ID Name Order Number Order Date Invoice Number Invoice Date Inventory User s Manual Item Locations Description Enter or change the status of the serialized item A if the item is new and available for sale I if the item has been sold but the invoice has not been posted S if the item has been sold and the invoice has been posted L if the item was lost when a physical count was last performed The date you received the serialized item from the vendor is displayed The price of the serialized item is displayed The ID of the vendor you purchased the item from is displayed The name of the vendor you purchased the item from is displayed The purchase order number you used to purchase the item is displayed The date of the requisition or purchase order is displayed The vendor s invoice number for the item is displayed The date of the vendor s invoice is displayed Enter the unit cost of the item The ID of the customer who last purchased the item is displayed The name of the customer who last purchased the item is displayed The last order number is displayed The d
72. of zero on tags or quantities worksheets enter Y if not enter N Freeze quantities If you are ready for a physical count all adjustments have been made and want to freeze your on hand quantities enter Y if not enter N Command Bar Definitions This screen has no command bar Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the Physical Inventory menu use the Proceed PgDn command To exit to the Physical Inventory menu without saving your entries use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 10 5 Freeze Quantities Features Use the Freeze Quantities function on the Physical Inventory menu to freeze the on hand quantities of your items during the physical count If you chose to freeze quantities in the Physical Inventory Selection function you do not need to use this function Reports No report is associated with this function Screen Use Screen Description Freeze Quantities Use the Freeze Quantities screen to select the batch ID whose quantities you want to freeze For a description of the display only fields on this screen see the Physical Inventory Selection function Inventory User s Manual 10 7 Freeze Quantities Physical Inventory Freeze Quantities Screen DETERIUS Frecte Duan Lh bes Bat t ID BATI lamrriptinn w Count Dare 12 15 1993 GL Period 12 Location Ib From Prexmact Line From Thru Thru Irmm ID From 700 Application From Thru TOR 99FD Thru Bin fu
73. ory bem lable Gey Dn Seder JEF Field Definitions Field Name Location ID Item ID Sale Units Price ID Customer ID Cust Level Sale Date Inventory User s Manual Lrcwrinn TI WEIT Teer ID Loo Bale THis PRI Price ID HOTLI Curtcmmr ID Cust Level Sale Bare OF ite peas Sele Quantity Loo Fricm Cmlcalgror Pricing Infarserion 0000 Calc Unit Frice Pas r r ooon Cab Ext Price or g n Cuanriry Breaks 0000 aan it T Dait Frica oono DO Description Enter a location ID Enter an item ID Accept the displayed unit of measure or enter a different unit of measure Enter a price ID optional Enter a customer ID optional Enter a customer level optional Accept the displayed sale date or enter a different date 4 9 Price and Availability Information Inquiry 4 10 Field Name Sale Quantity On Hand Qty Committed Qty In Use Qty Available Qty On Order Qty LIFO FIFO Cost Average Cost Standard Cost Base Cost Calc Unit Price Calc Ext Price Base Quantity Description Accept the displayed sale quantity or enter a different quantity The quantity on hand is displayed The committed quantity is displayed The in use quantity is displayed The available quantity is displayed The on order quantity is displayed This field appears if you elected in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function to show costs in the price and availab
74. promotional pricing Tables Tables store information relating to the system data options and other applications Inventory User s Manual 2 13 Entering Your Data Setup Use tables only to enter and store data Do not delete or rearrange the account descriptions The system looks for the information by the position of the account descriptions in the table Set up the INPDxxx table before you set up anything else For information about this table and other Inventory tables see chapter 4 If you are setting up multiple companies you must set up an INPDxxx table for each one Sales Categories Sales categories identify the market you sell groups of items to and help you analyze sales They are used in Accounts Receivable and Sales Order to sort detail sales history Select Sales Categories from the Code Maintenance menu Then enter each sales category and a description Customer Levels Customer levels identify groups of customers you sell to and are used for pricing purposes when you set up customers in Accounts Receivable and Sales Order when you sell items and in the Price Structures and Promotional Pricing functions Select Customer Levels from the Code Maintenance menu Then enter each of your customer levels and a description of each customer level Examples of customer levels are senior citizens frequent buyers contractors and builders Product Lines Product lines categorize your inventory items into
75. quantities for each item the counted quantity defaults to the system s frozen quantity when you access each line on the entry screen For example if you count 5 of item 400 and then access the line on the screen that contains item 400 the frozen quantity also 5 appears in the Counted Quantity field Note If you chose to enter exceptions the Default Frozen Quantities toggle is automatically set to NO Inventory User s Manual Work Flow Periodic Tasks Print Items With Zero Quantities When you choose to print items with zero quantities all items including those with zero quantities appear on the worksheet or tags list Freezing Quantities Use the Freeze Quantities function to freeze the system quantities anytime before you begin the physical count process Freeze the quantities in the system only if all the adjustments purchases and sales have been made and you are ready to do your physical count After you freeze quantities you can continue processing inventory transactions while verifying your physical count If you change your selections in the Physical Inventory Selection function after your quantities are frozen the tags and worksheets may be incorrect In addition you may need to print more tags and worksheets if items have been added to the batch Printing Physical Inventory Tags If you use tag numbers print the inventory tags for the items locations bins and serial and lot numbers You c
76. s Manual 4 19 Detail History CNTTTETT View Transaction Detail Window Datmil History Information Inquiry Irem 18 Lou ELSStE Lal Fac hese L cragr unn WHO Farind Tr Foon Lf 1959 Inrludm Purchena Thru Lis 199 Pdi T Tisu Transaction erail O8 15 Trmrummction IO 00001 u5 19 Trans Type Furch in i Init Pace Dur 4 192 12 fl Irem ID lop j Lnosrann IP Han i 1 1 Bourse Appl AT brij Inh ELLO i 1 Huber 001 1 dup Fiaar caat Cons 1 fie Quarti Urniza Tait Amcunt Ert kmnunt 19 zunun cocu PEF Price gunn 000 Doa Phi ii GER 0 Mie LL Prema any key i Mest Fray Firzt Lest Hemderz View Goto z Field Definitions The information in the View Transaction Detail window comes from the Inventory Transactions function and the Location Transfers function Command Bar Definitions This window has no command bar Saving and Exiting To exit to the Detail History screen press any key 4 20 Inventory User s Manual Movement History Features Use the Movement History function on the Information Inquiry menu to view transaction records for an item including information about selected transactions If you do not keep detail history you cannot use this function Reports No report is associated with this function Screen Use Screen Description Movement History Use the Movement History screen to view selected information about movement of materials and goods
77. the base unit the alternate unit is In the example above you would enter the units with the following conversion factors Unit Conversion Factor EACH 1 00 BOX 10 00 PKG 100 00 CARTN 500 00 CASE 1000 00 The base unit of measure is EACH but you can set up BOX as the default unit of measure if you sell the item most often in boxes The penalty amount determines the price when fractional parts of a unit are sold For example if a customer orders half a carton you might add a penalty to the price because you have to sell part of a carton Inventory User s Manual Setup Entering Your Data A penalty expressed as a percentage applies to the fractional part of the units sold resulting in a unit penalty A penalty expressed as a dollar amount applies to the inventory item regardless of the quantity sold resulting in a penalty per sale rather than per unit Make sure that your base unit of measure is set up Then enter each unit of measure and a conversion factor for each unit of measure To charge a percentage that applies to the fraction of the units sold enter To charge a dollar amount that applies to the entire sale enter Then enter the percentage or the dollar amount of the penalty Alternate Items Alternate items store additional identification about an item You can choose to enter an alternate item ID customer identification alias identification a superseded part number a bar code and vendor identification
78. the files are converted Select the output device for the error log After conversion is finished and the error log is produced the Main menu with Inventory 6 00 added appears A 4 Inventory User s Manual System Messages Alternate item must be the same item type as current item ID When you are setting up alternate items you cannot set up a service item as an alternate item for any other type of item BASIC ERROR nn HOST ERROR xxx LINE nnnn PROGRAM xxxxxx BASIC ERROR nn LINE nnnn PROGRAM xxxxxx A serious error has occurred Write down the information that is displayed and get help from a support technician Do you wish to change to using tags If you respond YES the system will change the batch from using worksheets for physical counts to using tags Error creating INRQxxx file File may be open on another terminal Someone else is using one of the Reorder Processing functions on another terminal Try again later Field value already exists Use the Edit function to change values You cannot append an existing field value in the User Defined Fields function Enter a different field value Freezing has added items to the batch Items were added to inventory between the time you prepared the batch and froze quantities If you know that many items were added reprint the tags and worksheets These items will then be included in the batch Inventory User s Manual B 1 System Messages References
79. the list to a file Screen Select S to send the list to the screen End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Physical Inventory menu Saving and Exiting After the list is produced the Physical Inventory menu appears Inventory User s Manual 10 35 Physical Inventory Batch List Batch List 33odew jo pug SHA ESOTITIUeNH z 14 ON Zserarauen o798zZ 103 shel aqutid SHA s rarquen0 pequnog iTneged SHA ATuo suotqdeoxy re quy Sak setqtquend uezoa4 Aetdstq SUA szequny ber esq niu niun wog queuniedeq word zequnN utg niu 6666666666666666666L Word wozq uoraeor ddy 004 Uo14 QI wg nau nay Uo14 eur Jonpozg UO14 qI UorijeooT S66T ST ZT ON SHA ON SHA ypg EIYE qeq auno sizodey eouerieA quTrg p z quq saunoo PAJUTI SJO YSYIOM pequTzg shel uoradidoseq dI yoqeg ASTI yore 6661 L0 80 I bea Atddns saeprrng Wd Z Z Inventory User s Manual 10 36 Physical Count List Features After you enter physical counts produce a list of quantities from selected batches so that you can verify that the correct quantities were entered Reports A sample Physical Count List is on page 10 40 An asterisk indicates that there is a gap in the tag number sequence or that a tag number is missing Screen Use Screen Description Physical Count List Use the Physical Count List screen to enter batches whose quantities you want to view Inventory User s Manual 10 37 Physical C
80. the quotation mark key to start a comment and T to print the tape In the View Tape function you can use three keys the up arrow key to move up the tape the down arrow key to move down the tape and the Esc key to jump to the bottom of the tape and exit from View mode Use the following function keys or the alphanumeric equivalents to work with figures in the Memory Tape Entry and Status fields Clear the tape Once you clear the tape it cannot be recalled Clear the Entry field so that you can enter a different number Inventory User s Manual Field F3 or M Memory F4 or M Memory F5 or MR Memory Recall F6 or MC Memory Clear F7 or Q Exit F8 or P Printer F9 or O Decimal F10 or W Exit Total Status Inventory User s Manual Other Commands Description Copy the total at the bottom of the tape to the Memory field if the figure in memory is 00 Add the total at the bottom of the tape to the figure in the Memory field Subtract the total at the bottom of the Tape field from the number in the Memory field Copy the number in the Memory field to the Entry field Erase the number in the Memory field Exit from the Calculator without saving the total Switch the printer on and off If you turn the printer on your subsequent entries will be printed until you turn the printer off or exit from the calculator Change the number of default decimal places displayed
81. to a printer File Select F to send the report to a file Screen Select S to send the report to the screen End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Analysis Reports menu Saving and Exiting After the report is produced the Analysis Reports menu appears Inventory User s Manual 8 29 Analysis Reports Movement Trending Report Movement Trending Report 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 I 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ONIGIING Md ONTENNTd Md OINLIOWIM Md YOIINI Va ONIGIING Va ONIGIING Va ONIGIING Va ONIGIING Va ONIGIING Va ONIGIING Va ONIGIING Md SNISN Y Id Md OINIOWIM Md ONICGIING YIV IVaH eheyoeg bur ooj butieeH 0000W 002 ONICGIING IWIYALYN ebexoeg burqumTa 0000W OST ONICGIING IVIWSIVAN ebexoeg eorad3oe s 0000W 001 ONICGIING IVIWSIVAN 1ooq 1oriequrl 000v5 00 IdaV WN WIV IVdH AOTITPTUNH 000v5 009007 IdaV WN WIV IV4H dung dung 000v5 00S00 IdaV WCW WIV IV4H 1eue3jog 197M 000v5 007002 IdaV Uw YIV LVaH TSUOTITPUOD ITY 000v5 00 00c IdaV WN WIV IV4H ieqeeH 197M 000v5 00200c IdaV WCW WIV IV4H eoeuana 000v5 00100c ONICGIING YIV LVaH ebeyoeg bur oo5 butieeH 000v5 002 ONICGIING IVIWSIVAN oebexoeg burqumTa 000v5 OST ONICGIING IVIWSIVAN ebexoeg TeROTAWSTA 000v5 001 TeqOL I ebeq spezpuny ur uMOYS serjrauen 33odey burpueal 3ueueAoW Aqddng saeprrna
82. 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 XONVIIddv T T HONVITIddV TZ T NONVITIddV I2 1 NONVIIddv 0c 1 SONVITddV 07 T NONVITddV 07 1 NONVIIddV 61 1 SONVITIddV 07 T XONVIIddV 61 1 NONVIIddV 61 1 puou v 3403S 93TUM e4Ao3S yoeTg 3403S puou y zeysemysta M aeusemusrq yoetg Teysemysta puowTy ioa3eaebiijeu 3TuM qo3edebradjed eituM ao3ezebtijed xoertg Toqerebtajzoy 000v5 00026 000V5 200026 000v5 00026 000v5 000T6 000V5 200016 000v5 00016 000v5 06 000V5 106 000v5 T06 000v5 006 sarun auno s ud bea quewyzedeq uorqeorTddv eur 3onpougq urg ASTI auno reorsAuq Ajtddns szepting zequny Ter s uor3adr13os q TSUN 301 UOT3e2O0 T GI Ue3I oN bei T qI wowed Wd cv t 6661 S1 90 Inventory User s Manual 10 40 Variance Report Features After you enter and verify the physical count of your inventory produce the Variance Report It shows the difference between the counts you entered and the frozen quantities in the system You must print the Variance Report before you use the Update Perpetual Inventory function Reports A sample Variance Report is on page 10 44 Screen Use Screen Description Variance Report Use the Variance Report screen to enter the batches that you want in the report Inventory User s Manual
83. 0 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 S 0000 0000 0000 0000 F 0000 0000 t 0000 0000 c 0000701 0000 9 0000 c 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 S 0000 0 T 301 ZOET 30T TOET 30T SeTqtquend weqT pTIhqeW Ajtddns szepttng 0000 9 0000 S 0000 T 0000 00007 0000 0000 00007 0000 p 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 T 0000 0000 L 0000 c 0000 T 0000 S 0000 0000702 0000 0000 I 0000 0000 v 00001 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 200718 200718 200218 31oded jo puq W97 I STTA JOT Ue3I ey o3 peppe piooeu 301 Ueil e T4 JOT Ue3I u3 O3 peppe paooeu JOT US I e T4 JOT Ue3I u3 O3 peppe paooeu JOT ebessey 103144 WY 8S IT 6661 10 L0 089 019 009 009 OSS 0S8 09v 09v 09v oS ost 00v 00v 00v OSE 00 00 00 00 osz 0Sc 0G 0S 00 00 00 iepio uo MON I ebeq 39p410 UO PTO SN UI M N SN UI PTO peaaruuo M N SeTqTqueNd weqT pTIhqeW Atddns szepttng peairuuo PTO UOTJLOOT WY 8S 1 6661 10 L0 Inventory User s Manual 9 26 Physical Inventory Physical Inventory Selection Freeze Quantities Print Physical Inventory Tags Print Physical Inventory Worksheets Physical Counts Tag Entry Physical Counts Worksheet
84. 0 Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Inventory Transactions Field Name Penalty Type Penalty Amount Description The penalty type determines the price adjustment when fractional parts of a unit are sold A penalty expressed as a percentage applies to the fractional part of the units sold resulting in a unit penalty for fractional quantities sold A penalty expressed as a dollar amount applies to the inventory item regardless of the quantity sold resulting in a penalty per sale rather than per unit To charge a percentage that applies to the fraction of the units sold enter To charge a dollar amount that applies to the entire sale enter Enter the percentage or dollar amount of the penalty Command Bar Definitions This screen has no command bar Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the transaction screen you were working with use the Proceed PgDn command To exit to the transaction screen you were working with without saving your entries use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 11 Inventory Transactions Daily Work Append Edit Inventory Adjustments Window E MSAN TiN Seige Ed Pu biip Tyra atatua Treaioe Loc IB Waal Item LD 10001 Adjust Acct 100500 Quantity 100 0000 Com 2 7300 Est Cort 275 00 Unies EA Bea CusL Unnn Exe Bea Path C Dishes a r Line 000001 of DOS Ju amp ztity cz Hmnd LDD COCUU R amp vullmig r Du EInvEentczy Trwzsm
85. 00 0000 MN000 0000 TX000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Issue Mat Req 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Inventory User s Manual 7 6 Item Status Report Features The Item Status Report shows the status of items and the quantities in stock on hand on order committed in use and available Reports A sample Item Status Report is on page 7 10 Screen Use Screen Description Item Status Report Use the Item Status Report screen to select the items locations product lines and user defined fields you want in the report Inventory User s Manual 7 7 Item Status Report Reports Item Status Report Screen SAS TOI Gating Eat fmi b tara Ztmturm Report Bick Crem 12 Trom icd Print Dy Thru 200 1 Item II L bparica ID Feo MHWIUUI i FEOHuCT Line Thru THONI 1 Applicaziun Frnduc Lina Frmz AFZLIAMCI amp Dupmrtrent THEW MATERIAL 5 Wser beringed Bork 1 pplicacinn From BUIL DIE Iaer befined Jort 3 Thru MIF APPL 1 Department Feo ERELD ISRO Thru INTERTZF Incimds Brarum ktive TES Super sete TES
86. 00 9 SNIGIIDH S66T ZT TT 0000 0000 SNIqTrng s TeS GIA Airauen qI 3qu uqzed q e es aseT Se es dId Airquen did uotqyeottddy young aser Treaed burpueosy se es Ag 31odeu qu u AoW 3Se3 MOTS Atddns saepirng uoradragoseqg ed3xu uotqdtz9seq BUTI poad uor3eooT qI ue3r S0 Potted WY vS 6 6661 82 S0 Inventory User s Manual 8 14 Sales Analysis Report Features The Sales Analysis Report summarizes the year to date and month to date history of stock items You can use it to analyze the turnaround time for each stock item during the fiscal year Reports A sample Sales Analysis Report is on page 8 19 Screen Use Screen Description Sales Analysis Report Use the Sales Analysis Report screen to select the items locations product lines and user defined fields that you want in the report Inventory User s Manual 8 15 Sales Analysis Report Analysis Reports Sales Analysis Report Screen sas TON Being Cat Pw kid Seles Ramlyziz Pepot Bick Irem 12 Tee i608 Prisc By Thru 200 1 Volo L parioam ID TEOe BOUL A COSL Thru THONI 1 Bajsa Frnducct Lina From ARFSLIAMCI 4 Prao iz THE MATERIAL hpplicarzinn From BUIL DIR Thru MIE AFFL Frame Orar Department TEUER EPILDIBMG B Blowest tS Tastcst Thru INTERTZF Fastar ro dLouexr Prims Bauntt cn Daza YEeBRr tn Datec Both Point fur partund yaear OT 190p a j Calculate Turza de Of D7 0 Lie 3 Output ca vrice fFhi
87. 000 0000 0000 0000 9 009v bv 0002 TVISSIVA 019 0000 76 0000 2L 0000 WH 0000 0000 0000 0000 40v X bZ MOPUTM PrepUeIS WH 0000 0000 0000 00009 00 0 TZT 000Vo TVISSIVA 009 0000 SZ 0000 81 0000 WH 0000 0000 0000 0000 ebexoeg xioMTTTW WH 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0002 TVINSEIVA 0S6 00007011 0000706 0000 WH 0000 0000 0000 0000 40 X OE MoputM Aq PTTS WH 0000 0000 0000 0000 S1 00Lv 9LT 0002 TVISSIVA 09v 0000 06 0000 2L 0000 WH 0000 0000 0000 0000 uO X bZ MODUTM Aq PFTS WH 0000 0000 0000 0000 OT 00v 1 T9T 0002 TVISSIVA oS 0000 SZ 0000 81 0000 WH 0000 0000 0000 0000 sleriejeW iorzequl WH 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0002 TVINEIVA 00 0000 61 0000 81 0000 WH 0000 0000 0000 0000 zoog Azjug WH 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0086 LZZ 0002 TVISSIVA OSE 0000 PET 0000 801 0000 WH 0000 0000 0000 0000 1oog JOTFASqUI WH 0000 0000 0000 0000 91 0092 cc 0002 TVISSIVA 00 0000 SZ 0000 81 0000 WH 0000 0000 0000 0000 ebexoeg puqunqa WH 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0002 TVISEIVA OST 0000 OT 0000 0000 WH 0000 0000 0000 0000 ebexoeg eoiz32e s WH 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0002 TVISSIVA 001 XeW UTW xXoo3s Ajezes jseoe4204 esf 4seoesz04 uepao UQ c PI9T4 I SN uoridraoseq IN 008 quod aepao esp Tenuuy e qe reAv 3s00 SET T PTeL4 z sn PI OO eur 3onpoug qI ueir qI ue3r Ag I000VO GI Uor3eooT 33odey iepioesu Wd 0c cl T ebeq A ddng saeprina 6661 81 90
88. 000 Wa 12000000 100 Z000NI oand 66T ST LO S6107 V3 0000 Scc 00Sz Z 0000 Wa 12000000 TOOWIL ZOOONN ommna vp66l GT LO S610Z Wa 0000 Sz 00Sz Z 0000 V3 12000000 100 000NI oand p66T ST L0 S6TOZ J quny s rz s 005001 Won Aarauen 3509 Rq 3s05 IFUN Aytquend WOn ON Jey eomnos qI 907 edAL eyed uezL ZequNN 307 uorj3oesuea 3rInegjeq uotadraoseq qI ueir 33od u A10381H 301 WV 98 6 I obeg Aqddng saep rng 6661 87 80 Inventory User s Manual 7 30 Transaction History Report Features The Transaction History Report shows the history of transactions within a specified time frame Reports A sample Transaction History Report is on page 7 34 Screen Use Screen Description Transaction History Report Use the Transaction History Report screen to select the items locations sources and periods and years that you want in the report Inventory User s Manual 7 31 Transaction History Report Reports Transaction History Report Screen Sas To Gang LA Fa blip r Tranza tiun Hiztury Fesgurt Pick Tran ID Free 100 Thre 200 Location 11 From CAE Thra Tete Fourcau From FE Thrw BL Pericd VYear From Lf da Thre Lis 1258 Output rice fFbrizzgr p F evirt i ilg S zrzgmn E zd Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Enter the range of items locations source applications and periods and years you want in the report 7
89. 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Oud IJS Oud 9d So Va Oud Va Va Oud Va 9d Va TWIMH LVN TWIMH LVN WIV IVSH WIV IVSH WIV IVGH IVISSIVI IVISSLIVA WIV IVA IVISHSIVI WIYALYN IVISHSIVI sarun p qunoo AO paqunog I ebeq AY uezoag sarun 600 9000 TP IVINSIVI 800 9000 91 1 TVISSIVA L00 9000 cI H IVINSlVI 900 9000 ARa IVIWSIVI S00 9000 01 9 TVISXIVA 700 9000 SI H IVIWSIVI 00 9000 VI H IVINSIVI Z00 9000 01 3 TVISXIVA T00 9000 6 a WIV IVSH 000 9000 8 d WIV IVSH 66629000 L d WIV IVSH 86629000 9 d WIV IVSH 16629000 c d WIV IVSH 96629000 p a WIV IVSH 56629000 ST d IVINSlVI 16629000 1 a IVIWSLVI 6629000 oT d WIV IVSH 76629000 S d IVIWSlVI 16629000 ex IVIWSIVI 06629000 I A TVISSIVA zequny eL dI utg queunzedeq sjeeysyzom 1oqueAu eots ud Atddns szepttng sUuTT 3onpoid uot qeottddy 000v5 0S9 sa urqeo 000V2 00L s eriejew 1ordequr 000v5 00v obexoeg xioOM T TW 000v5 oss S eueg TOTIEqxXY 000V5 osz 40v X 0E MOpUTM paepueis 000v5 019 40V X V MOPUTM Pzepue IS 000v5 009 ebexoeg TEOTIA 000V2 001 dung dung 000v5 008007 3euejgos iejeM 000v5 007002 ASUCTITPUCD ATW 000V2 00 00c jejeeu ieqeM 000v5 002002 ocuzna 000 9 00100c ebexoeq BurTooo Burae H 000V2 00 uO X OE MODUTM Aq eprTS 000v5 09v 40 X bZ MODUTM A
90. 00008 T0 Od 8 000000 100000 S661 00 31odey jo pus 40 X bZ MOPUTM prepuejg S661 Ic Cl TOOONN 009 Vy 27 br cC Vy ZZ br cC br cC bP 27 p919 FPA jT bea 3OOV pV NI poo d 1 qu uqsn pv DOW Add S900 T9 ddy souezeyey oN bes azeaK pd 3ebpe Tezeuey oq squeuusnfpy 19 3sod Tddns szepttng 93ed dI 20T uoradiaoseq qI weit Wd 6v 6661 10 80 Inventory User s Manual 5 74 Reorder Processing Calculate Reorders Reorder Report Generate Purchase Requisitions Inventory User s Manual 6 3 6 7 6 11 6 1 Calculate Reorders Features Use the Calculate Reorders function on the Reorder Processing menu to calculate the quantity of an item to reorder You can calculate reorders by one of the following methods Economic Order Quantity EOQ Forecast or Minimum Maximum Min Max Reports To retrieve the information entered in the Calculate Reorders function use the Reorder Report function Screen Use Screen Description Calculate Reorders Use the Calculate Reorders screen to select the item IDs location IDs product lines and user defined fields you want to calculate in the reorder process Inventory User s Manual 6 3 Calculate Reorders Reorder Processing Calculate Reorders Screen as TOI Gating EX Fev bain Cmalculmtm Feocdera Bick com 15 Teow iom Thru 200 Lacarica Ib feo CARUUUI Thru TEX0 0i Product Lina From RFPLIA
91. 10 41 Variance Report Physical Inventory Variance Report Screen CSAS TAI r Ymrimnrg Fugurt Entar Bwtczmm to Frint BATA CPhcizter p RK mgvirw qm ids rSpPcremn E zd Field Definitions Field Name Description Enter batches to print Enter the IDs of the batches you want in the report 10 42 Inventory User s Manual Physical Inventory Variance Report Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the report to a printer File Select F to send the report to a file Screen Select S to send the report to the screen End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Physical Inventory menu Saving and Exiting After the report is produced the Physical Inventory menu appears Inventory User s Manual 10 43 Physical Inventory Variance Report Variance Report 0000 2h 0000 196v 0000 00S yrodsy jo puq SMES pooM ZOOONN EE 00v00L 61020000 c9 v STWLOL QNVH9 c9 v Te3ol ypg c9 v 001T Va SoUETIEA 3soo arun 3soo sarun I abeg aoueTIeA qunop u zo ra qunog s ud queujredeq uorqeorTddv sutT 3onpoud qrodey eouerieA Ajtddns szepting Ie3ed 4OT TeTreS uotydtz9seq uot e907 utd GI weqI oN bel LWd dI yoyeg Wd 7 7 666T L0 80 Inventory User s Manual 10 44 Physical Count Valuation Report Features Use the Physical Count Valuation Report function on the Physical Inventory menu to produce a list of your inventory
92. 10 DDOOG OO Toral 34 Dro 11 0000 Lire Ho jO00001 of ODDO East Frer First Lart Item View Calc price Tuitz Field Definitions Field Name Description Item ID Enter the ID of the item whose quantities and price information you want to view Units Enter the unit of measure for the item Command Bar Definitions Command Description Next Press N to view the next item record on file Prev Press P to view the previous item record on file 4 4 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Price and Availability Command Description First Press F to view the first item record on file Last Press L to view the last item record on file Item Press I to go to the Item ID field and enter a different item ID View Press V to view detailed information about an item The Item Price and Availability Detail window appears Calc price Press C to calculate an item s price The Price Calculator window appears Lots Press O to view detailed information about lots The Lot Price and Availability Inquiry screen appears Serials Press S to view detailed information about an item The Serial Number Price and Availability Inquiry screen appears Units Press U to go to the Units field and enter a different unit of measure for the item Saving and Exiting To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 4 5 Price and Availability Information Inquiry Lot Price and Availabilit
93. 20 Print selected reports Qoo ON ME dE EX Calculating Reorders Depending on your type of business you might calculate reorders daily or periodically Use the Calculate Reorders function to determine the order point for items based on the EOQ Min Max and Forecast methods Inventory User s Manual 3 15 Periodic Tasks Work Flow 3 16 The system calculates reorders only for items with active status If the status of the item or the item location is discontinued superseded or obsolete the items are not calculated In the Calculate Reorders function you can choose the items you want to include in the Reorder Report In the Reorder Report function you can choose one or all of the reordering methods listed below The method you choose to reorder your quantities by depends on the item you are reordering and your type of business EOQ Method The Economic Order Quantity EOQ method balances the cost to place an order with the cost to carry additional stock in inventory Min Max Method Distributors often use the Minimum Maximum Min Max method for reordering When an item reaches its minimum on hand quantity an amount is ordered to bring the balance up to the maximum on hand quantity Forecast Method Companies that carry seasonal items often use the Forecast method for reordering items The amount to reorder is based on the weighting factor for the current period sales history and an adjustment factor Producin
94. 29 Verification function key 1 30 verifying order status 3 5 quantities 3 23 View inquiry command 1 33 Ww weight of item 2 21 worksheets and tags 3 18 printing 3 20 Y Year End Maintenance 3 23 function 9 15 log 9 18 Z zero quantities for physical inventory 3 19 zero quantity costing method option 2 11 Inventory User s Manual
95. 3 Other Commands References Support Information Use the Support Information function to view information about whom to contact for technical support or how to contact your dealer Select Support Information from the Other Commands menu F4 twice from a menu F4 once from a field The function screen appears SAn 10M Dealer Heo Dmmlar Contact Deala Phone Humber Dealer Aire Nuxner Hote J Hore z Customer Site Huxcar pen 3gmrems Tenhninal Prema any key Zuspurt ZInfnrmatinn Treen Bups rr inthes Infn rmr ian Servic amp z Hugh Sya PRES Ro OD Tax Mo jdl12 154 2 eS wezans Wired rares j8 00 5xz 500C Canmdm Computers n When you are finished viewing the information press any key to return to the screen or menu you accessed the Other Commands menu from Inventory User s Manual References Other Commands User Comments Use the User Comments function to enter comments or notes Select User Comments from the Other Commands menu F4 twice from a menu F4 once from a field The function screen appears H SAn TAIA Gaig Cat Da bep Taur Comments eer ID Mei Bat II i111 End Data D A I5 Data Comat GATS it Hr Froon goas to Lakeside hegiteing of Augue nsu Id Ref id end Dare ippernd Entrar edot prir Cnliza Tirzt Gest Huxt Tzuv Field Definitions Field Name Description User ID The user ID is displayed Shared Private This field appears only if y
96. 32 Inventory User s Manual Reports Transaction History Report Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the report to a printer File Select F to send the report to a file Screen Select S to send the report to the screen End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Reports menu Saving and Exiting After the report is produced the Reports menu appears Inventory User s Manual 7 33 Reports Transaction History Report Transaction History Report T Wa 0000 ST Wa 0000 T2 dd 0000 T Dad 0000 S 9WNd 0000 9 Dad 0000 c dd 0000 S dda 0000 Dad 0000 dd 0000 02 Dad 0000 002 dAd 0000 92T Sud 0000 00T puen uo oueTeg burpus 800688vc TOOSOT DULTILA pueH uo oueTeg burpus ELOOL9ZT TOOSOT PPOOL9ZT VOHSVO DULTILA pueg uo eoue eg burpug OS 66T ST 80 NI FY661 vc LO oeuzna WV 666T PT 2T xV 6661 12 60 NI 6661 0 S0 abeyoeg burqumqd NI 666T ST ZT dV 666T T2 ZT V 666l1 VI 7l1 X 6661 90 21 WW 6661 17 60 ebexoeg TeROTAWSTA TVOISAHd TOOLS 100718 LO0L9ZT TOOSOT ZLOOL9ZI WOHSVO PP00L9Zl VOHSVO SOURTIPA pueg uo oueTeg burpug 6000L92T TOOSOT X 7661 97 80 NI f661 T0 80 NI 1661 90 L0 ebexyoeq eord3oe9 su V661 80 eres v661 L0 UIJJSAI 00100c 6661 2T eres 6661 60 eres 6661 80 UI43SAI OST 666T 2T zour py 6661 2T yoma 6661 2T eres 6661 71 eres 6661 60 eres 001 1661 80 er
97. 5 48 0000 00 TTD eaz 000I 2102 5 15 0005 00 Heet itm Field Definitions 4 26 Field Name Item ID Location Period Year Units Last Sale Fzumv item Firat item Lazt item Eeedec Unitrz Description Enter the ID of the item whose information you want to view The item description appears Enter the location ID of the item whose information you want to view Enter the number of the period you want to view The default year is displayed Accept the default unit of measure for the item or enter a different unit of measure The most recent date that the item was sold is displayed Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Sales Trending Field Name Per Yr Sale Quantity Sale Dollars Return Quantity Return Dollars Description The period and year you specified above are displayed Thirteen consecutive periods back from the period you enter based on the periods you set up in the Resource Manager Period Setup function appear The quantity sold of the item is displayed The dollar amount sold for the item is displayed The quantity returned of the item is displayed The dollar amount returned for the item is displayed Command Bar Definitions Command Next item Prev item First item Last item Header Units Saving and Exiting Description Press N to view the next item record on file Press P to view the previous item record on file Press F to view the
98. Analysis Reports menu to list items that you need to restock These items have fallen below the safety stock level you specified usually half the order point including items that are on order or backordered Reports A sample Safety Stock Alert Report is on page 8 6 Screen Use Screen Description Safety Stock Alert Report Use the Safety Stock Alert Report screen to select the items locations product lines and user defined fields that you want in the report Inventory User s Manual 8 3 Safety Stock Alert Report Analysis Reports Safety Stock Alert Report Screen as ToN Sag Eat Fit jip Safety Stock amp lart Papacrt Bick Irem 13 Tene i60 Prime py Thru 200 1 Itum ID L baricoa ID From CAUUUI 2 Petites Line Thru THONI Appilicaricn i Frnduc Ging Frmz AFFL IMEE 4 Carper cont THEW HEAT AIF User Defined Berk I hpplicazinn From BUIL DINS E Hmep Defirned Jorr Thru BIE APPL 1 Bep ttment TEGERE EUVILDIBK Thru INTERTZF Include Zrarum Zupmarmacad TES Pisconbimuged TES rinr Parra besoriprion Bo Shan Late TES int Eq Ln mrtan MG ink Item it Icro ZafIrty Jtnck HC Output rice fFbrizzgr p F evirt D s ilg Spcrmgmn E zd Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Enter the range of items locations product lines and user defined fields you want in the report Print By Select the option by which you want to organize the report Include Status Enter Y for each item sta
99. B to post both transactions and transfers If Inventory is not interfaced with General Ledger or if you have not created last year data in General Ledger is displayed If Inventory is interfaced with General Ledger and you have created last year data in General Ledger select 1 to post to the current year GLJRxxx file or 2 to post to the last year GLJRxxx file Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Post Transactions Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the log to a printer File Select F to send the log to a file End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Daily Work menu Saving and Exiting After the log is produced the Daily Work menu appears Inventory User s Manual 5 65 Daily Work Post Transactions Log Post Transactions 00vv0 00vv0 00010 00vv0 00500 00vv0 00500 00vv0 00500 00vv0 00500 00vv0 00500 00vv0 OL 393s WOI4 legs iueuns iueuns asey ase ase asey ase ase asey ase ase asey uei uel nCpy nfpy omna oand oand oand oand oand onda oand oand oand 2000 000NW 000 000 000NW 000 000 000NW 000 000 000NW 000 000 000NW 331od u jo pug oueTeg 19 00L 00L 001 001 S00028 500028 00028 700028 00028 00028 200028 200028 100078 100028 1 2991 1 z991 8S TOZ 85 TOZ GS ere SS p 0S BL 0S PL 00 68T 00 68T OS LSE OS
100. D01 LOO coy EAR 12 15 1858 4 Line G00001 of DiS Entec gdit Adjustmezt Sale FPurchmsk Field Definitions 5 34 Field Name Original Item ID Original Location ID Item Number Item Description Loc ID Qty Units Description The ID of the item you are working with is displayed The ID of the location you are working with is displayed If you set up alternate items for the item you are working with the item number is displayed The description of the alternate item is displayed The ID of the location of the alternate item is displayed The available quantity of the alternate item is displayed The unit of measure for the alternate item is displayed Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Inventory Transactions Field Name Loc ID Item Description Qty Units Description The ID of the alternate location where the items can be found is displayed The description of the item is displayed The quantity of the item at the alternate location is displayed The unit of measure at the alternate location is displayed Command Bar Definitions Command Tab Alternate Locations Alternate Items Done Saving and Exiting Definition Press Tab to toggle between the Alternate Locations and the Alternate Items sections of the screen Press D when you are finished viewing the available quantities at alternate locations To exit to the transaction screen you were working with press D o
101. Delete Press D to delete a field name and description Field no Press F to enter a new user defined field number Saving and Exiting To save your entries use the Proceed PgDn command To exit to the Code Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 12 21 User Defined Field Sorts Features Use the User Defined Field Sorts function on the Code Maintenance menu to identify additional sorts to use in selected reports and to group items together for analysis purposes If you change the original sort sequence you set up back up your data files The INVExxx Items and INKYxxx Alternate Keys files must be rewritten during this process Reports To produce a list of the information entered in the User Defined Field Sorts function use the User Defined Field Sorts List function on the Master Code Lists menu Screen Use Screen Description User Defined Field Sorts Use the User Defined Field Sorts screen to set up two additional sorts for reports You can identify three user defined fields for each sort Inventory User s Manual 12 23 User Defined Field Sorts Code Maintenance User Defined Field Sorts Screen TERT Gating EX Ps jp r Uzmr Definmd Figld Sorta Fisid Demczripricra 1 Agplicatinn 3 E 13 Z Teparrmenr 1 ii 14 1 Color 7 11 15 4 B 12 1 m Product Line Bett BequezeE 1 Tazuar Dafingd Sere 1 Primary 03 Color Beossdnri Tertiary i Tarr Defingd Fork z Ft ine 229 Product
102. Detail History The INHIxxx file stores detail history for each transaction processed in Inventory and for Accounts Payable Accounts Receivable Purchase Order and Sales Order if these applications are interfaced with Inventory INHSxxx Summary History The INHSxxx file stores summary history for each transaction processed in Inventory and for Accounts Payable Accounts Receivable Purchase Order and Sales Order if these applications are interfaced with Inventory INKYxxx Alternate Keys The INKYxxx file stores individual records for each item location INLDxxx Location Detail The INLDxxx file stores general information for each item location C 2 Inventory User s Manual References File Descriptions INLHxxx Lot History The INLHxxx file stores detail lot history for each transaction processed in Inventory and for Accounts Payable Accounts Receivable Purchase Order and Sales Order if these applications are interfaced with Inventory INLOxxx Location Master The INLOxxx file stores general information for each location currently used in Inventory INLPxxx Location Pricing The INLPxxx file stores location specific pricing information for each item location INLSxxx Transaction Lot Serial Numbers The INLSxxx file stores lot and serial transaction information used in the Inventory Transactions function INLTxxx Lot Detail The INLTxxx file stores lot detail information for each lotted item location INPLxxx P
103. EOOI CLEWELAHD ImTEH Lor DW EDD EDDY APPLIANCE oo ELLOGOS ELLIS ELECTRICAL ZmUFPLY HENHOO3 HEMMEPIN HUICIPAL TTILITZIEB JOHOR JOHNERON DOE COMFANT Ooo JOMES REALTY COMFANE LuMOOGI LUMMOX HEATING AIR CONDITION 715 555 1700 Ez feck H ndcrafk ACE FLJIMBIBE 3UPFLT COMPARE 5762 GOLDEM GATE PRIVE BAM FRANC TSS CA 5454 5548 cto Wiugw detail off TauErml Infnrmtiun Lequicy TW Foons Mombec Contm t 1303 555 3221 FILL HUEPHBET ja n 4535 0505 GORGE PELE 42a JSLIE C S00 S46 O22 CARL WILSON i2i8 452 721i RALPH JONHZONH p100 532 3757 CEAHLENI 5 IIPY 23 222917 BEARVETY ja8TR SUES BILL AHITH j5t4 Z4q55 SANDY HABEN Fasz No 303 52 bast Puroh iz Cur Acrt Pricriby oO Terms AP oca Zmmrci sElectinn Changi zurt Inventory User s Manual References Other Commands Field Definitions Field Name Description Search For Press V to view information about a vendor C to view information about a customer or E to view information about an employee Command Bar Definitions Command Definition View detail on off Press V to toggle the detail display on or off Search selection Press S to change your search selection Change sort Press C to sort the displayed information in a different way When you are finished viewing the information use the Exit F7 command to exit to the screen or menu you accessed the Other Commands menu from Inventory User s Manual D 1
104. Enter the range of items locations product lines and user defined fields you want in the report Print By Select the option by which you want to organize the report Print Valuation Method Select the option by which you want the valuation to be calculated for the report Print by location If you want the information to be separated by location enter Y if not enter N 7 16 Inventory User s Manual Reports Valuation Report Field Name Print extra description Print year to date Print GL summary only Print serial detail Description If you want the report to include additional descriptions enter Y if not enter N You can enter Y only if you elected to use additional descriptions in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function If you want the report to show year to date information enter Y if not enter N If you want the report summarized by GL account only enter Y if not enter N If you want the report to show serial detail enter Y if not enter N Command Bar Definitions Command Printer File Screen End Saving and Exiting Description Select P to send the report to a printer Select F to send the report to a file Select to send the report to the screen Select E to change your selections or exit to the Reports menu After the report is produced the Reports menu appears Inventory User s Manual 7 17 Reports Valuation Report Valuation Report
105. Entry Batch List Update Perpetual Inventory Physical Count List Variance Report Physical Count Valuation Report Inventory User s Manual 10 3 10 7 10 11 10 15 10 19 10 27 10 33 10 49 10 37 10 41 10 45 10 1 Physical Inventory Selection Features Use the Physical Inventory Selection function on the Physical Inventory menu to identify a batch ID and select the data you want to include in the batch Reports To produce a list of the data included in the batch ID use the Batch List function on the Physical Inventory menu Screen Use Screen Description Physical Inventory Use the Physical Inventory Selection screen to enter a batch Selection ID and then select the locations items bins product lines and user defined fields you want to include in the batch ID Inventory User s Manual 10 3 Physical Inventory Selection Physical Inventory Physical Inventory Selection Screen As Too Satin Edt Pme biel Fhyslsal CAYEnLOEY Serecrtlion Batcx ID BATI Description Batch 3 Count Debt 1271561999 Gh Period I2 Lezat ion IT From Predict Ling From Thru Thru Trem ID From 700 ipplicetion From Thru TSS Thru Bin Runner From pegar ramen Fr m Thru Thru Use Tag Humberm TEX Display Feo usr Li ian TEE ERED ENDE m ung TER DeZ5suiz Fro quant ic ism TES Point Item Tith Iezo Quaz itigz HO FEeEEE Want Liles TES Fr Field Definitions Field Name Description Batch ID Enter the ID of t
106. F10 Add to Favorites Inventory User s Manual Operation Views the list of commands for the menu To close the commands window press any key Displays help information for this function Displays the Favorites menu or changes to the regular menu from the Favorites menu Allows you to switch between companies Displays the Access Code prompt Opens a menu of utilities A calculator and Global Inquiry which consolidates and presents information from other applications are some of the utilities on the Other Commands menu See the Resource Manager User s Manual for information about the utilities on the Other Commands menu Switches between live and sample data Displays the current workstation date and allows you to change it Exits from OSAS Allows certain functions to be set up Works only in certain applications The application s user s manual will describe the function if necessary Allows you to add to and delete from your Favorites menu Text Menu Introduction Key Operation Shift F5 Switch between text and graphical menu styles without going Change menu style into Defaults Shift F2 Displays information about the applications you have Application Info installed PgUp Move back one menu level Start over Tab Move back to the Main menu Jump Enter Select a menu or function from a menu Up Arrow Move the cursor up or down through the menu selections Down Arrow Ctrl G If the bell is t
107. F7 command Inventory User s Manual 10 21 Physical Counts Tag Entry Physical Inventory Append Edit Tags Window FAS TANA Espen Tags Tag Husmir BE Lcecm inn mucuni Bin Ha Cnunzed dry TEU Unit of B ammura Berial Munber Lot Humber Ires jO0000i cf DOOOO5 Field Definitions Field Name Description Tag Number Enter the tag number for the batch Location Enter the location ID for the physical count Item ID Enter the item ID for the batch Bin No Enter the bin number for the item Unit of Measure Enter the unit of measure for the item Counted Qty Enter or change the counted quantity of the item Serial Number Enter the serial number of the item Lot Number Enter the lot number for the item 10 22 Inventory User s Manual Physical Inventory Physical Counts Tag Entry Command Bar Definitions This window has no command bar Saving and Exiting To exit to the Physical Counts Tag Entry screen use the Proceed PgDn command Inventory User s Manual 10 23 Physical Counts Tag Entry Physical Inventory Enter Exceptions Window Fas TANA Tey Ho Lee Item Lot Serial Tag Hust Lcem inn Item LD Bin Ho Unit of fammsurw Ferial Humber Lot Husier Field Definitions 10 24 Field Name Tag Number Location Item ID Bin No Counted Qty Unit of Measure Serial Number Lot Number PEyszi ai Counta Teg Estcy Batoh TEODHucT L List Frozen Om QUALLS
108. F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 23 Inventory Transactions Daily Work Append Edit Serial Number Window sas TANA Faing La Pt bbb Tram Th 80004 Lcc ID Bool Unite EA Sariml Marber zeriml Bamber EInvmntcz Trarzzmrticza Be erua l Mumber Entey BDimhuasher Black EKIHNERFTCOLIZ WABEHOUEI Requested dry 1 0 Enit Coat 000001 of DODCUD Appazd Serial Humber Senet Me buss28L4223 wig ry Fulfill oer EBacknurd gty Ces DE r Umriftrmticm DOO Cow sg 0000 1 0000 enun Poems lt Pgitn gt u proceed Field Definitions Field Name Serial No Auto Generate Orig Qty Fulfill Qty 5 24 Description Enter the serial number of the item being adjusted sold or purchased This field appears if you entered goods received or a purchase transaction with invoice status If you want the system to generate serial numbers enter Y if not enter N When you enter Y the maximum number of serial numbers available to order appears The original quantity of the serialized items is displayed If you entered Y in the Auto Generate field enter the quantity of serial numbers you are purchasing Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Inventory Transactions Field Name Description Backord Qty The quantities on backorder are displayed Cost Enter or change the cost of the serialized item Ext Cost The extended cost quantity x cost is displayed Price This
109. G 0000 2 SNISNWD Id 0000 ST ONICIING 0000 9 OIHLIONTM 0000 c ONIGTING TEPIO UO queunzedeq pueg uo uot eoTtTddy GI weil g I000NA qI uoraeooT yodey snjeqs uear Atddng szepttng WON SnI eur aonpoad uoT eD0T uoTqdtz0seq 213x94 uoradragosed qI uea3r WY 2 L 6661 82 S0 Inventory User s Manual 7 10 Price Report Features The Price Report shows the quantity break prices for items base or list prices and the profit margin You can use the information to analyze pricing structures Reports A sample Price Report is on page 7 14 Screen Use Screen Description Price Report Use the Price Report screen to select the items locations and customer levels whose price information you want in the report Inventory User s Manual 7 11 Price Report Reports Price Report Screen F MSAN TON Gaig Cat Dus bjp Frice PFagurkt Pick Irem 13 From amp Prime py Thru 200 1 Itam Locaricm Ib From EAU 2 Libation Thru Tet E Customer Lawal From kCEDOI Thru SHEL Print Ericam Am Of m BB 1229 Print Profit Hargim no Print Qumntz y Breaka No Output rice fFbrizzgr p F evinr Y ilg 3 cresn Ej zd Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Enter the range of items locations and customer levels you want in the report Print By Select the option by which you want to organize the report Print Prices As Of Enter the date from which you want to calculate price
110. G6 L0 S6 90 S6 S0 G6 vO S6 E0 S6 Z0 S6 T0 v6 cl V6 Il Yv6 Ol 16 60 v6 80 queunaedeq Won UOT Uuorieor ddy urT 3onpoxd uoradragoseq je2oT1 qI Wy S661 L0 WY Ov L 6661 91 L0 Inventory User s Manual 8 30 Periodic Process Item Price Change Cost Changes Quantity Cross Verification Year End Maintenance Purge Selected Files Rebuild Item Quantities Inventory User s Manual 9 3 9 7 9 11 9 15 9 19 9 23 9 1 Item Price Change Features Use the Item Price Change function on the Periodic Processing menu to change the price of items Reports A sample Item Price Change Log is on page 9 6 Screen Use Screen Description Item Price Change Use the Item Price Change screen to change prices for selected items price IDs locations product lines and user defined fields Inventory User s Manual 9 3 Item Price Change Item Price Change Screen As TOD Periodic Process Item Frica Changs Pick Irem II From 100 Primr dudse Log TES TEru 206 FELGE d Frame APPL POISE byi i Irem Ib Thru RATEL Loacinn Lucmticz From PF20001 1 Taru TXDUUI Frnducr Line From APPLIC TEru MATERIAL Agplication Fram BUILDINZ Thru ATE APFL Depectoene From BDILD ING TRE INTEROP Price In ormmtion idj Bae Base idj Type Rai 1 0000 idj Amcunt Cutput device F cintaez piB evims hate ting Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Enter the range of items p
111. GL Account Code ni Om Hand inao Bales 01000 Car b bed Dnoo rns Diggi Im Wee 1 DIR LIrnwentar pa44uu buai labia OOS Iir CRA Adjusrmenr I Imve entory L33umtuernt a Purch Fricga Vurimnce sanan On Order Pj 00 Beet Frer Gert Firzt Item L cat iona pEiring Dins Field Definitions The information on the General screen comes from the Location Information screen in the File Maintenance Item Locations function 4 42 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Item Locations Command Bar Definitions Command Next Prev Last First Item Locations Pricing Bins Saving and Exiting Description Press N to view the next item location record on file Press P to view the previous item location record on file Press L to view the last item location record on file Press F to view the first item location record on file Press I to go to the Item ID field and enter a different item ID Press O to view the other locations for the item The Locations screen appears Press R to view pricing information about the item location The Unit Price Information screen appears Press B to view bin information about the item location The Bin Information screen appears To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 4 43 Item Locations Information Inquiry Item Locations Unit Price Information Screen A Tom Sinqa Cat Pet ben
112. Gost Por 24 0000 Crdar mg Coat dat 5 0000 m Umrifirmricm Poems lt Pgin gt n proceed Field Definitions Field Name Description Location ID Enter or change the location ID Copy From This field appears if you entered a new location Enter the ID of the location whose information you want to copy Name Enter or change the name or description of the location Address 1 Address 2 Enter or change the address of the location Address 3 City State Enter or change the city and state of the location Zip Country Enter or change the location s zip code and the country Contact Enter or change the name of the contact person at the location 11 52 Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Locations Field Name Phone Number Fax Number Carrying Cost Pct Ordering Cost Amt Description Enter or change the phone number of the location Enter or change the fax number of the location The carrying cost expressed as a percentage of the total value of your inventory is used in the EOQ calculation in the reorder process Enter or change your costs to stock items at the location Note If you need to override the carrying cost percentage for an item use the Location Information screen in the Item Locations function The ordering cost includes the total shipping costs labor and stocking and it is used in the EOQ calculation in the reorder process Enter your cost to place orders at the location Note If you need to
113. H HUSICIPAL HTILITIES 1540 JOHOOI JOR DOS COHPANT IB 11342 dO JOMES REALTY COHFANT UE 1415 58 COWS LUMBOE HEATING AIR COMDITICON 00 HILOO3 HILLMOBE LUMEN CABTIMETS On 04 22 99 MTH ATHEROS WATER EREPAETHEHT iis i E PLASTICS EITAL FASBICATORS 122006 TELL amp JACOPT ad THOMF3CH HEATING i si t3 ic 17 58 TIHBEFLKHD WINDOWS IHE 14031 16 L1 22 99 Irr Gist Stem hist aF trunus Vand misc IH Puran TTO Blnas 4 9n eda Ou baimn 7 Lop 74 zTERT Q 73445 55 z510 u n 52519 09 r n 11203 14 EE nl 1B208 15 2232 00 EE 24 In the window above the user selected Accounts Payable from the Global Inquiry menu The window that appears lists the vendors by vendor ID and the total amount due Because of the way the window is set up the user can access five other windows one that displays accounts payable invoices one that displays invoice history one that displays paid invoices one that displays accounts payable transactions and one that displays miscellaneous vendor information From Global Inquiry you can use the Other F4 command to access the Global Inquiry menu again To look up and select a previously accessed window use the Inquiry F2 command The sequence number and description represent the window IDs that you have accessed with the Global Inquiry command Inventory User s Manual References Other Commands For example when you use the Other F4
114. ID You can then access the items again 11 19 Item Locations File Maintenance Field Name On Hand Committed In Use Available On Order Do You Want to Maintain Description The number of units on hand at the location is displayed The number of units of the item customers have on order or otherwise reserved is displayed The quantity being used is displayed The quantity available for sale the on hand quantity minus the in use and committed quantities is displayed The quantity that is on order from vendors is displayed Enter Y for each screen you want to work on enter N for each screen you do not want to work on Then see the appropriate screens below Command Bar Definitions Command Enter edit Append Item Units Saving and Exiting Description Move the prompt gt to the location you want to edit and press Enter The cursor goes to the Do You Want to Maintain fields where you can select the screens you want to edit Press A to add a location to the item Press I to go to the Item ID field and enter a different item ID Press U to go to the Units field and enter a different unit of measure When you save your entries PgDn the first screen you selected from the Item Locations menu appears To exit to the File Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command 11 20 Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Item Locations Item Locations Location Informati
115. Item Price ID Tax Class Item Weight User Defined Fields Description If the item can be used as a kit enter Y if not enter N If you are working with a service item this field is skipped If you want to track lots for the item enter Y if not enter N If you are working with a service item or a kitted item this field is skipped If you want the item to be in the Reorder Report whenever the reorder level is reached enter Y if not enter N If you are working with a service item or a kitted item this field is skipped Enter or change the base unit of measure at which the item is most often sold or picked from stock Enter or change the sales category for the item Enter or change the product line for the item Enter or change the item price ID for the item Enter or change the tax class the item belongs to Enter or change the weight of the item Enter or change the user defined fields for the item Command Bar Definitions This screen has no command bar Saving and Exiting When you save your entries and exit from the General Information screen PgDn the next screen you selected from the Items menu appears If you did not select another screen the File Maintenance menu appears Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Items Items Units of Measure Screen SAS TOIA Gaig EX fmi Bel T Ttera Tuitz cf Aserce Irem iB LOW Dem zrigrinn Elezcrrical Packsge its Comersion Pactor w i
116. Item Summary List function on the Master File Lists menu to produce a summarized list of general information about your inventory items Reports A sample Item Summary List is on page 13 10 Screen Use Screen Description Item Summary List Use the Item Summary List screen to select the items product lines and user defined fields that you want in the list Inventory User s Manual 13 7 Item Summary List Master File Item Summary List Screen F SAn Ti Iter Summary Liszt Bick Irem 7 Tr Thru PEDZucT Linz From Thru Application From TRE i be partes ne Tr om Thru Output rict Field Definitions Field Name Pick Print By 13 8 icu zou APTLIABE T BATERTAL BUILDING BIR APPL BUILD TEES ITER KFirizzgr pF evinr qm ii fSpzrmmn E ad Description Umep Dedirned Jorr Iter ID Progr Lime Applacaricn Dear per mant User Derined Bork 1 Enter the range of items product lines and user defined fields you want in the list Select the option by which you want to organize the list Inventory User s Manual Master File Item Summary List Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the list to a printer File Select F to send the list to a file Screen Select S to send the list to the screen End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Master File Lists menu Saving and Exiting After the list is produced the Master
117. LOaTA ONICGTING SMOGNIM ldaV UN ANI WOH LANTavo ONIGTING 9Sn A PT TA ASTI SPT FA peurgeq zesn Ajtddns szepting yodey jo puq 30102 0 queuaiedeq zo uot qeot Tddy 10 3duoad ON PTeta Wd 8S 1 6661 L0 80 Inventory User s Manual 14 30 User Defined Field Sorts List Features Use the User Defined Field Sorts List function on the Master Code Lists menu to produce a list of the two sorted fields you set up Reports A sample User Defined Field Sorts List is on page 14 34 Screen Use Screen Description User Defined Field Sorts Use the User Defined Field Sorts List screen to select one List or both of your sorts to list Inventory User s Manual 14 31 User Defined Field Sorts List Master Codes List User Defined Field Sorts List Screen E aan nia Taing Ld Deo fap Umzr DgZirmd Field Borta List Pick Deer Gort From 1 Thru i Jutgut cavrice CPhciztec p F evinr m ilg Screen E zd Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Enter 1 or 2 to indicate the user sorts you want in the list 14 32 Inventory User s Manual Master Codes List User Defined Field Sorts List Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the list to a printer File Select F to send the list to a file Screen Select S to send the list to the screen End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Master Code Lists menu Saving and Exiting After the li
118. LT 6661 L0 80 Inventory User s Manual 7 14 Valuation Report Features Use the Valuation Report to evaluate the profitability of inventory items It summarizes the value of the items on hand and the profit of the items sold during the year It shows the average unit cost extended cost depending on the valuation method selected purchases sales COGS and PPV adjustments other type of movement adjustments and the beginning balance based on these figures Reports A sample Valuation Report is on page 7 18 Screen Use Screen Description Valuation Report Use the Valuation Report screen to select items locations product lines and user defined fields that you want in the report Inventory User s Manual 7 15 Valuation Report Reports Valuation Report Screen As TAN Sang LX Pmi blip Walwstion Faeport Bick Irem 13 Trus icd Prime fy Thru 200 1 Itum ID L bparicoam Ib Feo MwIUDI So PEs Line Thru THONI 3 Applicaricn Frnduc Lima Foom AFFZLIAMCI 4 Dapar mant ThEu MATERIAL User Defined Berk 1 Applicazcinn From BUIL DIES User Defined Sore Thru MIF APPL 1 Department Feo BULLD ISO Thru IWTERTGOF Print Valuation Herhodi Print Fg Loosrion He 1 LIFG7FEFDO Feint Ixcrm Damcriptian HO z hura FELDE Teur to Dutt Ht randerd Feint GL Summary Only He 1 Feint Sariml Patail WC Output cavirt CPicintec pF evinr W ilg Shzrumm E za Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick
119. Lire Becomdary T Color Tertiary r mrifirmticum Freez lt Pgln gt n proceed Field Definitions Field Name Description Field Descriptions The user defined fields you set up in the User Defined Fields function are displayed Sort Sequence Enter or change the name for each sort sequence The name you enter appears in selected reports For each sort sequence you can choose among 16 user defined fields and product lines but each user defined field can be used only once in a sort sequence Primary Enter the number of the user defined field that you want to appear first in the sort sequence 12 24 Inventory User s Manual Code Maintenance User Defined Field Sorts Field Name Description Secondary Enter the number of the user defined field that you want to appear second in the sort sequence Tertiary Enter the number of the user defined field that you want to appear third in the sort sequence Command Bar Definitions This screen has no command bar Saving and Exiting To save your entries use the Proceed PgDn command To exit to the Code Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 12 25 Master File Item Detail List Item Summary List Item Locations List Location Detail List Price Structure List Promotional Pricing List Tables List Inventory User s Manual 13 3 19 7 13 11 13 15 13 19 13 23 13 27 13 1 Item Detail List Features The Item Detail Li
120. List Produce the Physical Count List after you have entered physical counts to verify that the correct quantities were entered for the batches Producing the Variance Report Produce the Variance Report after you have entered and verified the physical count of your inventory The report shows the difference between the counts you entered and the on hand frozen quantities in the system Variances are expressed as a quantity and a dollar amount and they are based on your inventory valuation method Inventory User s Manual Work Flow Periodic Tasks Producing the Physical Count Valuation Report Produce the Physical Count Valuation Report before you update your inventory accounts The report shows frozen and updated quantities and their values Updating Perpetual Inventory Before you update your perpetual inventory complete the following tasks e Enter the physical counts for each batch Printthe Variance Report e Back up all the data files The on hand quantities in the item records are updated by the difference between the frozen quantity and the physical counts you entered and the Month and Year to Date COGS Adjustments fields are updated by the variance amounts The variance amounts are based on the inventory valuation method you use If you use the LIFO or the FIFO method and no cost is available for example because the item has no on hand quantity the system updates quantities using the zero quantity method sele
121. Lists menu appears Inventory User s Manual 14 9 Master Codes List Customer Levels List Customer Levels List T abeg 3euojsn e eseqouM jeuojsn reaeu 3euo3sn aeqgor 3oezquoo sdep rng eov uotqdtz9seq AST ST A T Tewo IsND Atddns szept tng 33odew jo pug ISHM TIVIT Wagon 10035V T9Ae T ATWO SND Wd S T 6661 L0 80 Inventory User s Manual 14 10 Product Lines List Features Use the Product Lines List function on the Master Code Lists menu to produce a list of product lines You can use the list as a reference when you assign product lines to items Reports A sample Product Lines List is on page 14 14 Screen Use Screen Description Product Lines List Use the Product Lines List screen to select the product lines that you want in the list Inventory User s Manual 14 11 Product Lines List Master Codes List Product Lines List Screen C SAS De gu Lea Emi bep r Pct Lima Lirt Pick Produce Lina From APPLIAHCE Thru MATEFIAL Jutgut device fFbrizzgr p E Evirw Mh iis fSpzrzemn E zd Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Enter the range of product lines you want in the list 14 12 Inventory User s Manual Master Codes List Product Lines List Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the list to a printer File Select F to send the list to a file Screen Select S to send the list to the screen
122. Location LL era Transs rinn Troe a Sequence Huncar 1 Frimnt kdjzertmentzi TES Primr pajas YI3 Prist Purchaser TES Output chvirg EFt istet p E Evirgm CFhilg S cregmn i za Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Enter the range of locations and items whose information you want in the journal Print By Select the option by which you want to organize the journal Print adjustments If you want the journal to include adjustment transactions enter Y if not enter N Print sales If you want the journal to include sales transactions enter Y if y J not enter N 5 56 Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Transactions Journal Field Name Description Print purchases If you want the journal to include purchase transactions enter Y if not enter N Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the journal to a printer File Select F to send the journal to a file Screen Select S to send the journal to the screen End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Daily Work menu Saving and Exiting After the journal is produced the Daily Work menu appears Inventory User s Manual 5 57 Daily Work Transactions Journal Transactions Journal 00 0000 00 0000 00 0000 pas axa 3s05 pas 00 0000 8 CCP 0c 8 ZZE 00 0000 la axs orzd aun GS ee 00SS vE SS EPE 00SS vE GS ere 00SS vE
123. Lozsrian 3 Pork Q Feoduct Lina lIcumm Lccmrcinn Zin s l1 Print Frnrzen Quantities TES Page Break cs MUnpksEekLS T Cutput deric Ficinta p B avrimu Iiis Irina Field Definitions Field Name Description Batch ID Enter the ID of the batch you want to work with Print By Select the option by which you want to organize the worksheets Select Select the type of items you want on the worksheets Print frozen quantities If you have frozen your inventory quantities and you want to print them on the worksheets enter Y if not enter N 10 16 Inventory User s Manual Physical Inventory Print Physical Inventory Worksheets Field Name Description Page break on If you chose to print the batch by location or product line and worksheets you want a page break between locations or product lines enter Y if not enter N If you chose to print by bin number you cannot insert page breaks Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the worksheets to a printer File Select F to send the worksheets to a file End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Physical Inventory menu Saving and Exiting After the worksheets are produced the Physical Inventory menu appears Inventory User s Manual 10 17 Physical Inventory Print Physical Inventory Worksheets Physical Inventory Worksheets 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
124. MCI Thru HMRTERIAL Applicarzinn Tru BPILDTIEES Thru MIF AFFL Department ream BPELD Le Thru INTERTIZF Include Lewes in Annus amp il Tsage7 TEX Inciwde Traamfers Cur in Annus Ts amp sg TES In iudms Hararial Faguiririnnm iz Anrual Dmagaj TES Remove All Cabrulezinns and Brarr eer TES Replace ZCwarlmappirg Caloal art isra Ho r Veriftoetice Prgmm zPFgDn n proceed Field Definitions Field Name Pick Include issues in annual usage Include transfers out in annual usage 6 4 Description Enter the range of items locations product lines and user defined fields whose reorder quantity you want to calculate If you want to include the annual usage quantities for issues bill of materials with multiple items in the reorder calculation enter Y if not enter N If you want to include the annual usage quantities for transfers in the reorder calculation enter Y if not enter N Inventory User s Manual Reorder Processing Field Name Include material requisitions in annual usage Remove all calculations and start over Replace overlapping calculations Calculate Reorders Description This field appears if you entered information on the Calculate Reorders screen but did not use the Generate Purchase Requisitions function If you want to include the material requisitions in the reorder calculation enter Y if not enter N This field appears if you entered information on the Calculate
125. N soueTeg beg 3sop atun pueg uo O3IJ OJIT poujew UOT3en eA qI wy Ag 3aodey uor3en eA I abeg Aqddng saep rng won eur 3onpoid qI weil WY Sc L 6661 8c S0 Inventory User s Manual 7 18 Cost Variance Report Features Use the Cost Variance Report to analyze the cost variance of items using standard to average actual to standard and actual to average costs Reports A sample Cost Variance Report is on page 7 22 Screen Use Screen Description Cost Variance Report Use the Cost Variance Report screen to select the items locations product lines and user defined fields that you want in the report Inventory User s Manual 7 19 Cost Variance Report Reports Cost Variance Report Screen Cont Wardens Pees Pick Irem 13 TEm i60 Prime py Thru 200 1 Itam ID L paricoam Ib From MHWIUDI i Premion Lime Thru TEZXn i Frnduct Ling From AFSLIAMCI Thru MATERIAL hpplicazinn From BPEZLDTEES Thru BIE APPL Department Feo EUVILDIBG Thru INTERIZEF Appilicaricn Dapar mant User Defined Bork 1 User Defdined Jorr ka wm m de da Print Py Locsrion Ho Print Lor Detatl YI Frint Ixtrm Descriptiun Mo Peint Wear rc BDare Ha Output cavice fFbrizzgr p F evinr X ilg Spcrmgmn E zd Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Enter the range of items locations product lines and user defined fields you want in the report
126. OJN Z TETI FN I TE I FN burqezoo q zorz qur s rrddns szooq seouer ddv uotjdtzoseq AST serad0beje se es Ajtddns saepping M M s ra eu u KAaobe3e2 Wd 2S 1 6661 L0 80 Inventory User s Manual 14 6 Customer Levels List Features Use the Customer Levels List function on the Master Code Lists menu to produce a list of the customer levels You can use it as a reference when you assign customer levels to items Reports A sample Customer Levels List is on page 14 10 Screen Use Screen Description Customer Levels List Use the Customer Levels List screen to select the customer levels that you want in the list Inventory User s Manual 14 7 Customer Levels List Master Codes List Customer Levels List Screen ATUM Sei Ka Pew bep r Cutar ala Lis Pict Customer Lawel From ACEOOE Thru WHEL Cutgut device fFbrizzgr p E mEvirw dE iis fSpzremn E zd Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Enter the range of customer levels you want in the list 14 8 Inventory User s Manual Master Codes List Customer Levels List Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the list to a printer File Select F to send the list to a file Screen Select S to send the list to the screen End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Master Code Lists menu Saving and Exiting After the list is produced the Master Code
127. OPEN SYSTEMS Accounting Software Inventory User s Manual 1998 Open Systems Holdings Corp All rights reserved Document Number 2210 IN60 No part of this manual may be reproduced by any means without the written permission of Open Systems Holdings Corp OPEN SYSTEMS is a registered trademark and OSAS Resource Manager Resource Manager for Windows and Report Writer are trademarks of Open Systems Holdings Corp BB is a trademark and PRO 5 and Visual PRO 5 are registered trademarks of BASIS International Ltd Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell Inc Microsoft Windows Windows 95 Windows NT and MS DOS are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Inc TrueType is a registered trademark of Apple Computer Inc Open Systems Accounting Software for UNIX uses PKUNZIP utilities from Ascent Solutions Inc 9009 Springboro Pike Miamisburg OH 45342 Phone 937 847 2374 Internet www asizip com Printed in U S A This manual is recyclable August 1998 Release 6 00 This document has been prepared to conform to the current release version of OPEN SYSTEMS Accounting Software Because of our extensive development efforts and our desire to further improve and enhance the software inconsistencies may exist between the software and the documentation in some instances Call your customer support representative if you encounter an inconsis
128. P ONIGTING 6661 v0 0 0000 0000 Ta UN 9661 87 80 0000 0000 9 SNIQTIDH S66T ZT TI 0000 0000 Ta UN 9661 87 80 0000 0000 61 0000 0000 0000 0000 L21 ONIGTING S66T 60 2T 0000 0000 Idd HOW 9661 82 50 0000 0000 TOZ ONIGTING S66T 60 ZT 0000 0000 Idd HOW 6661 60 21 0000 0000 Sp ONIGTING S66T 70 0 0000 0000 dav HOW 9661 82 50 0000 0000 9 ONIGTING S66T Z2T TI 0000 0000 Idd HOW 9661 82 50 0089 6 T8EE6 0000 6LE 0000 0000 OO0E6 86TST 0000 006S v298 C 0000 00SL 10GvG 0000 00 8 6068 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 iejeeH 1eqeM WIV IVHH TOOOdN 00c00c iejeeH 197M WIV lVHH I000V2 002002 001007 WALI HO3 TWLOL ooeuin WIV IVHH 000X1L 001002 oeuzna WIV IVHH 000NA 00100c ooeuin WIV IVUH 0001W 00100c oeuzna WIV LVHH 000 9 001007 007 WALI WOd TWLOL abeyoeg Burrooo Burqe WIV IVSH 000X1 002 abeyoeg Hut toog but yes WIV IVSH 000NA 00 abeyoeg Burrooo Burqe WIV IVSH 0001W o0z abeyoeg Burrooo Burqe WIV IVSH 000V2 002 3TgO3d GLA 3tgo4d Ald obegq 3soo bay qsop 3seT O0bP GPIITlE 0000 L2I SNIGIIDH 6661 60 71 0000 0000 SNIGTIIDG 001v 9v G6y 0000 TOZ SNIGIIDH 6661 60 71 0000 0000 SNIGIIDH G661 v0 01 00S 868011 0000 Sr SNIGIIDH G661 v0 0 0000 0000 SNIqTrng 008E 6ZP9T 00
129. PED 1nn nocao 212158 00 biia Purch PL More AF PEG 50 Cele i iTT 5 12723 Furrh THL KF PEG 10 ee LUIl 19523 Mitth ACCENTI AF FEG 3 0000 171T Ley 1399 Purch ELLO E Po PEU 3 TEC 1030 65 Lis 1229 Purch ELLOGL Po BEL 3 02000 1nio 45 1z 1299 Purch ELLOGI Po FEG 3 naoc 1015 43 Lire Ha 0 0i of 000007 Bast Poor First Gert Heke View Goto Field Definitions Field Name Description Item ID Enter the ID of the item whose detail history you want to view Location Enter the location ID for the item Include Enter P to include purchase transactions S to include sales transactions M to include material requisitions T to include transfers A to include adjustments B to include builds and L to include all transactions for the item Period Yr Enter the range of periods and years you want to view 4 18 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Detail History Command Bar Definitions Command Description Next Press N to view the next item record on file Prev Press P to view the previous item record on file First Press F to view the first item record on file Last Press L to view the last item record on file Header Press H to go to the Item ID field and change any of the header information View Press V to view detailed information about a transaction The View Transaction Detail window appears Saving and Exiting To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User
130. Pera Lu Per ult Haps PEG 11 0000 nun nn PEG Altarzmtmm Lire Ho jOOGQ0 01 of Omi Entec wie Append Pada unit defeoitea Best poreen FPeeviour gccecn Field Definitions Field Name Description Item ID The ID of the item you are working with is displayed Description The description of the item you are working with is displayed Units The base unit of measure you entered on the General Information screen is displayed Conversion Factor The conversion factor tells the system what portion of the base unit the alternate unit is Enter the conversion factor for the base unit of measure Inventory User s Manual 11 9 Items File Maintenance Field Name 96 Penalty Default Description The penalty factor determines the price when fractional parts of a unit are sold A penalty expressed as a percentage applies to the fractional part of the units sold resulting in a unit penalty for fractional quantities sold A penalty expressed as a dollar amount applies to the inventory item regardless of the quantity sold resulting in a penalty per sale rather than per unit To charge a percentage that applies to the fraction of the units sold enter To charge a dollar amount that applies to the entire sale enter Enter the percentage or dollar amount of the penalty The default unit of measure is displayed Command Bar Definitions Command Enter edit Append Base unit defaults Next screen
131. SNxxx file you cannot change the cost if it is not you must enter a cost When you enter a miscellaneous credit for a lotted item enter a lot number the quantity and the cost Purchases Purchase transactions are used to process purchases you make from vendors Purchasing activity is usually performed through the Accounts Payable Purchase Order applications If you do not have these applications you can purchase items by entering a new order goods received invoices and miscellaneous debits 3 6 Inventory User s Manual Work Flow Daily Tasks New Order Use the new order status to place orders that will be sent to you at a later date A new order increases the quantity on order and does not affect the quantity available When you enter a new order the last cost of the item appears in the Cost field but you can change it Goods Received Use the goods received status to update the quantity and cost of the goods you received from the vendor Goods received increase the quantity on hand decrease the quantity on order and increase the quantity available When you enter goods received the last cost of the item appears in the Cost field but you can change it When you enter goods received for serialized items you must enter a new serial number and you can choose whether or not to generate serial numbers When you enter goods received for lotted items enter a lot number the quantity and the cost nvoice Us
132. Search Commands If you use the Inventory application and the cursor is in an Item ID field you can use any of the Inventory Search commands to search for information about items and select an item for entry in the field you are in Key Shift F3 Alias Lookup Shift F4 Customer Vendor Lookup Inventory User s Manual Operation Search for items with a specified alias listed as an alternate item When you enter the alias you can use the and wildcard characters to restrict or widen the search Search for an item based on customer ID or vendor ID When you enter the customer or vendor ID you can use the and wildcard characters to restrict or widen the search 1 33 Function Commands Introduction Key Shift F5 Detail Lookup Shift F6 Lot Item Lookup Shift F7 Serial Number Item Lookup Shift F8 Item Description Lookup Report Commands 1 34 Operation Search for detailed information about an item You can enter search information in any of the fields that appear using any of the following wildcard characters to restrict or widen the search lt gt Search for an item based on lot number When you enter the lot number you can use the and wildcard characters to restrict or widen the search Search for an item based on serial number When you enter the serial number you can use the and wildcard characters to restr
133. T 0000 0000 BATION SAT3o0V ATPY ATPY BATION SAT3o0V SAT3oV SAT3o0V BATION AT3OV AT3OV AT3OV BATION ATW fa fa fa fa fa fa fa fa OdNOD iOdWOO iOdWOO OdWOO OdWOO OdWOO OdWOO iOdWOO V IVaH V IVGH V IVGH V IV8H V IVaH ZOOONN TO00WO 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 000 000 000 000 000 0085001 iequnN setdeg 008 00L azempzey IMPLI 61100 zooq PUTI LITOOL ATquessy Temezq STTOOL pzeog buama ETLOOL Spieog yng ZTTLOOL ATquessy Jeutgqeo TITOOL zetjrprung 009002 dung dums 005002 Zeus os 1e3eM 007007 ieuorirpuo ITY 00 00c 3eqeeH 197M 002002 oeuzrna 00100 UNUTX eH ebeg 0000 L 0000 0000 0000 T 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ST 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Z1 0000 0000 0000 ST 0000 0000 0000 92 0000 0000 0000 TT 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 Z1 0000 0000 0000 L1 0000 0000 0000 0000 esp ur TqeTTeAV p q3ruttoo 3epao uo 3ueuniedeq pueg uo uot qeot Tddy qI w Ag 31odeu xoo1s41eAQ Ajtddns szepting snqe3s eur PNPOT won UOT38207T uoridragoseq QI ueil Wd Iv cI 6661 S1 90 Inventory User s Manual 8 10 Slow Fast Movement Report Features Use the Slow Fast Movement Report to analy
134. Treas Cost Ocnn Ces DE r Vsariftrariom Pome lt Pgin gt u proceed Field Definitions Field Name Description Serial Number Enter or change the serial number you are transferring from Cost The cost of the serialized item is displayed Trans Cost Enter or change the cost of transferring the serialized item Comment Enter additional information about the serialized item being transferred 5 48 Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Location Transfers Command Bar Definitions This window has no command bar Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the Serial Number Entry window use the Proceed PgDn command To exit to the Serial Number Entry window without saving your entries use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 49 Location Transfers Daily Work Serial Lot Number Entry Window STETERIT gu La Du kjip m Locwtinn Transfers Bgeri ial Munber Ente y From Irem ID 03 Ta Irem En mut From bor I0 HuccuUl Te Loc IS ESUDDI Unies LA kequesread Coe L DOTI Zariml Merhar Tnit Coat Paber 000001 of DODCUU Tr amp rsfmr Coot UC Tramessoricm Dare OVO io Period OF Tear 1959 Conan nie Transfer O00DODJ of DOS Entec adit Append Tonos Field Definitions Field Name Description From Item ID The ID of the transferred item is displayed From Loc ID The ID of the location the item is being transferred from is displayed Units The unit of measu
135. User s Manual Information Inquiry Costs and Vendors Command Bar Definitions Command Tab Cost Detail Next Prev Last First Item Loca Vendors Units Saving and Exiting Description Press Tab to view the Cost Detail or the Cost Information sections of the screen Press N to view the next item location record on file Press P to view the previous item location record on file Press L to view the last item location record on file Press F to view the first item location record on file Press I to go to the Item ID field and enter a different item ID Press O to go to the Location field and enter a different location ID Press V to view vendor information about the item location The Vendor Information screen appears Press U to go to the Units field and enter a different unit size To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 4 51 Costs and Vendors Information Inquiry Costs and Vendors Vendor Information Screen a An iii Gaii Cat Fwd bhi Comte wind Umm cza Wendnr Izfnrztinn Irem ib Lu Loa lon MUDD1 Dem rigrinn Elesrtrical Packsge Unita PEG Last P Vereder WVern cr m Fart Humber Lead Quantic Unit Camsr bacs ELLOUGL 753 T223DHIE s n 2 0000 3 3500 13721 1799 Line Ho joOQ0001 of DOi axt Tz5 amp v Last Firzt ltem locmcinn Cumtr View Field Definitions The
136. User s Manual Introduction Graphical Style Menus Workstation Date dialog box ELLE IMPO Lc pesvum d am gms Em Enter the date or use the up down buttons to increase or decrease the date 2 Select OK to change the workstation date System Date to change the workstation date to match the operating system date Abandon to exit without changing the date or Exit to return to the Main menu Tools Menu pe EE uses orm i RETE Eie Command Icon Key Result Calculator Displays the Windows calculator Favorites Menu Pe Lo GREE oe Hate Bl i Cheapest Pawns FS Command Icon Key Result Change to F2 Displays the Favorites menu Main Favorites TE menu See Favorites Menu on page a 1 25 Inventory User s Manual 1 21 Graphical Style Menus Introduction Other Menu D Ton Faces TREE Is ES e od s Help Cabai E macula m pasing pitami Comer Cal a PDS Soe Piri Sieger ppd ice piri Yapi ob i ruam p Seren doen bey Superi araon Lum paranta The Other menu contains a set of utilities A calculator and Global Inquiry which consolidates and presents data from other applications are some of the utilities on the Other menu See the Resource Manager User s Manual for information about the utilities on the Other menu Help Menu Fe Tek Fleas Dre EEJ El elc mii pm m Command Help About OSAS 1 22 Icon Key Result Fl Displays the online help Displ
137. Wallpaper Cunrsmpcrary Tram Typs Hnnserimlizad Taite FOLL Iri ude all bed Lek je im Cr der Expires Spar 150 0000 nna diva lable aO nooo Lived Laie E50 0E noo DORR of DOE Hert Feer Last Ficat ItEgm lCcmticn View Field Definitions Field Name Item ID Location ID Units Include 4 56 Description Enter the ID of the item whose lot information you want to view Enter the ID of the location for the item Enter the unit of measure for the item Enter A to view available lots S to view sold lots E to view expired lots and L to view all the lots for the item Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Lot Numbers Command Bar Definitions Command Description Next Press N to view the next item location record on file Prev Press P to view the previous item location record on file Last Press L to view the last item location record on file First Press F to view the first item location record on file Item Press I to go to the Item ID field and enter a different item ID Location Press O to go to the Location ID field and enter a different location ID View Press V to view information about lot transactions The Lot Inquiry screen appears Saving and Exiting To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 4 57 Lot Numbers Information Inquiry Lot Inquiry Screen 7 0605 10M Let Inquiry Irem iB Bum Hra rus abl
138. a plus sign If a promotional price is set up and should be applied to the customer level enter Y if not enter N Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Item Locations Command Bar Definitions Price Information Command Tab Customer Levels Enter edit Next screen Previous screen Customer Levels Command Tab Price Info Enter edit Append Next screen Previous screen Saving and Exiting Description Press Tab to go to the Customer Levels section of the screen Move the prompt gt to the line you want to edit and press Enter The Edit Price Information window appears Press N to go to the next screen you selected or to return to the Item Locations screen if the Price Information screen is the last screen you selected Press P to go to the previous screen or to return to the Item Locations screen if the Price Information screen is the first screen you selected Description Press Tab to go to the Price Information section of the screen Move the prompt gt to the line you want to edit and press Enter Press A to add a customer level to the list Press N to go to the next screen you selected or to return to the Item Locations screen if the Price Information screen is the last screen you selected Press P to go to the previous screen or to return to the Item Locations screen if the Price Information screen is the first screen you selected To save the informatio
139. a1 na IVTSRIVA a1 na WIYALYN a na 000XL 000NW 000XL 31odey jo puq ebexoeg BurTooo Burqe H 00 ebexoeg BurTooo Burqe H 00 abeyoeg Teor OETA 001 abeyoeg eord329 4 001 T ebeq sarun queuaiedeq UOT OT q ddy weqr Ag suTT 3onpoid qI eotid ebueu eorad uei Atddns szepttng uot ed0T uot4dtz9seq QI wI Wd 9p c 6661 L0 80 Inventory User s Manual 9 6 Cost Changes Features Use the Cost Changes function on the Periodic Processing menu to change standard or base costs of items Reports A sample Cost Changes Log is on page 9 10 Screen Use Screen Description Cost Changes Use the Cost Changes screen to select an adjustment base and to change the cost for selected items locations product lines and user defined fields Inventory User s Manual 9 7 Cost Changes Periodic Process Cost Changes Screen E MSAN TANA S a fmi kb Coat Cheasgeg Pick Ad Tae Jt arid mrd Pramr by l Itam ID irem LI Frz m 10 2 Lee lon Thru 20 i Lncmticz From M001 TRE TOL Frn ucr Line From AFFLTAHCTE TEru MATERIAL Agplication Fram BUILD ONG Tiru ADE APPL Tapmrtrent From BUIEDIMG Coat Coda From Li Teei INTERIOR Thru OW Cost Informazinn idj Type i h idj Amen 1 00600 Cutput device F cintas piB evisgw Fiile Iih na Field Definitions Field Name Description Adj Base Enter S if you want to u
140. abeyoeg BurTooo burqe H 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000 9 YIY IVH o0z ebexyoeg burqunqd 0020 0008 0S 9 0078 0S 9 0008 0S 9 0000 L 000XL TIVIHSLVI 0S ebeyoeg Hutqumtd 0000 00S9 LESD 0089 LESH 00S9 LES 0000 S 000NW TVIYALVI 0S ebeyoeg bhutquntd 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000W TVIYALVI 0S ebeyoeg bhutquntd 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000 9 TVIYALVI 0S abeyoed TeOTr OETA 0000 000 1907 000 1907 000 1907 0000 9 000XL TIVTHSLVI 00 ebexoeg Teor OETA TSPE ISrh L89 0001 189 ISrh L89 0000 c 000NW TVIYALVI 00 peyoed TeoTr OETA 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000W TVIYALVI 00 peyoed TeoTr ETA 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000 9 TVIYALVI 00 bay Tenqoy pas Tenqoy bez Av pas queuaiedeq uot 4dtz0seq ii Soue rej qenaov pueg uo uoraeor ddy qI 00T uTT 3onpoad qI wg qr wI Ag qrodey soueTie 3902 Wa 7 T ebeg Atddng saepTtng 6661 ST 90 7 22 Serialized History Report Features Use the Serialized History Report function on the Reports menu to list historical transactions for serialized items Reports A sample Serialized History Report is on page 7 26 Screen Use Screen Description Serialized History Report Use the Serialized History Report screen to select the items locations product lines lot numbers and serial numbers that you want in the report Inventory User s Manual 7 23 Serialized History
141. account code whose information you want to add or change Copy From This field appears if you entered a new account code Enter the account code whose information you want to copy Description Enter or change the description of the account code Sales Enter or change the sales account to use when posting income Cost of Goods Sold Enter or change the cost of goods sold account to use when posting costs Inventory Enter or change the inventory account to use when posting inventory value Inventory User s Manual Code Maintenance Account Codes Field Name Work in Process Inventory Adjustment COGS Adjustment Purchase Price Variance Phys Count Adjustment Transfer Cost Description Enter or change the work in process account to use when posting jobs that are in process Enter or change the inventory adjustment account to use when posting adjustments made to inventory Enter or change the COGS adjustment account to use when posting adjustments made to inventory Enter or change the purchase price variance account to use when posting differences between the standard cost and the actual cost Enter or change the physical count adjustment account to use when posting physical count differences Enter or change the transfer cost account to use when posting transfer costs Command Bar Definitions This screen has no command bar Saving and Exiting To save your entries use Proceed PgDn command To
142. acters as you need to establish a logical system but use as few characters as possible to identify your items e Leave room between IDs so that you can add items e Use IDs that make selecting ranges of items easy For example if all your inventory numbers for raw materials begin with RM and no other items begin with RM you can specify a range of inventory items such as RM0001 through RMO100 to print a report that lists only raw materials Location IDs Location IDs which can be 6 characters long identify where you store your inventory items If you currently identify your locations by a number use that number as the ID If you do not already have a numbering system create an alphabetic or an alphanumeric system Product Lines Product lines which can be 12 characters long categorize or identify groups of similar items Product lines are used throughout Inventory in reports as sort options and physical counts When you set up product lines set up a character sequence that identifies both a broad category and specific categories of items For example the first three characters could identify broad categories and the remaining characters could identify a specific category Price IDs Price IDs which can be 6 letters long identify customer level pricing You may want to set up price IDs for categories of items or items in particular locations Inventory User s Manual Setup Setup Considerations Choosing Costing Me
143. actions If you do not keep detail history you cannot use this function Reports No report is associated with this function Screen Use Screen Detail History View Transaction Detail window Inventory User s Manual Description Use the Detail History screen to view selected information about transactions period and year the transaction took place transaction date type of transaction source ID application units quantity and total amount To add or change information on this screen use the Inventory Transactions function or the Location Transfers function Use the View Transaction Detail window to view such detailed information about the transaction as the unit price and cost 447 Detail History Information Inquiry Detail History Screen IDH Sing Ka Pus tjip 4 Datmil Hizznry Irem 18 Loo El amp srrical Packege Lnzmrian WHO Farind Tr From Lf 1999 Incl oda Purchases Thru 12 179 Tear Tran Dare Tope arg iB BF Hnirm mant itp Eur dcum 1369 D amp O4 1B 23 Purch ELLOGL AF FER zc n nooc zB nzzo uu O81 5 24 1999 Bupeh CEL AF PEU S00 DOO 170088 0 i ie39 PGE iGS Furch CLE E AF PEG 414 DEDICO ISLE T LO 1269 LOCOS La Furch THIEL LF BEL 3 Daoc 41913 10 11 1739 117 01 1779F Furch CEL AF FEG 20 DE B8BHT1 UU bie des Vie ioe h ELLE AF PEU F DER i 7177 50 1 3 Lif Lay lai Purch CLEOGL AF PEG in nooc 3 O 12 1999 MIBER EtL AF
144. age 1 25 1 10 Inventory User s Manual Text Menu The Text menu can be used on all OSAS compatible systems Using text based menus the Text menu shown below offers easy access to your applications Text Main Menu 1545 TEDI La dE xd Sun Et Git Deb SASPLE DaT PATH Odion Lopa Cumpany H Paildeara Suppig 10 12 AN r Bain Rene m n Beso aree Hasager Furkrta imn Configuration Cabor a Fa yboxkrd HHDD GFEH ZSTZTEES F Arrcunzing Software When you select an application the application s menu which presents several related functions is superimposed over the Main menu Selecting a function leads you to a function screen or to another menu You can select applications from the Main menu in these ways e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor up or down highlighting the application you want to use Then press PgDn or Enter to select it Inventory User s Manual 1 11 Text Menu Introduction e Pressthe first letter of the application you want to use The cursor jumps to the first application beginning with the letter press the letter key or the down arrow until the application you want is highlighted When your choice is highlighted press PgDn or Enter to select it Position the mouse cursor over the application and click The application will briefly highlight and switch to the application screen Tojump to the first application on the menu press
145. age 9 26 Screen Use Screen Description Rebuild Item Quantities Use the Rebuild Item Quantities screen to verify that you have backed up your data files and that no one is using the system Inventory User s Manual 9 23 Rebuild Item Quantities Periodic Process Rebuild Item Quantities Screen C USA ID Faig Ls Pmi bjp r Fabuild Ite Cumntitiums Hera you backed Dp four faca Fires Hade Sure Hn ore Elme is limirg rhe Dace YES Frinr Adjusrmenr Log caly HE Cutput dewice IfFirintzz pel eviews White Irina Field Definitions Field Name Description Have You Enter Y or N to indicate whether or not you have backed up your data files and made sure that no one else is using the system If you enter N the Periodic Processing menu appears Print adjustment log If you want to print the adjustment log without updating only quantities enter Y if not enter N 9 24 Inventory User s Manual Periodic Process Rebuild Item Quantities Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the log to a printer File Select F to send the log to a file End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Periodic Processing menu Saving and Exiting After the log is produced the Periodic Processing menu appears Inventory User s Manual 9 25 Periodic Process Rebuild Item Quantities Rebuild Item Quantities Log z ebeq 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 S 000
146. age Unit FEG Locetices Cn Hari Corel Ted In Dae kynllasie bon Order 7 OD CDU 2 00040 in ocuUn gogg 0000 0000 13 000 3 0000 3 0000 LB OD COO 1 17 000 6 0000 6 DOO apa a 5 000 in ocn Dn Dn You Sent to l mizcmin Leal InEezmeati n TES Price Dntormari TES Coot Informer ion TES Yenmiur Infccpatica TES Bin Informacion TEB Let Humbera HO Zrrim Munbgurz Ho Enter edit Appermd Item Units For information about this screen see the Item Locations function Inventory User s Manual 11 13 Items File Maintenance Append Location Window F ISAS TONA Gaig Ld Port bjp Etem Irem 1D Dsm riprinn 100 Elgszrrical Package Lucmriczm Loc On Hani c mnirred in tae On Order CADOC S Append Lccarion ooo ADDA 3 0000 Hao Loe 1 Eon 4 0000 Teele Copy From oon bo Yes Mant 60 Oop Dn You Mant Price Information TEX Lec Cusbemper Level Pricing TEN Pril Gon Suememrr nf ormarinn YES Com Verdor InfZcrmmtion YES Wen Bin Izformatiun TE Bin Let riial Munbers Field Definitions Field Name Loc ID Copy From Description Do You Want to Copy 11 14 Description Accept the displayed location ID or enter a different location ID The item ID you entered at the Copy From prompt is displayed The description of the item whose information you want to copy is displayed Enter Y or N for each option to indicate whether or not you
147. age cca 10 Oooo DEBIR Jabber Cal ieee Cale price i 10 Ooo RETAIL Fercalil Cumrmeer Pricing Calo price 3 UC UNEL WEclmmmlim Customer fase oot 4 EH Ooo Lire Ho j g000i of Oik Entec mdit Append Dglu m peice ID Feice IF Field Definitions Field Name Description Price ID Enter or change the price ID you want to work with Copy From This field appears if you entered a new price ID Enter the price ID you want to copy Description Enter or change the description of the price ID Cust Lvl Enter or change the customer level Description The description of the customer level is displayed 11 56 Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Price Structures Field Name Adjustment Base 96 Adj Amount Inventory User s Manual Description Enter the adjustment base for the promotional pricing No base fixed dollar amount Standard cost cost of the item determined by the cost of the components Base cost fixed cost Average price weighted average of selling prices Price selling base price List price published price Minimum price lowest selling price Calculated price price at the time the price break is calculated Enter to use a percentage adjustment enter to use a dollar adjustment Enter the amount of the adjustment For negative quantities use the minus symbol enter positive quantities without a plus sign 11 57 Price Structures File Maintenance Command Bar Definition
148. alysis Reports Slow Fast Movement Report Field Name Print extra description Print detail Suppress zero qty items Description If you want the report to include additional descriptions enter Y if not enter N You can enter Y only if you elected to use additional descriptions in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function If you want to list the totals for the items and the grand total enter Y If you want to list only the grand total enter N To exclude items with a quantity of zero in the PTD and YTD Quantity columns in the report enter Y to include them enter N Command Bar Definitions Command Printer File Screen End Saving and Exiting Description Select P to send the report to a printer Select F to send the report to a file Select S to send the report to the screen Select E to change your selections or exit to the Analysis Reports menu After the report is produced the Analysis Reports menu appears Inventory User s Manual 8 13 Analysis Reports Slow Fast Movement Report Slow Fast Movement Report T 00S 9 001 0000 0081 8 1 0000 00885 6871VT 0000 00 0 EZZ 00 0 cc 00 0 EZZ O0E0 EZZ 0010 6899F 0000 00vv 1S8SL 0000 00St vG9T 0000 008L S027 0000 0060 610vGSV 0000 00 9 LIE 00 9 LOE 00vv 6LE 00vv 6LE 00 9 LIE 00 9 LOE 00 9 LIE 00 9 LOE 0000 0000 S
149. an adjustment base the adjustment type or 96 and the amount for the price adjustment 2 32 Inventory User s Manual Creating a Backup Schedule Back up your Inventory data files whenever they change and before you run these functions Inventory Transactions e Location Transfers Post Transactions Post GL Adjustments e Year End Maintenance e Purge Selected Files Update Perpetual Inventory Back up your programs once a month as insurance against diskette damage or deterioration Use the Backup function on the Resource Manager Data File Maintenance menu to back up files You must back up all the files in the data path for a particular list of companies at once to ensure that you have up to date copies of the system files Do not try to use operating system commands to back up only a few files that have been changed if you do your system may not work after you restore them The Backup function backs up all the data files for a specified company in a data path at one time Inventory User s Manual 2 33 Daily Tasks Periodic Tasks Inventory User s Manual Work Flow 3 3 3 15 3 1 Daily Tasks Doing the following daily tasks keeps your inventory up to date Add items Enter transactions Enter location transfers Back up the Inventory data files see chapter 2 Produce the Transactions Journal Produce the Transfers Journal Post transactions Produce the GL Adjustments Journal
150. an assign the starting tag number Attach each tag to the appropriate bin so that the person who counts the contents of the bin can record the count If you did not select the option to print tag numbers but decide you need to you can change your selection on the Print Physical Inventory Tags screen The selection toggle to print tags on the Physical Inventory Selection screen is changed to YES Inventory User s Manual 3 19 Periodic Tasks Work Flow 3 20 Printing Physical Inventory Worksheets If you use worksheets to record the physical count of your inventory use the Print Physical Inventory Worksheets function to print them They provide lines for each item location bin serial number and lot number Entering Physical Counts If you use tags for physical counts enter the physical count quantities in the Physical Counts Tags Entry function If you use worksheets for physical counts enter the physical count quantities in the Physical Counts Worksheet Entry function Producing the Batch List Use the Batch List to verify the batches that are used and their statuses The list shows what has or has not been completed in the physical count process For example it might show that the tags and worksheets have been printed but that the counts have not been entered It can also show the items locations bin numbers product lines user defined fields in the batch and the selection toggles Producing the Physical Count
151. and it creates new records for the INHSxxx Summary History file if you keep summary history Before using the Year End Maintenance function complete these tasks Setthe INPDxxx table to the company you are doing the year end maintenance for Postthe Inventory transactions for the year in which you are performing the maintenance You do not need to post Inventory transactions that are for the next year e Ifyou have a multiuser system make sure that no one else is using the INHSxxx INQLxxx INQTxxx INTB and INVExxx files Inventory User s Manual 3 23 Periodic Tasks Work Flow 3 24 Purging Selected Files To delete records that contain information you no longer need use the Purge Selected Files function This periodic procedure prevents files from growing so large that they slow down the processing speed of your system Before you delete files complete the following tasks e Print the relevant reports for each file listed below e Backup your data files Make sure that no one else is using the Inventory files listed below If you elected not to keep serial lot detail and summary history you cannot delete information from the INSHxxx INLHxxx INHIxxx and INHSxxx files INSNxxx Delete the serial numbers you no longer need from the INSNxxx Serial Numbers file If you keep serial history print the Serialized History Report before purging this file INLTxxx Delete the lot numbers you no longer
152. ata Setup When you use forecast types you must have sales history for the item Sales history is used to accurately determine the reorder quantity and usage for your inventory items When you assign a forecast type you decide on the weight factor for the periods you want to base your forecast on How you determine the weight factor depends on the item you are working with and your reorder process You might base your forecast 100 percent on last month s sales or on sales from one year ago You can also split the weight factor for example you might base the forecast evenly on the last four months You can assign an adjustment percentage to determine sales increases or decreases For example if you are expecting sales to grow for the items in the forecast type you may want to increase the percentage accordingly Once a forecast type is set up it is assigned to an item in the Item Locations function Then in the Reorder Report function you can calculate reorder quantities using the forecast type method Select Forecast Types from the Code Maintenance menu Then enter each forecast type code or copy an existing code Enter a description of each code a weight factor from 0 or leave the field blank to 100 percent and an adjustment percent for expected increases or decreases in demand The total weight factor for the periods must equal 100 percent Standard Cost Makeup Codes An item s standard cost is the amount an item sho
153. ate the last customer placed the order is displayed The last invoice number for the item is displayed The last invoice date is displayed 11 49 Item Locations File Maintenance Field Name Description Price Enter or change the unit selling price of the item Command Bar Definitions This window has no command bar Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the Serial Numbers screen use the Proceed PgDn command To exit to the Serial Numbers screen without saving your entries use the Exit F7 command 11 50 Inventory User s Manual Locations Features Use the Locations function on the File Maintenance menu to set up and maintain the locations where you stock inventory Reports To produce a list of the information entered in the Locations function use the Item Locations List function on the Master File Lists menu Screen Use Screen Description Locations Use the Locations screen to set up and maintain such information about a location as the address contact person and phone and fax numbers You can also assign a carrying cost percentage and an ordering cost amount Inventory User s Manual 11 51 Locations File Maintenance Locations Screen STETERIT gua La Du bj Lucmticzs Lnrmrian Th WBucent Hara AINMEAPOLIS WAREHOUSE A ress 1 453 LAKE DREUE Ad resm Address 2 City imate Bine POLI n gip ceunrry GAGS Un Contact Bhnre Humber Fux Haber CBrrrimg
154. ation transfers for lotted and serialized items Use the Append Edit Lotted Serial Number window to add or edit serialized and lotted items 5 37 Location Transfers Daily Work Location Transfers Screen sas ni Loretion Transzfgrz Typa Tram Lec Th Quantity Unita Trans Pate From TUO PF22001 1 000 ZET 077 Ds 1998 To mu RHO Transfer 000001 of DOO Entec Edit Jippend Field Definitions Field Name Description Type The location that the item was transferred from is displayed in the transfer Type From field The location that the item was transferred to is displayed in the transfer Type To field Item The ID of the item being transferred is displayed Loc ID The IDs of the locations you are transferring the item from and to are displayed Quantity The quantity that was transferred is displayed Units The unit of measure for the item that was transferred is displayed 5 38 Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Location Transfers Field Name Description Trans Date The date of the transfer is displayed Command Bar Definitions Command Description Enter edit Move the prompt gt to the transfer you want to edit and press Enter The Edit Transfer window appears Append Press A to add a location transfer The Append Transfer window appears Saving and Exiting This screen is display only information is saved through the windows To exit to the Daily Work menu use
155. ation date of the lot is displayed The vendor of the lot is displayed The status of the lot is displayed available sold or expired Command Bar Definitions Command Enter edit Append Next screen Previous screen Saving and Exiting Description Move the prompt gt to the line you want edit and press Enter Press A to add a lot to the item Press N to go to the next screen you selected or to return to the Item Locations screen if the Lot Information screen is the last screen you selected Press P to go to the previous screen or to return to the Item Locations screen if the Lot Information screen is the first screen you selected To save the information and go to the next or previous screen press N or P respectively To exit to the File Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 11 37 Item Locations File Maintenance Item Locations Serial Numbers Screen F ISAS TAII Faing Ld Ei tjip Tee Lurmticzz Seriml Infurzatzun Irem HD nos Loca Lon SH Demzrigrinn Jaeriss Husker Unitas Es Berial Humber nit Pelee Unit Cost Brarus if igo nn 2 2500 dvailasia zi 1000 0000 2 2500 kvmilmclm LEE SEL nooo 2 c500 gold zii D000 2 2500 3ald zl1AZ1B 0000 2 2500 Zald LAL OS unun 2 2500 Bald FPE PTI O00 2 2600 Jola ZLAZI 0000 z z2500 Sold 214223 Oooo Z z2500 Bald Fik 23 ott 2 2600 fold z1A224 0000 2 2500 Jola z1N 23 0000 2 2300 Fold tiA
156. ations File Maintenance Edit Price Information Window sas TANA bing LA Pn blip Tee Loceticee Fr cg Infccmmtica Irem 1B Loo LE Lon AAD Description Elezrrical Package Unitas PEG Uni Edit Frirm Infnrzxmt cn km unica Ler mo Elnimum PE lee FEG E Unit of Measures PRG ITF Oe Cust Eu Tce Lp Ai ei k Bui i h nb RB om erage Price fase Frips List Frics Hinimum Price TTM T 235 Bo 375 00 GO cf gm Qumr ity Pramkm jant E s E B OOU Ocun s foo d 5 From Ppa Felice 05 SE mb Rd is ieee EU Cah a DC D Line Ho jo00001 of ODD Field Definitions Field Name Unit of Measure Average Price Base Price List Price Minimum Price Quantity 1 5 11 42 Description The unit of measure for the item is displayed Enter or change the average selling price of the item Enter or change the selling price of each unit Enter or change the manufacturer s suggested retail price of the item Enter or change the minimum price the item will be sold at Enter or change one to five quantities that a customer must purchase to get the discount price Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Item Locations Field Name Description 96 Enter to use a percentage adjustment enter to use a dollar adjustment Price Adj Enter the amount of the quantity adjustment Command Bar Definitions This window has not command bar Saving and Exiti
157. ations D 4 Call a BBx Program D 6 carrying cost 2 18 changing costs 3 22 prices 3 22 check for alias on reports option 2 12 Code Maintenance menu functions 1 6 codes setting up 2 5 COGS adjustments 5 67 circumstances 3 13 posting 3 13 T accounts 3 14 Command help 1 13 1 29 closing window 1 13 1 29 commands in field editing 1 31 report 1 34 scroll region 1 35 company parameter 1 9 conventions report 1 37 user s manual 1 7 conversion factors 2 22 converting deleting source files A 3 effect on modifications A 1 erasing existing files A 4 error log A 4 from previous versions A 1 pausing for problems A 4 prerequisites A 1 to version 5 21 A 3 cost changing 3 22 history 2 29 in transactions 3 9 variance 3 13 Cost Changes function 9 7 log 9 10 IX 2 Cost Makeup Codes List function 14 23 sample 14 26 Cost Variance Report function 7 19 sample 7 22 costing method option 2 11 costing methods average cost 2 9 choosing 2 9 FIFO 2 9 LIFO 2 9 standard cost 2 9 Costs and Vendors function 4 49 costs in sale transactions option 2 11 Ctrl F function key 1 30 Ctrl G function key 1 14 1 30 Ctrl V function key 1 30 cursor moving up or back one field 1 30 selecting item 1 33 customer IDs alternate 2 23 Customer Levels definition 2 14 function 12 5 setting up 2 14 Customer Levels List function 14 7 sample 14 10 customer support 1 3 custome
158. ations screen if the Bin Information screen is the last screen you selected Press P to go to the previous screen or to return to the Item Locations screen if the Bin Information screen is the first screen you selected To save the information and go to the next or previous screen press N or P respectively To exit to the File Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 11 35 Item Locations File Maintenance Item Locations Lot Information Screen F SAS MiA Gu E Dew bjp r ten Lurmticza Let Information Irem 1B ns Lesa Lon SW Do Description Jeriss Kuk Unitas E4 Lor number APal Labbe Avg Val t Ekpires T n or Srarus giso195 I 1 TOAD dAvailasia Laie oo TIRDO Sold 121435 TEMDOI1 fold Lire Ho M001 of ODE Entec edit ipperid Heet zcregn Frregwicum mcrumgn Field Definitions Field Name Description Item ID The ID of the item you are working with is displayed Location The location you selected on the Item Locations screen is displayed Description The description of the item is displayed Units The unit of measure you are working with is displayed Lot Number The lot numbers of the item are displayed Available The quantity available is displayed Avg Unit Cost The average unit cost of the lot is displayed 11 36 Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Item Locations Field Name Expires Vendor Status Description The expir
159. ays the About OSAS dialog box Inventory User s Manual Introduction Graphical Style Menus Toolbar Icons E364 7 os ip 5 Sl There are three icons on the toolbar that were not described above Icon Key Result Displays the Application Information dialog box Opens an MS DOS prompt Displays a screen for calling any BBx program ge that does not require variables to be passed to it See the Resource Manager User s Manual Other Graphical Screen Features The graphical screens offer more than shortcuts to application functions In version 6 0 you can at a glance or with a mouse click determine the date and time switch between live and sample data and switch between companies and their data sets Date and Time Taste and T ane hes E30 PM The workstation date and time are displayed Inventory User s Manual 1 23 Graphical Style Menus Introduction Data Set Dora Ser O Lema T Eagle Dads Check the Live Data radio button to work with live data Check the Sample Data radio button to work with sample data Change Company Field Select the company to change to 1 24 Inventory User s Manual Favorites Menu Your Favorites menu saves time in moving between applications opening and closing submenus and application menus and allows easy access to your common applications By setting up your Favorites menu you can access your most used functions or submenus by pressing the F2 button or
160. bar Saving and Exiting After you make your selection the Physical Counts Worksheet Entry screen appears 10 32 Inventory User s Manual Batch List Features The Batch List shows the status of each batch in the physical inventory process and the selection criteria entered in the Physical Inventory Selection function Reports A sample Batch List is on page 10 36 Screen Use Screen Description Batch List Use the Batch List screen to enter the batch IDs whose information you want to view Inventory User s Manual 10 33 Batch List Physical Inventory Batch List Screen sas TOM Zug Cat Port bep r fetch Liat Entar Bwtczmm to Frint BkT3 Print Jelection Critarim YES Print 3elezrion Togglem TES Output rict fPPrizzmr p F evirt ilg Shzeruwun E zd Field Definitions Field Name Description Enter batches to print Enter the IDs of the batches you want in the list Print selection criteria If you want the location IDs item IDs bin numbers product lines and user defined fields for the batch in the list enter Y if not enter N Print selection toggles If you want the selection toggles for using tag numbers displaying frozen quantities and defaulting counted quantities in the list enter Y if not enter N 10 34 Inventory User s Manual Physical Inventory Batch List Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the list to a printer File Select F to send
161. begun press Ctrl Break Ifyou want to save the report as a data file for example to include it in a word processed report in CR LF format select F The data path for the workstation including the default drive appears if it is specified in the Defaults function Enter the filename and file extension using no more than 35 characters overall To preview the report you must be using the Visual PRO 5 Interpreter and have a sysprint printer in your CONFIG BBX file select R If applicable select S if you want the report to be in standard size print or C if you want it to be in compressed print In the Printer dialog box that appears select a sysprint printer and press Enter The report is displayed on the screen 1 38 Inventory User s Manual Introduction Reports e To view the report on the screen select S If the workstation default for compressed characters is inactive the report is displayed in standard character mode If the default is active you can select standard mode or compressed mode See your terminal documentation and the section on the termcap file in the User s Reference Guide PRO 5 If the message End of Page appears at the bottom of the report screen you can press Enter to generate the next page of the report If the message End of Report appears at the bottom of the report screen you can press Enter to exit to the menu you selected the report from e Ifyou need to change some selections befo
162. by the Calculator The default number of decimal places is read from the current OSAS program Valid values are 0 1 2 3 4 5 FLOAT Floating Point and AUTO Automatic Numbers are saved and calculated with 1 to 14 decimal places but only the default number of decimal places is shown When you select FLOAT the decimal floats from 0 to 5 places to correctly display a number unless 5 places are not available after you enter the whole number When you select AUTO a decimal is placed before the last two numbers of each entry unless you include a decimal as part of the entry Exit from the Calculator and copy the total into the field the cursor is in on the screen where you accessed the calculator The status of the printer on off and of the automatic placement of the decimal point 0 5 or FL for floating is displayed D 3 Other Commands References Making a Calculation Follow the same procedure for each of the Calculator s four math functions x and For example to add 32 and 99 follow these steps Enter the first number 32 to load the new subtotal into the Calculator The number appears in the Entry field as you type and is transferred to the tape when you press Enter 2 Press one of these keys to enter the operator add subtract multiply divide For example if you press the number you entered 32 followed by the plus sign moves to the bottom of the Tape field The Calculato
163. catica Hace 1 Cutmgut cavrice fPbrizzgr p E Evirw dt ilg S czrzgmn E zd Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Enter the range of locations you want in the list Print By Select the option by which you want to organize the list 13 16 Inventory User s Manual Master File Location Detail List Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the list to a printer File Select F to send the list to a file Screen Select S to send the list to the screen End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Master File Lists menu Saving and Exiting After the list is produced the Master File Lists menu appears Inventory User s Manual 13 17 Master File Location Detail List Location Detail List sn XL 660LL SVIIVG LO AVMNSW ISAM ZOEET 661SS STTOdVANNIN IS GYOONOD TLLET SGEGG STTOdVANNIN SATHQO WNVI ESP qrodsy jo puq ASNOHAAVM SYTA SNIW LOVAONVA SI TOGVSNNIW SSQOHWSHVM SI TOGVSHNNINW TOOOXL ZOOONN quy 390 39p30 39d ysog a3e2 1 ebed iequnxN Xe4 iequnN euoud Azqunog dtz ayeqs ATO aI uorqeooT Ag ASTI TTeqeq UOT LOOT Ajtddns szepttng Sse3ppy qoequog ouev qI uOTILIOT Wd S0 c 666T L0 80 Inventory User s Manual 13 18 Price Structure List Features Use the Price Structure List function on the Master File Lists menu to produce a list of the price structures that were set up price IDs
164. ccount Codes function on the Code Maintenance menu to assign general ledger codes to the following accounts sales cost of goods sold inventory Work in process e inventory adjustment e COGS adjustment purchase price variance physical count adjustment transfer cost Account codes are used when you post sales purchases transfers adjustments and physical counts to General Ledger Reports To produce a list of the information entered in the Account Codes function use the Account Codes List function on the Master Code Lists menu Screen Use Screen Description Account Codes Use the Account Codes screen to set up your account codes under one pairing ID You can then link account codes with particular items in the Items function Inventory User s Manual 12 9 Account Codes Code Maintenance Account Codes Screen ibccuunt Codes Anccumr cdm t DEES Lprtlon mELAll Halts 40 lIDOO BETKIL FALE r GI Gems Bold 50 LDOC COST OF OPEM BOLE hETRSL Invexcu ry amp dd LHWWEHZORY FIHTSHID Goga Bork in Frccamm Loa LHWVEHTOBT WOBE INH PPOCIZA Inwenrc ry Adiumrmear igit LIMWENTORY FIHISHED eta COSS idjurtmant zin ance LHWENZORY WARIAMCE Purctaske Price Vari nce 10400 COVERT ONY VRRIAEMCE Phys Coumt Adjusrmsnr B SD DIWVENHTORBY Tal LCE Trametes cct 0 SOR FREDSST IM r Veriftoetice Frgmm lt Pgln gt n prccgmd Field Definitions 12 10 Field Name Description Account Code Enter the
165. change Description Enter a description of the customer level Command Bar Definitions This screen has no command bar Saving and Exiting To save your entries use the Proceed PgDn command To exit to the Code Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command 12 6 Inventory User s Manual Product Lines Features Use the Product Lines function on the Code Maintenance menu to categorize your inventory items into groups Product lines are used to organize items in reports and to make group price changes Reports To produce a list of the information entered in the Product Lines function use the Product Lines List function on the Master Code Lists menu Screen Use Screen Description Product Lines Use the Product Lines screen to set up your product line codes Inventory User s Manual 12 7 Product Lines Code Maintenance Product Lines Screen AISAS TiN m Product Lines Produce Lima APPLIANCE DEE Lp 12 Appl aie m Umsrifinrmticm Pome lt Pgin gt n proceed Field Definitions Field Name Description Product Line Enter the product line whose information you want to add or change Description Enter a description of the product line Command Bar Definitions This screen has no command bar Saving and Exiting To save your entries use the Proceed PgDn command To exit to the Code Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command 12 8 Inventory User s Manual Account Codes Features Use the A
166. ck Irem 13 From 100 Prime py Thru 200 1 Item ID Lopbarica ID From EHUDO i Promit Line Thru Teo 3 Applicaricn Frnduc Lira From APPLIANCE 4 Dapaer mant Thru BATTER IEE 1 hpplicarinn From BOOTLE IRG Thru HJR AFTL Bepartment From BUILDING Thru EHTERTCa Fr mr rder Ernf it Perant From 3 GFH Thru 2 BRrwerse CPA Perio Tes From i i i Thru Lis Lied Print By Lucukiom MQ Qhutguk rice fFbrizzmgr p iF evirt dU iin fSpcrmmn E zd Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Enter the range of items locations product lines user defined fields percentages of profit and periods and years you want in the report Print By Select the option by which you want to organize the report Print Order Select the order that you want the information to be in GPM or reverse GPM Print by location If you want to separate the information by location enter Y if not enter N 8 20 Inventory User s Manual Analysis Reports Gross Profit Analysis Report Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the report to a printer File Select F to send the report to a file Screen Select S to send the report to the screen End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Analysis Reports menu Saving and Exiting After the report is produced the Analysis Reports menu appears Inventory User s Manual 8 21 Analysis Reports 0096 66001v 00v T 0t77c8 0001 0 cE7T
167. committed when you place orders in Sales Order When Bill of Materials Kitting is interfaced with Inventory you can track the assembly of raw materials in an assembly and group several items otherwise sold separately as one When the assembly is completed Bill of Materials Kitting updates the INLDxxx file Options To set up each company s options and interfaces us the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function see the Resource Manager User s Manual IN is the application ID Your answers to the following questions determine how the system works and how information flows through it 1 Toggle to YES or NO to indicate whether or not you want to interface General Ledger Accounts Payable Purchase Order and Accounts Receivable Sales Order 2 10 Inventory User s Manual Setup Setup Considerations The interface options work independently of each other You can respond to them with any combination of Y s and N s Toggle to FIFO LIFO Average or Standard to indicate the costing valuation method you want to use Toggle to YES or NO to indicate whether or not you want to allow quantities to be edited online Toggle to Average Last Base or Standard to indicate the cost you want to use for zero quantity items Toggle to YES or NO to indicate whether or not you want to enter 1 to 10 lines of additional text for items Toggle to YES or NO to indicate whether or not you want to be able to enter price information
168. cry Unies Huntar CH z Did Enter FEacemrinmns ai Walnut Counzed Qr TER Ires M0001 of Di Description Enter or change the tag number for the batch The location ID for the physical count is displayed The item ID for the batch is displayed The bin number for the item is displayed Enter or change the counted quantity of the item Enter or change the unit of measure for the item The serial number of the item is displayed The lot number for the item is displayed Inventory User s Manual Physical Inventory Physical Counts Tag Entry Command Bar Definitions This window has no command bar Saving and Exiting To exit to the Physical Counts Tag Entry screen use the Proceed PgDn command Inventory User s Manual 10 25 Physical Counts Worksheet Entry Features Use the Physical Counts Worksheet Entry function on the Physical Inventory menu to enter physical counts using worksheets Before you use this function you should use the Print Physical Inventory Worksheets function Reports To produce a list of the information entered in the Physical Counts Worksheet Entry function use the Physical Count List function on the Physical Inventory menu Screen Use Screen Description Physical Counts Use the Physical Counts Worksheet Entry screen to enter Worksheet Entry the physical count for each worksheet Append Edit Physical Use the Append Edit Physical Count window to add or Count window change inf
169. cted in the Options and Interfaces function in Resource Manager If Inventory is interfaced with General Ledger debit and credit entries are created in the GLJRxxx file If you post detail line item information entries are made for each line item If you post summary totals information one entry is made for each account If Inventory is not interfaced with General Ledger use the Update Perpetual Inventory Log to manually adjust the accounts affect by this function Inventory User s Manual 3 21 Periodic Tasks Work Flow 3 22 When you update perpetual inventory entries are made to the inventory and physical count adjustment accounts Variance increase in inventory IN Adj Phys Ct Adj DB CR Variance decrease in inventory IN Adj Phys Ct Adj CR DB Changing Prices To change the prices for large groups of items product lines locations or price IDs use the Item Price Change function Before you can use this function units of measure pricing must be set up for the items When you change the prices of items each item s unit price is adjusted by the percentage or dollar amount you specify When you change the prices of a price ID the price breaks in the price record are adjusted by the percentage or dollar amount you specify Changing Costs To change the base or standard cost for large groups of items product lines and user defined fields use the Cost Changes function If you use the
170. d warehouses vendors retail stores receiving docks repair locations or cities Location IDs should convey information about the location For example you might use VN0001 as the location ID for a vendor and WH0001 as the location ID for a warehouse Before you add items you must set up at least one inventory location Select Locations from the File Maintenance menu Then enter each location ID the name of the location the address the city the state the zip code of the location the contact person at the company and the phone and fax numbers for the location If you plan to calculate reorders based on the EOQ enter a default carrying cost percentage and an ordering cost amount The carrying cost is the percentage it costs you to store the item at the location The ordering cost is the amount it costs to place an order from the location 2 18 Inventory User s Manual Setup Entering Your Data Price Structures You can define pricing in the Inventory system in several ways and depending on the products your company sells you might choose any of the following combinations of pricing Price Structures Price calculations can take the form of a discount based on a percentage or a dollar amount from several pricing fields or a markup from several cost fields By combining a customer level and the price ID you can develop many unique pricing structures Item Locations Price Information screen Since you can sell an
171. d The in use quantity is displayed The available quantity is displayed The on order quantity is displayed This field appears if you elected in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function to show costs in the price and availability lookup The LIFO FIFO unit cost is displayed This field appears if you elected in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function to show costs in the price and availability lookup The average unit cost is displayed This field appears if you elected in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function to show costs in the price and availability lookup The standard unit cost is displayed This field appears if you elected in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function to show costs in the price and availability lookup The base unit cost is displayed The calculated unit price is displayed The calculated extended unit price is displayed The base level is displayed The sale quantity levels are displayed Inventory User s Manual References Other Commands Field Name Description Unit Price The calculated unit price for each quantity break is displayed Command Bar This window has no command bar Saving and Exiting To return to the Price and Availability screen use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual D 19 Price Calculator Price Calculator Window EET UNICI Price K Location Ib AMG Trem EID Loo Bale T
172. d Ajddng szeprrna 666T L0 80 Inventory User s Manual 10 52 File Maintenance Items Item Locations Locations Price Structures Promotional Pricing Tables Inventory User s Manual 11 3 11 17 11 51 11 55 11 59 11 63 11 1 Items Features Use the Items function on the File Maintenance menu to enter and maintain your inventory items at the item level Reports To produce a list of the information entered on the Items screen use the Item Detail List function on the Master File Lists menu Screen Use Screen Items Items General Information Items Units of Measure Items Alternate Items Items Locations Inventory User s Manual Description Use the Items screen to enter an item ID and a description and to select the information you want to enter or change General Information Units of Measure Alternate Items and Item Locations Use the General Information screen to enter or change general information about the item default values and user defined fields Use the Units of Measure screen to set up or maintain an unlimited number of alternate units of measure for an item Use the Alternate Items screen to set up and maintain alternate customer superseded bar code and vendor part numbers for an item Use the Locations screen to enter the item whose location information you want to add or change You can get to the Locations screen from the Items function or fr
173. d Trn u r Line BATIBIAL Kittax Itam HI Item Frzcm II BUILD TERE LOLS HI Tas Claas 0J ind iikuar FEDA kupo Fenrder TER izes Wenghr gonn Bese DOW PEG User Perines Fie las Sorted Fie le Dl Application BUZEDING Oz Dmaparrrarnt ELECTRIC D hr Fic las r Salar Hert Feevy Last Tirst diem KIctmrnatumn Units locet ion Field Definitions Field Name Description Item ID Enter the ID of the item whose information you want to view Command Bar Definitions Command Description Next Press N to view the next item record on file Prev Press P to view the previous item record on file Last Press L to view the last item record on file First Press F to view the first item record on file 4 30 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Items Command Description Item Press I to go to the Item ID field and enter a different item ID Alternates Press A to view alternate items for the item you are working with The Alternate Items screen appears Units Press U to view additional units of measure for the item The Units of Measure screen appears Locations Press O to view the locations assigned to the item The Item Locations screen appears Saving and Exiting To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 4 31 Items Information Inquiry Items Alternate Items Screen 0545 Tim liom Irem 1B Loo Dem rigrinn Clecerical Package Altmrnmta Itam Klt rnsrt
174. d change any of the header information Units Press U to go to the Units field and enter a different unit of measure for the item Saving and Exiting To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 4 23 Sales Trending Features Use the Sales Trending function on the Information Inquiry menu to view the quantity sold and returned for an item and its value Reports No report is associated with this function Screen Use Screen Description Sales Trending Use the Sales Trending screen to enter the ID of the item whose sales trend information you want to view Inventory User s Manual 4 25 Sales Trending Information Inquiry Sales Trending Screen A To Seating Lx Pot khi i Talms Treading Irem 1B 100 EIleprrical Parage Lnrmrian Mauny Pericd 7 Tear ised Unita PEG Lest Gale i2 10 1998 Peer YI male dquxsrtlty Bale Dollars PLEER dquxarlry herurz Dol lags OFF ire ioc Ono J3 amp nv2 75 Unoo Os 1229 100 0000 368mz T3 0000 00 05 1553939 116 000 35455 03 HDO oo 4 i 30 CCT L33822 s U neo n 127 200 0000 72143 10 0000 00 uz Loe 10 0000 10871 9093 AOR uu iis 25 00r Gis 74 rr fa Lif lg 100 0000 34072 73 0000 00 11 1998 20 0000 7 14 55 0005 Un 10 15 mg 000 JEi45 B5 tno g ug Lite Bo mna zBnnes zl1 0003 00 um Lae TS 0000 27D054 24 0002 00 LE Pa ioo On 3835B85 72 nno ga n2 1223 as DDo 24416
175. d field that is already being used in one of the sorts Enter a different field number Serial number must be available in order to be transferred A serialized item must have the available status before it can be transferred Enter a serial number with available status Serial number must have a Lost or Sold status before it can be deleted Change the status of the item in the Items function or select a different item to delete The bin ID does not match the from thru criteria for this batch When you append an item location during physical counts you must enter a bin ID that meets the from thru criteria or work with a different batch The cost bucket entered already exists for this item Change the date or the cost to make the bucket unique The product line does not match the from thru criteria for this batch When you append an item location during physical counts you must enter a product line that meets the from thru criteria or work with a different batch The superseded item selected is a recursive supersede You cannot set up a superseded item that will supersede back to itself Enter a different item ID Inventory User s Manual B 3 System Messages References There are items without tag numbers Do you wish to reprint tags If you answer YES the system will reprint tags for that batch If you answer NO you can select a different batch There are no items in this batch When you set up the batch cr
176. dic Processing menu to verify that the quantity detail and the quantity totals for an item are the same If you have a multiuser system make sure that no one else is using the INQLxxx Quantity Locations INQTxxx Quantity Totals and INSNxxx Serial Numbers files Other users cannot access these files while you use this function Reports A sample Quantity Cross Verification Log is on page 9 14 Screen Use Screen Description Quantity Cross Use the Quantity Cross Verification screen to produce a log Verification of discrepancies between the INQLxxx INQTxxx and INSNxxx files Inventory User s Manual 9 11 Quantity Cross Verification Periodic Process Quantity Cross Verification Screen TUNI gu La Du bjp Quantity Cross Wecilication Herm you backed Up four Sara Fires Hade Sure Hn ore Ele te Using rhe Dace YES Cutput devica IFirintez piR avimsw Iih iie Irina Field Definitions Field Name Description Have You Enter Y or N to indicate whether or not you have backed up your data files and made sure that no one else is using the system If you enter N the Periodic Processing menu appears 9 12 Inventory User s Manual Periodic Process Quantity Cross Verification Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the log to a printer File Select F to send the log to a file End Select E to exit to the Periodic Processing menu without produc
177. displayed 5 28 Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Inventory Transactions Field Name Description Fulfill Qty The quantity needed to fill the transaction is displayed Backord Qty The quantity on backorder is displayed Cost Enter or change the cost of the item Comment Enter additional information about the serialized lotted item Command Bar Definitions This window has no command bar Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the Lot Serial Number Entry window use the Proceed PgDn command To exit to the Lot Serial Number Entry window without saving your entries use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 29 Inventory Transactions Daily Work Lot Serial Number Entry Window F MSAN TA Inventory Tresaact icas M Lor Segial ber a Tram ID i0000 Bimhumashar Braun L Lec ID THuuni EHINMERFOLIZ WABEHOUTI Unitz EA Lot Hop 120135 Lat my uunn Tct cy La Saciel Merhar Tnit Coat Unit Frica Mirbet 000001 of DOOCUU Ferial Me mig ry DOO Cos ooo Fulfill gry Bmckurd Oty ccs DLE Field Definitions Field Name Description Item ID The ID of the item you are working with is displayed Loc ID The ID of the location you are working with is displayed Units The unit of measure you are working with is displayed Lot No Enter the lot number of the serialized item Lot Qty The quantity in the lot for the transaction is displayed Tot Qty The total quantity of the lot is displayed
178. displayed This information is printed on the orders produced in Purchase Order if you use additional descriptions in Purchase Order Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Item Locations Field Name Lead Quantity Unit Cost Date Description The number of days it usually takes the vendor to ship the item to you is displayed The quantity last ordered from the vendor is displayed The unit last ordered from the vendor is displayed The last order cost from the vendor is displayed The date the last purchase was made from the vendor is displayed Command Bar Definitions Command Enter edit Append Next screen Previous screen Saving and Exiting Description Move the prompt gt to the line you want to edit and press Enter The Edit Vendor Information window appears Press A to add a vendor to the item Press N to go to the next screen you selected or to return to the Item Locations screen if the Vendor Information screen is the last screen you selected Press P to go to the previous screen or to return to the Item Locations screen if the Vendor Information screen is the first screen you selected To save the information and go to the next or previous screen press N or P respectively To exit to the File Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 11 33 Item Locations File Maintenance Item Locations Bin Information Screen F BSAS TAI Sting Eat
179. e Itam Frice 12 Track Lors Fitted rem Location Bin f Price ED Sinan Bese Cumt r Umriftrmticm Inventocy Items Loo Elgsrrical Package Itan Information ee re males caregory F1 i Feoduct Line HATIBIAL BUTLE Tame DOE FEG Hu Tak Class 0 ial ber FED Ho Itan Lccm inn Izfnrmwtinn EH A Code n1 E 16 Salam BUILS cos bot ive WENTE Y 143 5500 TIP InvEntczy amp kdjmesctment L TEJA Adjustment Furch Price arimsncs Pays Cint Variance Transfer Cost Poems lt Pgin gt n proceed Field Definitions Field Name Item ID Description Status Item Type Item Price ID Description Enter the ID of the item whose information you want to add or change Enter a description of the item Enter or change the status of the item Active Discontinued Superseded Obsolete Enter 1 if the item is nonserialized 2 if the item is serialized or 3 if the item is a service Enter or change the price ID Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Inventory Transactions Field Name Description Track Lots If you want to track lots for the item enter Y if not enter N Kitted Item If the item is a kit enter Y if not enter N Sales Category Enter or change the sales category for the item Product Line Enter or change the product line for the item Base UOM Enter or change the base unit of measure at which the item is most often sold or picked from stock Tax Class Enter or change the tax
180. e ACE 01 instead of ACE 1 Ifyou use numbers for IDs pad them with zeros so that they are all the same length and numeric rules can hold true If ID 60 were ID 000060 and ID 112 were ID 000112 ID 000060 would be listed first since 060 is less than 112 alphabetically and numerically Ifyou use letters in IDs use either all uppercase or all lowercase letters so that the IDs can be sorted correctly e Use descriptive IDs For example WINOO1 and WINOO2 are more descriptive IDs than 001 and 002 However if you already use a numbered system you may want to continue using it Ifyou want to sort items by a particular attribute name or group put the attribute in the ID e Toensure that you can insert new items into a sequence use a combination of letters and numbers that leaves room in the sequence for later additions Item IDs Item IDs which can be 20 characters long identify items throughout Inventory and other OSAS applications Items can have the same product line location and price ID but no two items can have the same product line location price ID and item ID Inventory User s Manual 2 7 Setup Considerations Setup 2 8 Establish an item numbering system that organizes your inventory for your business If you currently identify your items by a number use that number as the ID If you do not already have a numbering system use the following suggestions to create one e Use as many of the 20 char
181. e Type See IP Alrerpnaze Irem LD Brarr Date End pare her Coe G4 710 bGSE5 Cus umwr pect ACEDDI1 13350730 usEdmeR Bapt o CIMUDI 343442121 H alias ELECTRIC Vazdor part ELLHD1 752722328IE Lime Ho joO0001 of D00853 Locmt icna Hert Poor Gest Firzt Item Tuitz Gonerald in o Field Definitions The information on this screen comes from the Alternate Items screen in the File Maintenance Items function 4 32 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Items Command Bar Definitions Command Next Prev Last First Item Units General info Locations Saving and Exiting Description Press N to view the next item record on file Press P to view the previous item record on file Press L to view the last item record on file Press F to view the first item record on file Press I to go to the Item ID field and enter a different item ID Press U to view additional units of measure for the item The Units of Measure screen appears Press G to view general information about the item The General Information screen appears Press O to view the locations assigned to the item The Item Locations screen appears To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 4 33 Items Information Inquiry Items Units of Measure Screen E An iii Gating a Pn blip Item Irem iB Lun Description Elsezcrrical Package Un
182. e actual cost For example suppose that you receive an item at an estimated cost of 20 but you do not receive the invoice You then sell the item to a customer When you receive the invoice the cost of the item is 25 The variance of 5 is posted to the general ledger e Youenter a quantity adjustment for an item in the Inventory Adjustments window in the Inventory Transactions function You enter multiple receipts for an item in Purchase Order at different costs and then receive the invoice for the first receipt at a different cost than the last receipt cost A purchase price variance is the difference between the standard cost and the actual price paid for the item in the standard costing valuation method For example if your standard cost for an item is 50 and you purchase the item at 60 the purchase price variance between the standard cost and what was paid for the item is 10 Before you post GL adjustments print the GL Adjustments Journal to verify that the adjustments are correct Posting GL Adjustments Use the Post GL Adjustments function to post COGS adjustments and purchase price variances to the general ledger Before you post print the GL Adjustments Journal and back up all the data files Both COGS adjustments and purchase price variances in Inventory are updated online COGS adjustments are stored in the INCJxxx file A COGS adjustment in Accounts Payable Purchase Order is updated when transactions are process
183. e serial number of the item being adjusted sold or purchased This field appears if you entered goods received or a purchase transaction with invoice status If you want the system to generate serial numbers enter Y if not enter N When you enter Y the maximum number of serial numbers available to order appears The original quantity of the item is displayed The quantity needed to fill the transaction is displayed The quantity on backorder is displayed Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Inventory Transactions Field Name Description Cost Enter or change the cost of the item Price This field appears for sales transactions Enter the price of the serialized item Comment Enter additional information about the lotted serialized item Command Bar Definitions This window has no command bar Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the Lot Serial Number Entry window use the Proceed PgDn command To exit to the Lot Serial Number Entry window without saving your entries use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 33 Inventory Transactions Daily Work Alternate Items and Locations Window Fas TAI Gaig Cat Port bjp Inventory Trwzzmrticzs Typs ELI Ene TI Quantity Unite Dare tar amp Purchase Broo HOGG inn ococg EX L215 1007 4 Purchase BZULDL BHO i J EA l r 1513993 4 Purchase i npm EHTOO 3 1 LEi LODE 4 Purchase BZnnDa4 HEHDDD1 lz 15mel9p9 4 Purenase dgis BHD
184. e the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 13 Inventory Transactions Daily Work Append Edit Inventory Sales Window SAS TAIT Type Iran tatum Her Order Loc IB WO0 Item LD 10 Price ID BUTLDb Cumt bevel kCEDO Ad ust Acct Qumrntity Units T Dres Hr Field Definitions 5 14 Field Name Status Date Period Year Loc ID Item ID 1 000 Cort 341 1300 Exz Cort 241 53 rES Price 422 8550 Ext Price 322 83 EInvmentczy Trmzzmrticza Loc II Quantity Unirs Dare Irar Apparei Invertocy Salas Pars TRL Pertnd DC Teer i896 EIHHEAPILIS HARFIHCOUZE Electrical Package Line 0005 of D 0055 Description Enter N if you are recording a new order V if you are verifying an order I if you are recording an invoice or M if you are recording a miscellaneous credit Enter or change the date of the sale Enter or change the period of the sale The current year is displayed Enter the ID of the location of the item Enter the ID of the item that was sold The quantity on hand and available appear at the bottom of the screen Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Inventory Transactions Field Name Price ID Cust Level Adjust Acct Quantity Units Cost Price Ext Cost Ext Price Comment Description Enter the price ID for the item Enter the customer level for the item If the adjustment is an increase in inventory enter a credit account If the adjustment
185. e the invoice status to record purchases of inventory items that were not placed on order An invoice increases the quantity on hand and the quantity available When you enter an invoice the last cost of the item appears in the Cost field but you can change it When you enter an invoice for serialized items enter a new serial number and choose whether or not to generate serial numbers When you enter an invoice for lotted items enter a lot number the quantity and the cost Miscellaneous Debit Use the miscellaneous debit status when you return goods to a vendor A miscellaneous debit decreases the quantity on hand and the quantity available When you enter a miscellaneous debit the average cost appears in the Cost field but you can change it Inventory User s Manual 3 7 Daily Tasks Work Flow When you enter a miscellaneous debit for serialized items the serial number must be in the INSNxxx file with sold status you cannot enter a cost When you enter a miscellaneous debit for lotted items enter a lot number the quantity and the cost The table below illustrates how adjustments sales and purchases affect quantities Both adjustment and purchase quantities are updated immediately sales quantities are not updated until you post transactions Relationship Between Quantities and Transactions Transactions Quantity Quantity Status Committed In Use Adjustment Increase Decrease Sale New Order Increase Ve
186. e using FIFO LIFO average or standard appears in the Cost field but can be changed When an adjustment to decrease the quantity is made to a serialized item the serial number must be in the INSNxxx file and must have available status the cost comes from the INSNxxx file and cannot be changed When an adjustment to decrease the quantity is made to a lotted item you must enter a lot number that is in the file the quantity of the lot and the cost Sales Sales transactions are used to process customer sales If you do not have the Accounts Receivable Sales Order applications use the Sale option on the Inventory Transactions screen to enter new customer orders verify orders invoices and miscellaneous credits New Order Use the new order status to record sales orders that will be shipped at a later date A new order increases the quantity committed and decreases the quantity available When you enter a new order the costing method you are using FIFO LIFO average or standard appears in the Cost field and cannot be changed Verify Order Use the verify order status to record the shipment of goods for sales orders A verify order status decreases the quantity committed increases the quantity in use and does not affect the quantity available When you enter a verify order the costing method you are using FIFO LIFO average or standard appears in the Cost field and cannot be changed Inventory User s Manual 3 5
187. e vendor purchase order information Use the Edit Lot Information window to change quantity and purchase information for the lot Use the Edit Serial Numbers window to update quantity and purchase information for the serial number Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Item Locations Item Locations Screen Sas Vo fing Kak Pt tjip Itum Locations Irem HD Loo Dem rigrinn Elezcrrical Package Unitra FEG Lncmticrm Los On Hand c mnirred In tae kynllasie Cn Order 2G DKK s 71 ORDINI CODD 2 00040 r ooo Dno DOCE QUOD 3 000 3 0000 ANCE LB Coa iM 1 0000 0 6 000 TEDon fira OO 35 00010 in cwn Git Do You Mant to l mizcmin Leal InEereaticn TES Price Informericon TER Court In cormatrizorn TES Yemiur Infccmemtica TES Bin Informacion TEB Let Humbera HO Trri m MumbersT HO Field Definitions Field Name Item ID Description Units Loc Inventory User s Manual Enter edit Apperm Item Units Description Enter the ID of the item whose information you want to add or change The description of the item is displayed Accept the displayed unit of measure or enter a different unit The location IDs for the item are displayed If you delete a location record that contains inventory items you can no longer access those item location records If you accidentally delete a location that contains inventory items reenter the location using the same
188. ed A COGS adjustment in Accounts Receivable Sales Order is updated when transactions are posted Inventory User s Manual 3 13 Daily Tasks Work Flow 3 14 If Inventory is interfaced with General Ledger debit and credit entries are created in the GLJRxxx file If you post detail line item information entries are made for each line item If you post summary totals information one entry is made for each account If Inventory is not interfaced with General Ledger use the Post GL Adjustments Log to manually adjust the accounts affected by this function When you post GL adjustments entries are made to these accounts COGS Post increase value COGS Inventory CR DB Purchase Price Variance standard cost higher than purchased cost PPV Inventory DB CR Inventory User s Manual Periodic Tasks You must do the following tasks periodically Calculate reorders Produce the Reorder Report Generate purchase requisitions Select physical inventory Freeze quantities Print physical inventory tags Print physical inventory worksheets Enter the physical count 9 Produce the Batch List 10 Produce the Physical Count List 11 Produce the Variance Report 12 Produce the Physical Count Valuation Report 13 Update perpetual inventory 14 Change the price of items 15 Change costs 16 Verify quantities 17 Do year end maintenance 18 Purge selected files 19 Rebuild item quantities
189. ee commands become available for you to use on help screens Key Operation F3 Delete the help screen contents Delete To recover a deleted help screen copy the xxHELP file from the distribution media to the PROGxx subdirectory xx is the application ID The copying process overwrites changes you made to other help screens F6 Edit a help screen Maintenance F7 Exit from the help screen and close the window Exit In Field Editing Commands When the cursor is in a field that contains information you can use the following keys and commands Key Operation Right Arrow Move the cursor to the right Left Arrow Move the cursor to the left Del Delete the character the cursor is on Delete Inventory User s Manual 1 31 Function Commands Introduction Key Ins Insert on off Home End F9 Undo F10 Delete to end of line Inquiry Commands 1 32 Operation Switch insert mode on and off When the Insert flag appears at the bottom of the screen characters you type push characters after the cursor off to the side When insert mode is turned off characters you type write over existing ones Move the cursor directly to the beginning of the field Move the cursor directly to the end of the field Restore a field to the way it was before you changed it You can use this command only while you are in the field once you move past it you must use the Abandon F5 command to clear the field D
190. een appears Press B to view bin information about the item location The Bin Information screen appears Press V to view quantity price breaks for the item The View Price Information window appears To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 4 45 Item Locations Information Inquiry Item Locations Bin Information Screen AS Dii Sui Ex fet bip Itan Loret ions Irem iB Lun Loc Lon Description Elsezcrrical Package an Information Lasr PFEySIZAI Count Bin M Tag Woe Dare Count Gey Urita etoh E 10 1511 12 135 152 7 0000 FEF BATL AO Line Ho joO0001 of ODDO Huxt Fruv Last Firzt ltem Generel rgRiring Locations Field Definitions The information on this screen comes from the Bin Information screen in the File Maintenance Item Locations function 4 46 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Item Locations Command Bar Definitions Command Next Prev Last First Item General Pricing Locations Saving and Exiting Description Press N to view the next item location record on file Press P to view the previous item location record on file Press L to view the last item location record on file Press F to view the first item location record on file Press I to go to the Item ID field and enter a different item ID Press G to view general information about the item location The Ge
191. elete the characters in the field to the right of the cursor If insert mode is turned off and you enter a character in the field s first position everything in the field is deleted When you use the Inquiry F2 command several other commands become available for you to use in the inquiry window To shorten your data search use a partial key inquiry to cut down the size of the inquiry list For example if you know that the ID starts with J enter J in the ID field before you use the Inquiry command The inquiry list will start with J and run through the end of the list Key PgUp PgDn End Operation Display the previous page of the window Display the next page of the window Move directly to the last item on file Inventory User s Manual Introduction Function Commands Key Home Down Arrow Up Arrow Ins Look up F7 Exit Enter Esc View commands Operation Move directly to the first item on file Move down one item Move up one item Enter a string of information If you have an idea of what you are looking for and the ID is longer than one character you can make a partial key inquiry to cut down the size of the inquiry list For example if you know that the ID starts with J enter J in the ID field Leave the Inquiry window without selecting anything Select the item the cursor is pointing to Open a window that shows Inquiry window commands and the window ID Inventory
192. em ID Location Period Year View Units 4 14 Description Enter the ID of the item whose summary history you want to view Enter the ID of the location for the item Enter the period whose summary history you want to view Enter the year whose summary history you want to view Enter Q to view the total amounts in quantities Enter D to view the total amounts in dollars Enter the unit of measure for the item Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Summary History Command Bar Definitions Command More Next item Prev item First item Last item Header Change view Units Saving and Exiting Description Press M to view totals of transfers adjustments builds and issues Press N to view the next item record on file Press P to view the previous item record on file Press F to view the first item record on file Press L to view the last item record on file Press H to go to the Item ID field and change any of the header information Press C to switch between viewing totals in quantities or dollars Press U to go to the Units field and enter a different unit of measure for the item To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 4 15 Detail History Features Use the Detail History function on the Information Inquiry menu to view transaction records for an item including historical information about selected trans
193. em in the entire list Delete the line item at the prompt gt Insert a line item at the prompt gt Edit the line item at the prompt gt 1 35 Reports Selecting a Range of Information Sorting To produce a report you must specify the amount of information you want in the report e To produce a report that includes all the available information leave the From Thru fields on the report function screen blank For example if you want information about all the vendors to be in a report leave the Vendor ID From and Thru fields blank e To limit the amount of information in the report enter the range of information in the From Thru fields For example if you want a report to include information only about vendor ACE001 enter ACEO01 at both From and Thru If you want the report to include information only about vendors that start with CO enter CO at From and COZZZZ at Thru Each field where you enter information on a report function screen usually restricts the overall output of the report For example if you leave the Vendor ID From and Thru fields blank the report will contain information about all the vendors But if you enter invoice 100 in the Invoice Number From and Thru fields and invoice 100 is assigned only to vendor ACE001 the report includes information only about vendor ACE001 Information for reports is sorted first by a space then by characters then by digits then by uppercase letters and
194. en Location Price Information Set up unit of measure pricing quantity breaks and customer level pricing on the Item Locations Price Information screen Unit of Measure Pricing In unit of measure pricing you can enter prices and quantity breaks for the item Unit of measure pricing is specific to the unit of measure you are working with Inventory User s Manual Setup Entering Your Data In the Edit Price Information window you can enter the average base list and minimum prices If you entered a price ID for the item the price information you enter here will override any other price information previously specified If you want to set up quantity breaks enter the quantity adjustment type or 96 and price adjustment Customer Level Pricing In customer level pricing you can enter customer levels to use for the unit the adjustment base the adjustment type or 96 and the amount of the price adjustment Indicate whether or not you want promotional prices to override the price adjustment amount for the customer level you set up Location Cost Information Enter the average last and base costs The average cost is a weighted average cost of on hand quantities The last cost is based on the value in the last Purchase Order transaction or purchases transaction in Accounts Payable The base cost is used for calculating prices as a markup from cost If you are using the EOQ method to calculate reorders and you wan
195. en as TAN Gaia Eat Fa biip frome Froftt Analysimz Fepnurt Pick Irem 13 From amp Prime py Thru 200 1 Itum ID L pbarica ID From EHuDoO1 i Promit Line Thru TXnOO1 3 Applicarion Frnduc Lina From APPLIANCE 4 Daepaer mant Thru MATERIAL 1 hpplicarinn From BOOTLE Tho Thru NJA AFFE Department From BUILDING Thru EHTERICA Prisc rder Profit Fmrcenz From i GFA Thru Z Bev tae OFA Perio Tear From if ic Thru Lis Lied Prisk By Locekica MU Output rice fFbrizzgr p F evirt D s ilg S crmgmn E zd Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Enter the range of items locations product lines and periods and years you want in the report Print Select the types of transactions you want in the report purchases or sales Print detail If you want to list the totals for the items and the grand total enter Y If you want to list only the grand total enter N 8 24 Inventory User s Manual Analysis Reports Trend Analysis Report Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the report to a printer File Select F to send the report to a file Screen Select S to send the report to the screen End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Analysis Reports menu Saving and Exiting After the report is produced the Analysis Reports menu appears Inventory User s Manual 8 25 Analysis Reports Trend Analysis Report Trend Analysis Repo
196. er From Depar re nir From Thru Thru Tam Teg Huskers TES WHimplany Frozen Quertit ies YES Tacer Exoeptiosa Only TER Bult Frozen Quanrzcismg TES Feint Iteem Mich Dero Quanticigsz HC TEEEBEE LGUanriries7 Field Definitions Field Name Description Batch ID Enter the ID of the batch you want to freeze quantities for Note You must enter a batch ID that is on file Batches are entered in the Physical Inventory Selection function Freeze quantities If you are ready for a physical count all adjustments have been made and want to freeze your on hand quantities enter Y if not enter N 10 8 Inventory User s Manual Physical Inventory Freeze Quantities Command Bar Definitions This screen has no command bar Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the Physical Inventory menu use the Proceed PgDn command To exit to the Physical Inventory menu without saving your entries use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 10 9 Print Physical Inventory Tags Features Use the Print Physical Inventory Tags function on the Physical Inventory menu to print a tag for each item location bin number lot and serial number in the physical count Reports A sample Physical Inventory Tag is on page 10 14 Screen Use Screen Description Print Physical Inventory Use the Print Physical Inventory Tags screen to assign tag Tags numbers and to select the order you want to organize the tags In
197. ercentage adjustment enter to use a dollar adjustment Enter the amount of the adjustment For negative quantities use the minus symbol enter positive quantities without a plus sign Command Bar Definitions This screen has no command bar Saving and Exiting To save your entries use the Proceed PgDn command To exit to the File Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 11 61 Tables Features Use the Tables function on the File Maintenance menu to set up and maintain the INPDxxx INSTDxxx INUDSxxx and INUSRxxx tables Tables store information about the system data options and default settings for other applications Reports To produce a list of the information entered for each table use the Tables List function on the Master File Lists menu Screen Use Screen Name Description Tables Use the Tables screen to maintain Inventory tables Inventory User s Manual 11 63 Tables File Maintenance Tables Screen sas n IHTE Tale L IMUZSH beserigrtlon faer Dberihed DWE LS Husker af Cale 1 Colum Length zn Tr 4 Zurt amr Fimld Zamrrirpzinn Uper Sefired Jort un t anu Ugpep BSedirned Jorr 3 Zumrorndacy o3 Field Definitions Field Name Description Table ID Enter or change the table ID To set up a company specific table enter the table ID plus the one to three character company ID To set up a termi
198. eriodic tasks 3 15 calculating reorders 3 15 procedures 3 15 perpetual inventory updating 3 21 PgDn function key 1 30 inquiry command 1 32 report command 1 34 scroll region command 1 35 PgUp function key 1 30 inquiry command 1 32 report command 1 34 scroll region command 1 35 Physical Count List function 10 37 producing 3 20 sample 10 40 Physical Count Valuation Report function 10 45 producing 3 21 sample 10 52 IX 7 Index physical counts entering 3 20 Physical Counts Tag Entry function 10 19 Physical Counts Worksheet Entry function 10 27 Physical Inventory batch ID 3 17 default frozen quantities 3 18 entering counts 3 20 exceptions 3 18 freezing quantities 3 19 frozen quantities 3 18 selecting 3 17 tag numbers 3 17 tags 3 19 worksheets 3 20 Zero quantities 3 19 Physical Inventory menu functions 1 6 Physical Inventory Selection function 10 3 Physical Inventory Tags List 10 14 Physical Inventory Worksheet 10 18 post detail to General Ledger option 2 11 Post GL Adjustments function 5 71 log 5 74 Post Transactions function 5 63 log 5 66 posting adjustments T accounts 3 12 COGS adjustments 3 13 COGS T accounts 3 14 GL adjustments 3 13 purchase price variance T accounts 3 14 purchase price variances 3 13 purchases T accounts 3 12 sales T accounts 3 12 transactions 3 11 prerequisites 3 11 transfers T accounts 3 12 price changing 3 22 IDs 2 21 11 55 se
199. ery Eisrorr Dared Befope Perici Tear r Veriflosrios Field Definitions 9 20 Field Name Have You Delete zero quantity lots with sale dates before Delete alternate items with end dates before Furge Selected Files yout Backed Up four face Files PriHnr amp eg ALL hbezpoers Hade Sure Ho ore Ele is lmirg rhe J3Tarem YES B with Bale Dates ferire Imwecicm Deras Dafcrm Prens cPgbrn zn proceed Furgirg Selected File Description Enter Y or N to indicate whether or not you have backed up your data files printed all the reports and made sure that no one else is using the system If you enter N the Periodic Processing menu appears Enter the sale date for zero quantity lots where the deletion should stop Zero quantity lots before the date you enter will be deleted Enter the end date for alternate numbers where the deletion should stop Alternate numbers with end dates before the date you enter will be deleted Inventory User s Manual Periodic Process Field Name Delete promotional pricing with end dates before Delete bins with last physical count date before Delete serialized history and numbers with invoice dates before Delete lot history with invoice dates before Delete detail history with transaction dates before Delete summary history dated before period year Purge Selected Files Description Enter the end date for the promotional pricing whe
200. es V661 80 UI43SAI V661 L0 UI3JSAL 001 Won A3rauen Uor3oesuej obeq 0081 GOZZ 008 S0ZZ Sp pTSS 00 9 z OZLL 00 9 0000 00 00 00 11 206 001 GG OTGb 0011 99 ZlvG 001 0000 00 Ib 9tvz Ib 9tvz Z1 969 z850 62 OFLT z8S0 ZL 8 01 00vz ZL 8 01 00vz 08 v269 00bz 00vZ 2006 0010 00bZ 2006 00 2 2006 01 LLV69 SG8 ee GG8EY z850 00 PZ9v 00vz 0000 3905 axH 3soo 0000 9 0000 9 LOE 0000 ST Va LOE 0000 TZ Wa 0000 0000 0000 0000 206 0000 T Oud 06 0000 S Oud 06 0000 9 Oud 0000 0000 0000 L 0000 L 8v 00002 Oud Bre 0000 S Oud 9v 0000 Oud 9v 0000 Oud OnE 0000 02 Oud 0000 92 0000 0000 92 0000 92 LUE 0000 002 Oud Bre 0000 92T Oud 9v 0000 001 Oud 0000 yrun Aqtquend won apne jad 2 21 u ON FSX dI 94S qrodey Azo sTH uoTIOesUeTL Aqtddng szepttng O29 ya uorjdraoseq AX 39q d IL suea qI Uejl ASNOHAYWM QNVIMVO TOQOWO UOT BOOT WY Oc L 6661 8c S0 Inventory User s Manual 7 84 Analysis Reports Safety Stock Alert Report Overstock Report Slow Fast Movement Report Sales Analysis Report Gross Profit Analysis Report Trend Analysis Report Movement Trending Report Inventory User s Manual 8 3 8 7 8 11 8 15 8 19 8 23 8 27 8 1 Safety Stock Alert Report Features Use the Safety Stock Alert Report function on the
201. exit to the Code Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 12 11 Forecast Types Features Use the Forecast Types function on the Code Maintenance menu to predict seasonal or current trends of your inventory items and to calculate reorder quantities Reports To produce a list of the information entered in the Forecast Types function use the Forecast Types List function on the Master Code Lists menu Screen Use Screen Description Forecast Types Use the Forecast Types screen to designate weight factors for the selected periods You can also set up an adjustment factor to predict an increase or a decrease in demand Inventory User s Manual 12 13 Forecast Types Code Maintenance Forecast Types Screen isine La Pmi thin Forecast Type besezipticm REG begular Forecast Par sad Fatghting Fectes Fos Teer Ese Bae Diac Book Bao Dac Bac Baz Dac Bask 10 Bere 11 eck LE Bl woe oe de eee Field Definitions 12 14 Field Name Forecast Type Copy From Description Period Back 1 13 Weighting Factor oe 1995 30 nS dace zo nA 1295 o1 1999 01 1988 oi sao n 12 1998 11 1958 1o 98D o ma 19958 Bey 1388 ov i900 ooo Types Pagin Dir 0L ariii carol caroli Cervo Grol 12701 13 014 10 01 Cav OL Dip 017 cani Description Dara 19232 i334 12 5 1239 1939 17525 1928 1538 lead 1238 172 159
202. f the field values For example if disk size is your first user defined field you could list the available sizes of diskettes 3 5 inch 5 25 inch in the field values and use the description 3 5 inch diskette If you leave a field value and description blank for a user defined field the user defined field is free form when you assign the user defined fields to an item in the Items function User Defined Field Sorts In addition to the two sorted fields user defined fields 1 and 2 you can add two other sorting options that can be used in several reports Inventory User s Manual 2 17 Entering Your Data Setup Select User Defined Field Sorts from the Code Maintenance menu The user defined fields you set up in the User Defined Fields function are displayed You can also choose to sort by product line Enter the description of the sort sequence that appears in the functions mentioned above Then enter the number of the user defined fields you want to appear first second and third in the sort sequence You can choose between any of the 16 user defined fields or however many you set up and the product line but each user defined field can be used only once in a sort sequence After you save your sort sequences they are written to the INVExxx Items and the INKY xxx Alternate Keys files If you want to change the sort sequence you must back up your data files first Locations Locations are places your items are store
203. finally by lowercase letters No matter what you enter in the From and Thru fields however your entries are sorted in alphabetical order unless the function provides an option to sort the information differently Sorting by alphabetical codes or IDs is easy For example the ID ACL comes before the ID BB because A comes before B Inventory User s Manual 1 37 Reports Introduction But take notice when you enter codes or IDs that consist of something other than letters the order might not be what you expect For example if 20 items are labeled 1 through 20 and you want all of them to be in a report you might enter 1 at From and 20 at Thru expecting them to be listed 1 2 3 19 20 However since OSAS sorts in alphabetical order they are listed in a different order 1 10 19 2 20 3 9 To prevent that situation pad extra spaces in codes and IDs with zeros so that numbers in alphabetical order are also in numerical order In the example above the items would be labeled 00000000000000000001 through 00000000000000000020 Output Device Report functions screens offer four output options printer file screen and end When you need a hard copy of a report select P and either accept the printer that appears or enter the code for the printer you want to use If applicable select S if you want the report to be in standard size print or C if you want it to be in compressed print If you want to stop printing after it has
204. for an item Alternate Item ID If you have items that are comparable or can be substituted for other items you may want to set up alternate item IDs The alternate item ID is used when you sell an item with insufficient quantities in inventory Customer ID If Accounts Receivable Sales Order are interfaced with Inventory you can assign customer IDs to an item For example if a customer uses PS145 as the identification for plumbing supplies but your item ID is 700 you set up PS145 as the customer ID on the Alternate Items screen Then when the customer calls to order more PS145 and you enter item ID PS145 a message gives you the inventory item ID 700 Inventory User s Manual 2 23 Entering Your Data Setup 2 24 When you set up customer alternates you must enter the customer ID in the source field Alias An alias is another name for an item You can define an alias as an alternate for any inventory item For example you might use an alias as an alternate if item 700 is also known as plumbing supplies When you enter plumbing supplies as an item ID a message lets you know that plumbing supplies is an alias for item 700 Superseded Superseded alternates are replacements for items that are no longer available for purchase or sale For example if you set up item 700 as the superseded alternate of item 100 each time you enter item 700 for a sale or a purchase a message lets you know that item 700 has been replaced b
205. for sales transactions Toggle to YES or NO to indicate whether or not you want to keep detail history for inventory If you elect not to keep detail history for inventory you cannot access the Inventory Movement Report and Transaction History Report functions Toggle to YES or NO to indicate whether or not you want to keep lot history If you select NO you cannot use the Lot History Report function Toggle to YES or NO to indicate whether or not you want to keep serial history If you select NO you cannot use the Serialized History Report function Toggle to YES or NO to indicate whether or not you want to show costs of items in sales transactions Toggle to YES or NO to indicate whether or not you want to post line item detail or only summary information to General Ledger You cannot select YES if you elected not to keep detail history Inventory User s Manual 2 11 Setup Considerations Setup 12 Toggleto YES or NO to indicate whether or not you want the system to check for aliases in the Item ID field in reports 13 Toggle to Serial Lot or Lot Serial to select the order you want to use for your transaction entry method 14 Toggle to YES or NO to indicate whether or not you want to allow discounts on serialized items 15 Toggle to YES or NO to indicate whether or not you want the system to display costs when you use the price and availability lookup Setting Up Access Codes To restrict access to data files menus
206. g the Reorder Report After you select the items you want to include in the reorder process you can produce the Reorder Report Use the Reorder Report to analyze the reordering method s for the items locations product lines and user defined fields you selected If you include items that are above the order point the report lists all the items If do not include items that are above the order point the report lists only items that must be purchased at this time Inventory User s Manual Work Flow Periodic Tasks Generating Purchase Requisitions If Purchase Order is interfaced with Inventory you can use the Generate Purchase Requisitions function to create purchase requisitions To generate purchase requisitions with the method that shows the least quantity you need to reorder EOQ Min Max and Forecast select the Least Quantity calculation method To generate purchase requisitions with the method that shows the greatest quantity you need to reorder select the Greatest Quantity calculation method Selecting Physical Inventory Periodically counting inventory items and changing the quantities in the system ensures accurate up to date records Use the Physical Inventory Selection function to enter batch IDs and to set up your physical count process Batch ID You can assign a batch ID to items locations bins product lines and user defined fields The batch ID is used throughout the physical count process to group simila
207. groups of similar items You can sort by product line in many reports and you can specify the product lines you want to use when setting up promotional pricing 2 14 Inventory User s Manual Setup Entering Your Data Select Product Lines from the Code Maintenance menu Then enter each product line and a description of each product line Account Codes Account codes contain default accounts for posting to General Ledger The accounts are paired under one account code which can be assigned to an item You can enter an account number for the following general ledger accounts sales e COGS inventory Work in process Inventory adjustment e COGS adjustment purchase price variance physical count adjustment transfer cost The accounts you enter are used when the item is sold or returned through Accounts Receivable Sales Order or purchased through Accounts Payable Purchase Order For more information about setting up general ledger accounts see the General Ledger User s Manual Select Account Codes from the Code Maintenance menu Then enter each account code or copy an existing code Enter a description of each code and an account number for the GL accounts Forecast Types Forecast types help you predict current and seasonal trends for your inventory items You can set up a forecast type for seasonal regular slow moving or fast growing items Inventory User s Manual 2 15 Entering Your D
208. gt to the cost detail you want to edit and press Enter Press A to add a cost detail line Press N to go to the next screen you selected or to return to the Item Locations screen if the Cost Information screen is the last screen you selected Press P to go to the previous screen or to return to the Item Locations screen if the Cost Information screen is the last screen you selected To save the information and go to the next or previous screen press N or P respectively To exit to the File Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 11 31 Item Locations File Maintenance Item Locations Vendor Information Screen HAS DD Zug LX Ded kp Irem OD Loo LE Lon CADIEH Description CFlecertoal Package Units BEG Lach pu Vereder Vern cr m Fart Humber Lead Quant icy Unit Camsr bacs ELLOGL 75T223DHIE 0 0000 145 n5B2 13721 1799 Lire Ho ijcO0 001 of Omih Entec edit Apperd Hert zcregn Prewicus scrggn Field Definitions Field Name Item ID Location Description Units Vendor Vendor s Part Number 11 32 Tee Lucmticzs Weodocr Information Description The ID of the item you are working with is displayed The location you selected on the Item Locations screen is displayed The description of the item is displayed The default unit of measure is displayed The vendors available for the item are displayed The number the vendor uses to identify the item is
209. hange the cost of the unit item 3 10 Inventory User s Manual Work Flow Daily Tasks Producing the Transactions Journal After you have entered all your adjustments sales and purchases and before you post transactions print the Transactions Journal The journal is a record of transactions entered through the Inventory Transactions function Use the journal to verify the quantity costs and prices for transactions and as an audit trail of inventory activity Producing the Transfers Journal After you have entered all the location transfers and before you post transactions print the Transfers Journal The journal is a record of the transfers that were entered in the Location Transfers function Use the journal to verify the quantity of each item transferred number of units transfer cost and unit and extended cost and as an audit trail of inventory activity Posting Transactions Adjustment purchase and location transfer transactions including history are updated online sales transactions are updated during the post Before you post complete the following tasks e Ifyou have a multiuser system make sure that no one else is using the Inventory system Print the Transactions Journal e Back up all the data files When you post transactions for adjustments purchases and location transfers the general ledger accounts are updated When you post sales the in use and available quantities the general ledger account
210. he Global Inquiry command to select the Payroll option in window 7 the sequence number of the window that appeared would be 002001 Every time you enter Global Inquiry the numbering starts at 001001 regardless of the sequence numbers the window had before If you access more than 999 windows under the same use of Global Inquiry for example the first use the counter turns back to 001000 If you use the Global Inquiry command more than 999 times before exiting for example at the first window the sequence number becomes 000001 Inventory User s Manual D 11 Other Commands References To exit from Global Inquiry at any point use the Exit F7 command You are returned to the Access Code window use the Exit F7 command again to return to the point where you originally used the Other F4 command General Information Inquiry Use the General Information Inquiry function to view information from the Accounts Receivable Accounts Payable Sales Order Purchase Order and Payroll applications Depending on which applications are installed you can view information about vendors customers and employees Select General Information Inquiry from the Other Commands menu F4 twice from a menu F4 once from a field The function screen appears J USAS TEA Sues La Puw tjip Hearch Fori Yent Vendor ID Farm pA Ed ACE FLUMBIPEE SUPPL CUOMPANT OE co BoROOI DORIS COMSTRECTION COMPARNT ATTG GS ATLARTIS TELIPH CL
211. he batch you want to use to group items together for the physical count Description Enter the description of the batch ID Count Date Enter the date the physical count will be taken GL Period Enter the period you want to post to Location ID Enter the range of locations you want to include in the batch Item ID Enter the range of items you want to include in the batch Bin Number Enter the range of bins you want to include in the batch 10 4 Inventory User s Manual Physical Inventory Physical Inventory Selection Field Name Description Product Line Enter the range of product lines you want to include in the batch User Defined Fields 1 2 Enter the range of user defined fields you want to include in the batch Use tag numbers If you want to print tags and use tag numbers in the Physical Counts Tag Entry function enter Y if not enter N Display frozen If you want frozen quantities to be displayed when you enter quantities counts enter Y if not enter N Enter exceptions only If you want the counted quantity to be equal to the frozen quantity so that only physical discrepancies must be entered enter Y if not enter N Default frozen If you want your frozen and counted quantities to be equal and quantities you want your frozen quantities to be displayed enter Y if not enter N If you enter N you must enter counted quantities for each item Print items with zero If you want to print items with a quantity
212. hies FRO Price In BUTLI Customac ID ACEOOI Eusr Level ACETIL Sais Bare n c taam Sele guant ity Loo Press Any Eey usariy Ixfnrmeriun Pricing Infarmserion n Emnd tr 15 0000 Cale Unit Frics azr 51z Celie CES coou Cale Ext Price 1221 83 In Tae ony i OOD0 Teanriry Breaks kwmilahla Gey 17 0000 guant Lop Dzir Frica n CcdEer JEF E BGUUD foam Infobkmer ics LIFO FIFO Come 44 5500 Field Definitions Field Name Description Location ID Enter a location ID Item ID Enter an item ID Price ID Enter a price ID Customer ID Enter a customer ID Inventory User s Manual Price Calculator References Field Name Cust Level Sale Date Sale Quantity Sale Units Calc Unit Price Calc Ext Price Base Quantity Unit Price Command Bar Description Enter a customer level Press Enter to accept the sale date displayed or enter a different date Press Enter to accept the sale quantity displayed or enter a different quantity Press Enter to accept the unit of measure displayed or enter a different unit of measure The calculated unit price is displayed The calculated external unit price is displayed This window has no command bar Saving and Exiting You cannot save information in this window To exit to the Price Calculator use the Exit F7 command E 2 Inventory User s Manual A Abandon function key 1 29 Access Codes parameter 1 9 setting u
213. historical information about the last physical count Lot Information A lot can contain many items but the same item cannot be in both lot A and lot B A lot can also have many serial numbers but the same serial number cannot be in both lot A and lot B Use the Cost Information screen and the Lot Information screen in the Item Locations function to enter quantities for lots You can also enter quantities in the Inventory Transactions or Location Transfers functions Enter the lot numbers in the Edit Lot Information window of the Lot Information screen the date the lot expires and a comment about the lot 2 30 Inventory User s Manual Setup Entering Your Data When you add a lot the status sold is displayed until you enter on hand quantities for the lot Then the status changes to available If you add lots for your history records that are past the expiration date the status expired is displayed If you add lots for historical purposes and all the quantity buckets are at zero the status sold is displayed Enter the quantity of the lotted item The available quantity on hand minus committed minus in use is displayed The on hand quantity is entered on the Cost Information screen The purchase information of the lot is displayed unless you are entering lots for the first time Serial Information Use the Serial Numbers screen in the Item Locations function to enter quantities for serial numbers You can also enter qua
214. ial Commands menu which allows you to perform these special tasks From the standard menus add a function or menu to the Favorites menu e change to the Favorites menu e change from live to sample data and vice versa display information about a function perform special application setup From the Favorites menu remove a function or menu change to the Main menu e change from live to sample data and vice versa display information about a function perform special application setup Menu Keys Most keyboards have a set of function keys usually labeled with the letter F and a number In OSAS commands are assigned to these function keys Key Fl Key Help F2 Favorites Menu F4 Access Code F5 Live Sample swap Operation Displays the list of Icons and Functions keys available to you Displays the Favorites menu Displays the Access Code dialog box Switches between live and sample data Inventory User s Manual Graphical Style Menus Key Operation F6 Displays the current workstation date and allows you to Workstation Date change it F7 Exits from OSAS Exit F9 Allows certain functions to be set up Works only in certain Application Setup applications This application does not use an application setup function F10 Allows you to add to and delete from your Favorites menu Change to Favorites Right click Shift F5 Change menu style Shift F2
215. ict or widen the search Search for an item based on item description When you enter the description you can use the and wildcard characters to restrict or widen the search You can use the following commands when a report is displayed on the screen Key PgUp PgDn Home End F7 Exit Left Arrow Right Arrow Tab Toggle Operation Move to the previous page of the report Move to the next page of the report Move directly to the top of a group of pages Move directly to the bottom of a group of pages Exit to the menu from any point in the report Move left one character Move right one character Toggle between the left and right halves of a report Inventory User s Manual Introduction Function Commands Key Up Arrow Down Arrow Operation Move a line up and down the screen to line up information when you toggle between halves of a report Scroll Region Commands When the prompt gt is in a line item scroll region you can use the following commands Key Down Arrow Up Arrow PgUp PgDn Home End F3 Delete Ins Insert Enter Edit Inventory User s Manual Operation Move down one line item Move up one line item Move to the previous screen or to the first line if you are on the first screen Move to the next screen or to the last line if you are on the last screen Move to the first line item in the entire list Move to the last line it
216. ility lookup The LIFO FIFO unit cost is displayed This field appears if you elected in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function to show costs in the price and availability lookup The average unit cost is displayed This field appears if you elected in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function to show costs in the price and availability lookup The standard unit cost is displayed This field appears if you elected in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function to show costs in the price and availability lookup The base unit cost is displayed The calculated unit price is displayed The calculated extended unit price is displayed The base level is displayed The sale quantity levels are displayed Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Price and Availability Field Name Description Unit Price The calculated unit price for each quantity break is displayed Command Bar This window has no command bar Saving and Exiting To return to the Price and Availability screen use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 4 11 Summary History Features Use the Summary History function on the Information Inquiry menu to view information from the transaction history records for an item number of items sold purchased transferred adjusted requisitioned built and issued for a period and year Reports No report is associated with this function Screen Use
217. ing the log Saving and Exiting After the log is produced the Periodic Processing menu appears Inventory User s Manual 9 13 Periodic Process Quantity Cross Verification Quantity Cross Verification Log 0000 00L9 71L 0089 6T OOSE OLL 00L8 TZS8EE OOLS STZ 000 109 OOPL 6S2T 00vv LLOC 0000 0089 71L 0069 61 00LE OLL 0068 T2S8EE 00SS STC 001c 109 OOEL 6SZT 00cv LLOZ 0000 0000 9 0000 T 0000 SE 0000 992 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 9 000021 0000 S 00007992 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 9 000dW 000XL 000NW 000NW 000XL 000XL 000NW 000XL 000XL 33odew jo pug 006 009 os 00 osz 009007 009007 00 00c 001 3SOO M N I ebeq 3802 PTO Aqtquend men Aqtquend pTO UuOT3eOTJTI A SsO21 itquen Ajtddns szepttng iequnN 301 UOI3e20T qI weil Wd 8v c 6661 10 80 Inventory User s Manual 9 14 Year End Maintenance Features Use the Year End Maintenance function on the Periodic Processing menu for maintenance tasks and to prepare for the next year Reports A sample Year End Maintenance Log is on page 9 18 Screen Use Screen Description Year End Maintenance Use the Year End Maintenance screen to increment the current fiscal year by 1 in the INPDxxx table The year to date totals in the INHSxxx Summa
218. initions Field Name Description Item ID Enter the ID of the item whose quantities and price information you want to view Units Enter the unit of measure for the item Command Bar Definitions This screen has no command bar Saving and Exiting To exit to the Price and Availability screen press Enter Inventory User s Manual 4 7 Price and Availability Information Inquiry Item Price and Availability Detail Window a An ii Gaii Cat Pw bhi Potion mud Aweilebility _ Irem iB LOU Ea Le Apriuwe Description Elecrrical Package Tram Typs Honnsserimlizad Unita FEG Price ID ETILO Track Lota Ho Irem Frios xni kvmilahilirg Derail Irem ID 100 Fl6eeliioal Paebaye Lowracion 13 ohio Tas LE jm PEO Prices On Band Kwarmgw Frice EO 82 Le Cimmi tbid Pase lrice In Tas Liat Price 1 dow Lab Le Hiztzar s Frirm ITI 00m East Prev Tirst Lert Item View Cale price Paita Field Definitions The information in the Item Price and Availability Detail window comes from the Location Information and Price Information screens in the File Maintenance Item Locations function Command Bar Definitions This window has no command bar Saving and Exiting To exit to the Price and Availability screen press any key 4 8 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Price and Availability Price Calculator Window SAS TAIi Zug Cat Pot tjip aes icy dIxformeri n im Emnd utr CommibLed Oe In Bee
219. install Resource Manager you can use it to install other applications modify how each application works and specify how the overall system operates Base applications Base applications are designed and produced with the largest possible number of industries in mind They are most effective when you interface them with each other Base applications are usually named after common accounting operations Examples are Payroll Inventory Accounts Payable Purchase Order Accounts Receivable Sales Order and General Ledger Inventory User s Manual 1 3 Inventory System The Inventory application helps you control and keep track of the items you stock For each item including lots and serialized items Inventory tracks the quantities sold purchased and adjusted location transfers and costs Each item is identified by location product line user defined fields bin number status vendor ID serial and lot number and unit of measure Use the Items function to enter information specific to the item and use the Item Locations function to enter detailed information about the locations of the items You can then track transfers between locations sell items from an alternate location and track differences in price activity Information Inquiry Use the Information Inquiry functions to view not change information about items prices transaction and historical records general information alternate items units of measure locat
220. inter Select F to send the report to a file Select S to send the report to a screen Select E to change your selections or exit to the Reports menu After the report is produced the Reports menu appears Inventory User s Manual 7 9 Reports Item Status Report Item Status Report I ebeg So Md Md AT3OV IVISSIVN AT3OV WIV IVdH AT3OV YIV IVER AT3OV WIV IVSH AT3OV WIV IVSH AT3OV WIV IVSH AT3OV WIV IVSH AT3OV WIV IVSH AT3OV IVINS BATION IVISSIVA 31oded jo puq S 9Ueqd JOTI94xXyY OOONN osz AJetgrprumH OOONN 009002 dung dumg OOONN 005002 qeusqgos ae3eM 000NA 007007 3euoriTpuoo ITY OOONH 00 002 qeqeey 1eqeM OOONN 002002 eoeuin OOONN 00100c abeyoeg bur oop bur1eeH OOONN 002 ebexoeq burqumqd OOONN OST xog Jeyeerg pue sjeqano e2r3329 H sepn ouI abeyoeg Teoriaoe u TOOONN 001 0000 02 0000 ZZZ 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 T 0000 9T 0000 000071 0000 2z 0000 esp ur TqeTTeAV pea1muuop 0000 01 0000 2vZ 0000 SNIGII0H 0000 8 Tdd ACW 0000 ONIGTING 0000 8 Tdd ACW 0000 ONIGTING 0000 8 Tdd ACW 0000 ONICTING 0000 8 Tdd UW 0000 ONICTING 0000 8 Tdd YCW 0000 ONICTING 0000 8 ddV UW 0000 ONICTING 0000 ONICIIN
221. ion and bin information costs vendors lot numbers and serial numbers Daily Work Once you establish the codes and IDs through the File Maintenance and Code Maintenance functions you can use the Daily Work functions to enter adjustments sales purchases and location transfers to produce journals and to post transactions Reorder Processing Use the Reorder Processing functions to calculate the reorder quantity for items to print the Reorder Report and to generate purchase requisitions Reports Use the Reports functions to produce information about inventory movement item statuses prices valuation cost variance and serialized lot and transaction history Inventory User s Manual 1 5 Inventory System Introduction Analysis Reports Use the Analysis Reports functions to analyze items that have fallen below safety stock level items that are overstocked sales gross profit and trends Periodic Processing After posting over a period of time the files might get so large that they slow down your system Use the Periodic Processing functions to remove outdated information from the files Physical Inventory Use the Physical Inventory functions to process your physical inventory cycle File Maintenance Use the File Maintenance functions to set up and maintain information about your items Code Maintenance Use the Code Maintenance functions to set up codes assigned to an item Master File Lists Use the
222. item in the destination location before the transfer is displayed The on hand quantity of the item in the destination location after the transfer is displayed Enter or change the cost of the transfer shipping handling packaging Enter or change the date of the transfer Enter or change the period you want to post the transfer cost to Enter or change the year of the transfer Enter additional information about the transfer Command Bar Definitions This window has no command bar Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the Location Transfers screen use the Proceed PgDn command To exit to the Location Transfers screen without saving your entries use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 41 Location Transfers Daily Work Lot Entry Window F jaan tind Seq Eat Pmw Hip Lo wtinn Trauafmgrz Enn Ee From Trem ID Good To Trem ED sonani From bor ZB Nuccul Te Loc IS ESHUDD1 nica GL bequesre cry L DOTI Source lot Number Imaz Lot Kuster Mirbti 000001 of DODOCUD TrarafiEkr Ccuk OC Tramaepnriom Dare OT OG Pe Period OF Tear 1255 Coram nt Transfer jGUODDI of Ole Entec ait Append Icug Field Definitions Field Name Description From Item ID The ID of the transferred item is displayed From Loc ID The ID of the location the item is being transferred from is displayed Units The unit of measure for the item is displayed To Item
223. iteria the system determined that no items fell into the from thru range you specified Change the from thru criteria for the batch There are no locations set up for this item to calculate prices on You must set up a location for the item in the Item Locations function before you can calculate a price in the Price and Availability function This alternate item already exists with the same item type Enter a different alternate item ID or alternate type This alternate item ID does not exist in the Items file Enter a different item ID or set up the item in the Items function This customer already has an alternate item set up for them You can set up only one customer alternate or vendor alternate per item This item does not exist in the Inventory Item Master file If the item associated with a tag is not in the Items file you must add the item to inventory This item does not match the from thru criteria for this batch This location does not match the from thru criteria for this batch Enter an item or a location that falls within the range you specified in the from thru criteria for the batch B 4 Inventory User s Manual References System Messages This lot does not exist for this item Set up lot information for the item in the Item Locations Lot Information screen This vendor already has an alternate item set up for them You can set up only one alternate item per item for a vendor This vendor is already set up for thi
224. its of Mansura ira Comeersion fattur Hapa PEG 1 0000 JE besalty9 Pefault ALterzmtmm Lime Ho joO0001 of DOO Hext Frey Last Firat Iter Altecostem Generel info bisa Lor Field Definitions The information on this screen comes from the Units of Measure screen in the File Maintenance Items function 4 34 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Items Command Bar Definitions Command Next Prev Last First Item Alternates General info Locations Saving and Exiting Description Press N to view the next item record on file Press P to view the previous item record on file Press L to view the last item record on file Press F to view the first item record on file Press I to go to the Item ID field and enter a different item ID Press A to view alternate items for the item you are working with The Alternate Items screen appears Press G to view general information about the item The General Information screen appears Press O to view the locations assigned to the item The Item Locations screen appears To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 4 35 Items Information Inquiry Item Locations Locations Screen E As DiNi gue La De bp Itum Locmttnnz Lou Description Elezcrrical Package Unire PEG Se SUrRI OC n lt RC A VU Los 1J Dn Mad Commi Peed In Tat Available On Order P T C
225. ity of an item Use the Append Edit Inventory Sales window to add or edit asales transaction You can enter a new order an invoice or a miscellaneous credit and verify an order Use the Append Edit Inventory Purchases window to add or edit a purchase transaction You can enter a new order goods received an invoice and a miscellaneous debit The Lot Entry window appears if you are tracking lots for an item Use it to enter adjustments sales or purchases Use the Append Edit Lot Number window to add lot numbers to a transaction or to edit lot numbers associated with a transaction The Serial Number Entry window appears if you are working with a serialized item Use it to enter adjustments sales or purchases Use the Append Edit Serial Number window to add serial numbers to a transaction or to edit serial numbers associated with a transaction The Serial Lot Number Entry window appears if you are working with an item that is both lotted and serialized and you use the serial lot entry method to enter transactions Use it to enter adjustments sales or purchases for lotted and serialized items Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Screen Append Edit Lotted Serial Number window Lot Serial Number Entry window Append Edit Lotted Serial Number window Alternate Items and Locations window Inventory User s Manual Inventory Transactions Description Use the Append Edit Lotted Serial Number window to add o
226. l Number Entry Window E MSAN TAN EInvmntcz Trezauct icas BT Muber Entry Tram TD 80004 BDimhuasher Black L Lcc ID Bool EKIHNERFCOLIZ WABEHOUEI nica EA Bequested dry L aS Sariml Hocrhwr Enit Coat eriml amber 000001 of DOOCUU Line M0003 of DOS Entec eit Append Icann Field Definitions Field Name Description Item ID The ID of the item you are working with is displayed Loc ID The ID of the location you are working with is displayed Units The unit of measure you are working with is displayed Requested Qty The quantity being sold adjusted or purchased is displayed Serial Number The serial numbers for the item are displayed Unit Cost The unit cost of the serialized item is displayed Unit Price The unit price of the serialized item is displayed 5 22 Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Inventory Transactions Command Bar Definitions Command Definition Enter edit Move the prompt gt to the line you want to edit and press Enter The Edit Serial Number window appears Append Press A to add lot numbers to the item The Append Serial Number window appears Done Press D to save your entries when you are finished adding or editing information about serial numbers Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the transaction window you were working with press D To exit to the transaction window you were working with without saving your changes use the Exit
227. lculations are displayed at the bottom of the Tape field the previous numbers and operators scroll up the display area to make room When the Tape field is full the numbers scroll off the top of the display area To repeat the last calculation using the same operator and number press the same operator key again You can repeat this operation indefinitely Execute an Operating System Command You can execute an operating system command from any field in OPEN SYSTEMS Accounting Software Follow these steps to execute an operating system command 1 From the Other pull down menu select Execute an Operating System Command Enter the command you want to execute Use the Proceed PgDn command to execute the operating system command If the operating system command works properly the message Press F7 to exit appears Inventory User s Manual D 5 Other Commands References If the system issues a return value an error message see the operating system manual for information If an error message appears you must exit from OSAS before you can execute any more operating system commands 4 Press F7 to go to the field where you accessed Other commands CALL a BBx Program From any field you can call any BB program that does not require variables to be passed to it Follow these steps to call a BBx program 1 Use the Other F4 twice from a menu F4 once from a field command 2 Select Call a BBx Program from the menu
228. ld Definitions Field Name Description Pick Enter the range of forecast types you want in the list 14 20 Inventory User s Manual Master Codes List Forecast Types List Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the list to a printer File Select F to send the list to a file Screen Select S to send the list to the screen End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Master Code Lists menu Saving and Exiting After the list is produced the Master Code Lists menu appears Inventory User s Manual 14 21 Master Codes List Forecast Types List I ebegq Forecast Types List 0 0c oeg oeg oeg oeg oeg oeg oeg oeg oeg oeg o o aa oOooooooo ANM in OF oo Cov oeg oeg oeg oeg oeg oeg oeg oeg oeg oeg oeg oeg oeg 000 S s Mod odud Oooo0o0o0o00o0x a o e QOO TN OD amp pv oeg oeg oeg oeg oeg oeg oeg oeg oeg oeg oeg oeg 000 S s Oc odd cO Gi O r Cy ouo oo oo 5eoe ANM TIN OD oeg pouq lq 3seoezo4 Teuose s 1ern6 u oeg uauog aseT uo buraubreM SVIS Doct zoe M potzed 3st1 Sed 3seoed04 Ajtddns szepttng uoradiagoseq ed i 3seo 1zod Wd 9S 1 6661 10 80 Inventory User s Manual 14 22 Cost Makeup Codes List Features Use the Cost Makeup Codes List function on the Master Code Lists menu to produce a list of cost makeup codes You can use the
229. ld Name Lead Time Status Forecast Type Item Value COGS Adjustment Adjusted Value Maximum Qty Order Point Quantity Order Point Status Safety Stock Quantity File Maintenance Description Enter or change the number of days it usually takes the vendor to ship the item to you Enter or change the status of the item at the location Active Discontinued Superseded Obsolete Enter the forecast type for the item The current value of the item quantity x unit cost total is displayed The total amount of COGS adjustments that have been calculated for the item is displayed The value of the item after the COGS adjustments have been applied current item value COGS adjustment is displayed Enter or change the maximum quantity you want to have on hand at one time Enter or change the reorder point When the number of units in stock reaches this point the item is listed in the Safety Stock Alert Report If you changed the order point quantity enter M manual If the system calculates the order point the order point status is calculated If you want to freeze the current order point quantity enter F Enter or change the quantity you want to have as a safeguard against the uncertainty of the order process Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Field Name Safety Stock Status EOQ Quantity EOQ Status Min Order Qty GL Account Code Sales COGS Inventory WIP Inventory
230. le Sales Order Accounts Payable or Bill of Materials Kitting with Inventory see the user s guides for those applications When Inventory is interfaced with General Ledger the inventory accounts assigned to the items in locations and in the specified transfer account are updated Inventory User s Manual 2 9 Setup Considerations Setup When Accounts Payable is interfaced with Inventory you can view information from Inventory about a purchased or a returned item description serialized item information and unit of measure The quantities costs and purchase history are updated in Inventory when you post transactions in Accounts Payable When Inventory is interfaced with Purchase Order the same information is exchanged as with Accounts Payable In addition the INLDxxx Location Detail file keeps track of quantities on order when you place orders through Purchase Order When Accounts Receivable is interfaced with Inventory you can view information from Inventory about a sold or returned item price cost assigned general ledger account numbers serialized item information category code and unit of measure The sales quantities and amounts costs serialized item information and sales history are updated in Inventory when you post transactions in Accounts Receivable When Sales Order is interfaced with Inventory the same information is exchanged as with Accounts Receivable In addition the INLDxxx file tracks the quantity
231. le Maintenance Command Bar Definitions This screen has no command bar Saving and Exiting When you save your entries PgDn the first screen you selected from the Items menu appears To exit to the File Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command 11 6 Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Items Items General Information Screen SAS TOIA Gating La mi kien Cznusrml Informazinn Itara Irem iD Dess rigpEinn Cato Irem Type Kittad Iram Track Lors kuro Feurder Baza TOW Sorted Fie lie Cite Fie las r Umriftrmtica LOW Clecerical Package Ganmral Infcrmaticn aoe re males caregory Pl i Homasrimiired Praducr Lines MATIETAL HI Iten Frzcm ID BUILD Ha Tax lass nj imd Lar FED TER iza Wight gonn PEZ User Pelines Fie las Dl Epplicetion BUZEDISG Oz Dapmrtmarnt ELECTRIC Calor Frgmm lt Pgtn gt n procugd Field Definitions Field Name Item ID Description Status Item Type Inventory User s Manual Description The ID of the item you are working with is displayed The description of the item you are working with is displayed Enter or change the status of the item Active Discontinued Superseded Obsolete Enter 1 if the item is nonserialized 2 if the item is serialized or 3 if the item is a service Items File Maintenance Field Name Kitted Item Track Lots Auto Reorder Base UOM Sales Category Product Line
232. list as a reference when you assign cost codes to items Reports A sample Cost Makeup Codes List is on page 14 26 Screen Use Screen Description Cost Makeup Codes List Use the Cost Makeup Codes List screen to select the cost codes that you want in the list Inventory User s Manual 14 23 Cost Makeup Codes List Master Codes List Cost Makeup Codes List Screen C SAS TEN gu DE fmi bjp Cumt Bakeup Codes List Bick Coar Code From Lk Thre UO Output rict KPhirirzmr pF evirt di ila 5porenn E zd Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Enter the range of cost codes you want in the list 14 24 Inventory User s Manual Master Codes List Cost Makeup Codes List Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the list to a printer File Select F to send the list to a file Screen Select S to send the list to the screen End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Master Code Lists menu Saving and Exiting After the list is produced the Master Code Lists menu appears Inventory User s Manual 14 25 Master Codes List Cost Makeup Codes List I obeq Cost Makeup Codes List 33odeN jo puq peeuieAQ AO sTetze ey VW 1oqeT VI uoradiaoseq poo dnexew 3s02 ASTT s poo dnexew 31902 Wd LST Atddns szepttng 6661 L0 80 Inventory User s Manual 14 26 User Defined Fields List Features Use the User Defined Fields List function
233. lls gano i c5DO gold z1g27 0000 2 2500 Mold z1A22H 0000 2 2500 Sold Lime Ho joO0001 of 000179 Entec medic Append Goto Best m reuen Frevipur zcrggn Field Definitions Field Name Description Item ID The ID of the item you are working with is displayed Location The location you selected on the Item Locations screen is displayed Description The description of the item is displayed Units The default unit of measure is displayed Serial Number The serial numbers for the item are displayed Unit Price The unit price of the item is displayed Unit Cost The unit cost of the item is displayed 11 38 Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Item Locations Field Name Status Description The status of the serialized item is displayed Available the item is new and available for sale In use the item has been sold but the invoice has not been posted Sold the item has been sold and the invoice has been posted Lost the serialized item was lost when a physical count was taken Command Bar Definitions Command Enter edit Append Next screen Previous screen Saving and Exiting Description Move the prompt to the line you want to edit and press Enter Press A to add a lot to the item Press N to go to the next screen you selected or to return to the Item Locations screen if the Serial Numbers screen is the last screen you selected Press P to go to the previous screen or t
234. m status For example if you want to change the status of an item from active to discontinued the only place you need to change the status is at the item level When you change the status of the item to discontinued all the statuses for the item at the location level will be converted to discontinued The following list shows the relationship between the item status and the item location status Item Status Item Location Status Active Active Discontinued Obsolete Superseded Discontinued Discontinued Obsolete Superseded Inventory User s Manual Setup Entering Your Data Item Status Item Location Status Obsolete Obsolete Superseded Superseded Superseded If the item is active the item location status can be active discontinued obsolete or superseded If the item is discontinued the item location status can be discontinued obsolete or superseded If the item is obsolete the item location status can be obsolete or superseded If the item is superseded the item location status can be only superseded When you enter transactions the system reads the status of the item location You cannot purchase an item with obsolete discontinued or superseded status and you cannot sell an item with obsolete status 6 Enter the default forecast type The forecast type assigned to the item is used in the calculation of the reorder point if you are using the forecast type method Inventory Value The item value COGS adjustmen
235. mation 2 29 error log conversion A 4 error messages B 1 Esc Command help 1 13 1 29 inquiry command 1 33 exceptions 3 18 Execute an Operating System Command D 5 exit from inquiry window 1 33 from report to menu 1 34 from screen or window 1 13 1 30 extended cost 2 29 F F1 function key 1 13 1 18 1 29 F2 function key 1 29 F3 function key 1 29 scroll region command 1 35 F4 function key 1 13 1 29 F5 function key 1 29 F6 function key 1 30 F7 inquiry command 1 33 report command 1 34 F8 function key 1 30 FIFO 2 9 File Maintenance menu functions 1 6 files deleting 3 24 descriptions C 1 purging 3 24 source A 3 forecast method for calculating reorders 3 16 IX 3 Index Forecast Types function 12 13 screen 12 14 setting up 2 15 Forecast Types List function 14 19 sample 14 22 Freeze Quantities function 10 7 when to 3 19 function keys Ctrl F 1 30 Ctrl G 1 14 1 30 Ctrl V 1 30 Esc 1 13 1 29 F1 1 29 F2 1 13 1 29 F3 1 29 F4 1 29 F5 1 29 F6 1 30 F7 1 13 1 30 F8 1 30 PgDn 1 30 PgUp 1 14 1 30 Shift F2 1 30 Tab 1 14 1 30 Up Arrow 1 30 G general information setting up 2 20 General Information Inquiry function D 12 General Ledger installation order 2 3 interface 2 9 3 21 Generate Purchase Requisitions 3 17 function 6 11 GL accounts setting up 2 28 GL adjustments posting 3 13 GL Adjustments Journal fu
236. more information Starting OSAS To start OSAS on a Windows machine double click the OSAS icon on the desktop or in the appropriate folder To start OPEN SYSTEMS Accounting Software on a non Windows machine enter osas at the operating system prompt The command can recognize three parameters t c and a 1 8 Inventory User s Manual Introduction Conventions The terminal ID t is the identification code assigned to the terminal you are using to work with OSAS On multiuser systems each terminal usually has a default ID that was assigned when the terminals were added to the system Use the t parameter only when you want to log on with an ID other than the default ID The terminal parameter is valid only if you are using Resource Manager for LANs The company ID c is the identification code assigned to a company If your System carries two or more companies and you do not enter a company ID the menu of the company entered by the last person who used the terminal appears The access code a is your personal password Refer to the Resource Manager User s Manual for information about assigning passwords The most general expression for getting into OSAS takes all the parameters into account For example if you are on terminal 2 you want to work with company B and the password is lerxst specify that information to enter the system osas t T2 c B a lerxst You can enter the parameters in any order and you can use a
237. n WO Output rice fFbrizzgr p F evirt i ilg Spcrmgmn E od Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Enter the range of items locations product lines and user defined fields you want in the report Print By Select the option by which you want to organize the report Do you want to printby If you want to separate the information by location enter Y if location not enter N 7 4 Inventory User s Manual Reports Inventory Movement Report Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the report to a printer File Select F to send the report to a file Screen Select S to send the report to a screen End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Reports menu Saving and Exiting After the report is produced the Reports menu appears Inventory User s Manual 7 5 Reports Inventory Movement Report Inventory Movement Reportt 08 07 1999 3 14 PM tem ID Description Prod Line Beg Quantity Loc Builders Supply Inventory Movement Report Sold D Returned By Item ID Purchased Transfer In Returned Transfer Out Page 1 Built Adjustments End Quantity 00 Electrical Package 00 Electrical Package 50 Plumbing Package 50 Plumbing Package 200 IEAT AIR Heating Cooling Package 200 HEAT AIR Heating Cooling Package End of Report 0000 MN000 0000 TX000 0000 MN000 0000 TX0
238. n about your items You can enter 16 user defined fields Inventory User s Manual 12 19 User Defined Fields Code Maintenance User Defined Fields Screen Sas TUR Gating La Fw kb Fisid Demzripricra 1 Splat lon 1 Wepnmrrrssmr n 1 Color 7 4 B Batt Bequezce 1 Taar Dafinmd Jort 1 Z Tacgr Defingd Fock r Variftrmticm Field Definitions 12 20 Field Name User Defined Field Field Description Type Field Value Description Uawr Drfinmgd Fisld Sorta _ 5 13 10 14 11 15 12 1 Product Lire Prima 03 Color Beossdnri Tertiary Ft imac 229 Product Lire Beocomdsry a Gola Tertiary Poems lt Pgin gt n prccgmd Description Enter a number between 1 and 16 for each user defined field Enter or change the description of the field that you want to appear whenever you are prompted for user defined fields The type of user defined field sorted or unsorted is displayed User defined fields 1 and 2 are sorted user defined fields 3 to 16 are unsorted Enter or change the field values for the user defined field you are working with Enter or change the description of the field value Inventory User s Manual Code Maintenance User Defined Fields Command Bar Definitions Command Description Enter edit Move the prompt gt to the field name and description you want to edit and press Enter Append Press A to add a field name and a description
239. n and go to the next or previous screen press N or P respectively To exit to the File Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 11 27 Item Locations File Maintenance Item Locations Cost Information Screen F DAS TAID Fei Cat Du Hain r Tee locsticsa Icat Infczmmtion Irem iB LOW Lea Lon CAD Demzrigrinn Clecerical Package Urita BEG Costs Srendercd Cost Emkmup AVEC pS 348 055 Code Deseriprion Cast Cast 348 D i Bara 343 5506 t EO Ceerrides Carrying Gort Percear DENN Crdaring Cour Amt oo Standard Cumt DDoo Cogn Detail nit Bare On Hered Init goar arendsi Coar Lor Munber 12 15 1585 z 000 340 02 ted 12 12 21 1508 3 Dood 345 0182 rT4n zB5 Toral DOC 1435 41 Tm Cort Detail Cota Enter edit kppezd Bst mscraun Poe ACCURA Field Definitions Field Name Description Item ID The ID of the item you are working with is displayed Location The location you selected on the Item Locations screen is displayed Description The description of the item is displayed Units The unit of measure you are working with is displayed Average Enter or change the weighted average cost of the item regardless of the costing method you are using 11 28 Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Field Name Last Base Carrying Cost Percent Ordering Cost Amt Code Description Cost Standard Cost Init Date On Hand Inventory User s Manual Item Locations
240. n window to copy any of the following information price information customer level pricing cost summary information vendor information e bin information To add locations to the item you are working with press A the Append Location window appears Note You must assign one location for each item If you choose to add or edit location information price information cost information vendor information bin information lot numbers and serial numbers see the explanations below Inventory User s Manual 2 25 Entering Your Data Setup 2 26 If you did not identify the item as a lotted or a serialized item in the Items function you cannot maintain the Lot Information or Serial Numbers screens If you are entering a new item you must enter location information Location Information Default Information The default information you set up on the Location Information screen is used at the item location level Enter the default vendor ID Enter the default bin number It appears in Physical Inventory reports and on picking slips Enter the default price ID Enter the number of days it takes the default vendor to ship the item to you The default lead time is used in the calculation of the order point for the item You can assign a status to both an item and an item location When assigning statuses remember that the item is the primary source the item location status is dependent on the ite
241. nal specific table enter the table ID plus the four character terminal ID Copy From This field appears if you entered a new table ID To copy a company specific or a terminal specific table enter the table ID plus the company and terminal ID Description Enter or change the description of the table Number of Cols The number of columns in the table is displayed Column Length The length of the columns in the table is displayed 11 64 Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Tables Field Name Description Type The type of characters you can enter in the table is displayed alphanumeric A numeric N or numeric with one to four decimal places Although you can change the type you cannot enter any other type of character than the table originally specified Command Bar Definitions This screen has no command bar Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the File Maintenance menu use the Proceed PgDn command Inventory User s Manual 11 65 Tables File Maintenance INPDxxx Table The INPDxxx table holds three fields that are used to define the fiscal year The first field is unused the second is the fiscal year and the third is the number of periods per year Enter the table ID INPDxxx xxx is the company ID INSTDxxx Table The INSTDxxx table holds one field that is used to define the standard cost materials code default This field is the material code Enter the table ID INSTDxxx xxx i
242. nction 5 67 producing 3 12 IX 4 sample 5 70 GL Adjustments log 5 74 Global Inquiry command D 9 goods received status purchase transactions 3 7 Gross Profit Analysis Report function 8 19 sample 8 22 H Help function key 1 29 Home inquiry command 1 33 report command 1 34 scroll region command 1 35 I IDs setting up 2 5 INAIxxx file purging 3 24 Information function key 1 30 Information Inquiry menu functions 1 5 Information menu accessing 1 30 INHIxxx file purging 3 25 INHSxxx file purging 3 25 INLHxxx file purging 3 25 INLTxxx file purging 3 24 INPDxxx table 2 14 11 66 INPPxxx file purging 3 24 Inquiry function key 1 29 partial key 1 32 1 33 inquiry commands Down Arrow 1 33 End 1 32 Enter 1 33 Esc 1 33 F7 1 33 Inventory User s Manual Index Home 1 33 Ins 1 33 PgDn 1 32 PgUp 1 32 Up Arrow 1 33 Ins inquiry command 1 33 scroll region command 1 35 Insert line item 1 35 INSHxxx file purging 3 25 INSNxxx file purging 3 24 installation conversion 2 3 methods 2 3 preparing data access codes 2 12 choosing costing methods 2 9 defining types of inventory items 2 5 options and interfaces 2 9 organizing items 2 5 setting up codes 2 5 prerequisites 2 3 INSTDxxx table 11 66 interface Accounts Payable 2 9 2 10 Accounts Receivable 2 9 2 10 Bill of Materials Kitting 2 9 2 10 General Ledger 2 9 3 21 Purchase Order 2 9 2 10 3 17
243. neral screen appears Press R to view pricing information about the item location The Unit Price Information screen appears Press O to view the other locations for the item The Item Locations screen appears To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 4 47 Item Locations Information Inquiry View Price Information Window 3KTTTRTT T itmm Loc amp tinus Irem 1B Loo Lest lon CADDDI Description Clecerical Packsge Uni View Freice Irnfnrxmtz cn km Unkle berg Elnimwum FEL FEG 4 Unit of Measures PEG ITF DDD erage Price 180 B7 18 Hase Fripe E28 pig Limt Frics S35 9200 Hinimum Price TI DD GOO ct ODER Qumr ity Pramkm Cust Eu D scELp CmnbLikg fs Pelee 05 Sines Piai AcCEOUE io Bui B OOU SE mb sO TEF z 5000 s 3 gt 8 4 s 5 OD Poesa any kuy Lire Ho 000001 of 0D Field Definitions The information in the View Price Information window comes from the Edit Price Information window in the File Maintenance Item Locations function Command Bar Definitions This window has no command bar Saving and Exiting To exit to the Unit Price Information screen press any key 4 48 Inventory User s Manual Costs and Vendors Features Use the Costs and Vendors function on the Information Inquiry menu to view an item s costs and the vendors that are set up for each item location Rep
244. ng To save your entries and exit to the Price Information screen use the Proceed PgDn command To exit to the Price Information screen without saving your entries use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 11 43 Item Locations File Maintenance Edit Vendor Information Window pss TED Irem iB Dess ripgrinn Lun Cle Verear Veron m ELLOGL 757223DH Vendor ID ELLOOL Vendor s Part Last Order Lasr Order Cast Order Lust Seder hy Casar Ric Tate Tee Loceticos Wazuinr Irfurzatzun Location BADE srrical Package Units BEG Lash P Fart Humber Lead Quantic 7 Unir Camr bacs IE s n 2 0000 3 3500 12 21 1929 Edit emdnr Izfurweriarn Hama Lem Tima 3 0 Teankhity BETAS Tore ss PAT Quarr iTy Goan Unita Unita faoe 1 Good 341 FEG 2 0000 Pro 1 ono 4 5500 cea s aonni 1 OO 2000 12 21 1773 1 QUUD E oo Lime Ho joOO0001 of ODDO Field Definitions Field Name Vendor ID Name Lead Time Vendor s Part 11 44 Description If you are editing a vendor record the vendor ID you selected to edit is displayed If you are adding a vendor record enter the vendor s ID If you are editing a vendor record the name is displayed If you are adding a vendor record enter the vendor s name Enter or change the number of days it usually takes the vendor to ship the item to you Enter or change the number the vendor uses to identify the item This informati
245. nr Froe BUIL DIK User Defined nrr Thru INZERIGOE 1 Frint Ea cabicu InPormaticn TI Price ImifBormarinn Wa Cost Izfnrmatiun I Vendor Inform ion bet 3in Inforsariocn wea Lot Infarmwricn I5 Ferial Information TEN Output cevirt CPicintec pF evinr W ilg Shzrumm E zd Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Enter the range of items locations and user defined fields you want in the list Print By Select the option by which you want to organize the list Print Enter Y for each type of information you want to include in the list Enter N for each type you want to exclude 13 12 Inventory User s Manual Master File Item Locations List Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the list to a printer File Select F to send the list to a file Screen Select S to send the list to the screen End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Master File Lists menu Saving and Exiting After the list is produced the Master File Lists menu appears Inventory User s Manual 13 13 Master File Item Locations List Item Locations List uorq8u20juT SOD SOx 0000 0Z eotid peqeqtnote9 3oe413u0 saep rng eov 10030 iouUo1d queujsnlpy eseg Coy uor3adraos q TAT 3sno S 9Ae Jeuoisnj 0000 0000 S 0000 0000 y 0000 0000 0000 0000 4 0068 2S 0000 8 T 0000 SLE 00S6 SES 00vS 8cG ST1v6 80G Oud py eotad Aqrquend e
246. ns In this manual we use these terms for using the mouse click right click double click and deselect The click is a single press on the left mouse button Place the cursor over the desired function and press the left button to enable or select that function A right click is a single press of the right mouse button To double click move the cursor over the desired function and quickly press the left mouse button twice If there is too long a pause between clicks the computer may interpret your action as two separate clicks and may not perform the desired function Inventory User s Manual 1 7 Conventions Introduction To deselect an object move the cursor off the icon or folder onto a blank space within the window and press the left mouse button Some mouse manufacturers allow you to change the function of the mouse buttons for those who prefer for example to use the mouse with their left hand In this case reverse the commands when you use them For example a click refers to a single press of the right mouse button while the term right click refers to a single press of the left button and so on OSAS Conventions Operations in OSAS follow conventions or patterns The conventions used in OSAS applications are presented below Running OSAS OSAS memory and disk space requirements vary according to the operating system you use and the size of your data file Consult the Resource Manager User s Manual for
247. nsaction information produced in the Inventory Transactions function C 4 Inventory User s Manual References File Descriptions INTTxxx Transactions Transfers The INTTxxx file stores transfer information produced in the Inventory Transactions function INUDxxx User Defined Fields The INUDxxx file stores verification values for each user defined field INUMXxxx Unit of Measure The INUMxxx file stores unit of measure conversion factor penalty type and penalty amount information for each item INUPxxx Units Pricing The INUPxxx file stores unit of measure pricing information for each item location INVExxx Items The INVExxx file stores general information for each item INVIxxx Vendor Information The INVIxxx file stores vendor specific information for each item location INXTxxx Additional Descriptions The INXTxxx file stores additional descriptions for each item Inventory User s Manual C 5 Other Commands Calculator Use the Calculator function to do basic math calculations You can store and retrieve totals and tapes add comments to tapes and print tapes A common use is to calculate a total exit from the Calculator and enter the total into the field you started from Select Calculator from the Other Commands menu The function screen appears Emmnry zFunztin nna 0 00 ZuhtntaL cS Corment itl Tape Trinr Tage ETI View Tapa UF 2E e TL Erxwmm Tepe fC rz LIESE En
248. nter or change the date of the purchase Period Enter or change the period of the purchase Year The current year is displayed Loc ID Enter the ID of the location of the item Item ID Enter the ID of the item that was purchased The quantity on hand and available appear at the bottom of the screen 5 16 Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Inventory Transactions Field Name Adjust Acct Quantity Units Cost Std Cost Ext Cost Ext Std Comment Description If the adjustment is an increase in inventory enter a credit account If the adjustment is a decrease in inventory enter a debit account If you are entering a new order this field is skipped Enter or change the quantity that was purchased Enter or change the unit of measure The last cost of the item is displayed If you use the standard costing method the standard cost is displayed The extended cost quantity x cost is displayed The extended standard cost quantity x standard cost is displayed Enter additional information about the transaction Command Bar Definitions This window has no command bar Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the Inventory Transactions screen use the Proceed PgDn command To exit to the Inventory Transactions screen without saving your entries use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 17 Inventory Transactions Daily Work Lot Entry Window Faing La Pe bep
249. ntered in the Standard Cost Makeup Codes function use the Cost Makeup Codes List function on the Master Code Lists menu Screen Use Screen Description Standard Cost Makeup Use the Standard Cost Makeup Codes screen to define the Codes cost makeup codes used in the calculation of standard costs Inventory User s Manual 12 17 Standard Cost Makeup Codes Code Maintenance Standard Cost Makeup Codes Screen F BSAS TAI r Ztaudmrd Cumt Rakegup Ccdeg i i be Lpr z ab tr rm Umrifirmticz Frgmm lt Pgln gt u proceed Field Definitions Field Name Description Cost Code Enter the cost code whose information you want to add or change Description Enter or change the description of the cost code Command Bar Definitions This screen has no command bar Saving and Exiting To save your entries use the Proceed PgDn command To exit to the Code Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command 12 18 Inventory User s Manual User Defined Fields Features Use the User Defined Fields function on the Code Maintenance menu to set up and maintain user defined fields which identify particular information about items that can be selected for most reports Reports To produce a list of the information entered in the User Defined Fields function use the User Defined Fields List function on the Master Code Lists menu Screen Use Screen Description User Defined Fields Use the User Defined Fields screen to set up additional informatio
250. ntities in the Inventory Transactions or Location Transfers functions Enter the serial number in the Edit Serial Information window of the Serial Numbers screen Then enter a status for the serial number a comment about the serial number the date the item was received into your inventory the purchase cost of the serial number and the price of the serial number When you are setting up serial numbers you can enter a lost status for your historical records without affecting the on hand quantity However if you change the status of a serial item to ost after quantities have been entered the on hand quantity is reduced by 1 The vendor and customer information after a sale or a purchase is displayed Inventory User s Manual 2 31 Entering Your Data Setup Promotional Pricing Set up promotional pricing for a group of price IDs customer levels item IDs location IDs units and user defined fields in the Promotional Pricing function Promotional pricing is the last price the system checks when assigning a price for an item If more than one promotional price is set up the one closest to the current date is the default Enter a promotional price ID or copy an existing ID Then enter a description of the promotional price ID and the start and end dates of the promotional price select which price ID customer levels item IDs location IDs units and user defined fields you want the promotional pricing to affect and enter
251. nts Receivable or not you have two options Convert Inventory from version 5 0x to 6 00 e Create Inventory files then set up the location and tax group information before converting Accounts Payable This method is recommended only if you want to reenter all tax information Inventory User s Manual References Conversion Converting to Version 6 00 When you select Data File Conversion from the Company Setup menu the function screen appears Ai tio gue La Port tjap r Bete Tilm Conmveceion Bels dipecroEg9 OF which Z Create Elles 1 Cy CEL maray La 1 Entec dirm tcry thet rnnta ns the filam to Es cumvewrtad Dn we gant s uroe files erased alter comverzgicn Dn yom went conmvecmion to gmums sf m prchlam ig fourd kippi Beaoription Vereinn Appi Deeariprian Version The conversion process is automatic and invisible to you Simply specify path names of the source and destination files the application and a couple of preferences 1 Select the target directory from the list The system assigns a number to each OSAS data path with assigned values 2 Enter the path drive and directory that has the files you want to convert You cannot enter the same path as the destination path 3 Ifyou want source files to be erased after conversion enter Y if not or if you are not sure enter N When you are sure that the conversion has been completed successfully you can delete your old data files I
252. nventory User s Manual A 3 Conversion References 4 Ifyou want the conversion process to pause when a problem occurs enter Y if not enter N The system considers evidence of data not converting correctly or file corruption a problem Whether you enter Y or N the system creates an error log called CNVTLOG in the DATA subdirectory 5 Enter IN at the bottom of the screen in the APPL column Then enter the present version number and press Enter When you enter OSAS the copyrights screen shows the version of Inventory you have 6 If data files already exist for Inventory in the intended destination path the following prompt appears IN Data files exist Do you want this task to erase them If you want to erase the existing files and convert the files from the version in the source path enter Y If you enter N you must change your entries so that no conflict exists 7 To convert use the Proceed PgDn command 8 The following prompt appears Do you wish a printout of error log after each application If you want the error log to be produced after the files are converted for each application enter Y if you want the log to be produced after all the files are converted enter N If you are converting only Inventory files your answer to this prompt makes no difference If a prompt appears when a problem occurs enter Y to stop the conversion process or N to let the conversion run its course 9 When the process is finished
253. ny combination You must leave a space between the parameter mark t c or a and the parameter itself Menu Conventions When you start OSAS the Main menu which presents the applications you can use appears If you are using the Resource Manager for UNIX the Text menu appears If you are using the Resource Manager for Windows you can choose between the Text Menu Graphical Menu or Start Menu In Windows use the Workstation Configuration Defaults function in Resource Manager to select the style of menu you want displayed The following pages describe how you use each of these types of menus Inventory User s Manual 1 9 Conventions Introduction Favorites Menu The Favorites menu operates in the text based format as well as in the graphical formats The Favorites menu allows quick and easy access to the OSAS functions you use most allowing you to add selections for entire menus or particular functions With the Favorites menu you save time in no longer switching to and from commonly accessed applications For example if you have application entries in Transactions Accounts Payable Transfer Journals Inventory and Edit Transactions General Ledger rather than moving through each application menu by menu you could set up a Favorites Menu where with one press of the enter key or a click of a button your function would be open for work Favorites Menu Graphical Style For Favorites Menu set up information see p
254. o Ai OO LT 131084 maol Oocunnpaoo LT ii FOO ooc nnoo LTALIO Description Goto Fr duct Fhyzicul Counts Focrkszhaest Entry Dno t ng ooann j Frozen Oly 1 2000 DOO nonu 0000 ooo 2000 coon Kprpend Paich IL Irem 0001 of DOO2415 CUAL Of Unless 0000 Es n nn pi Doon ER 0000 rk paan Fi guum EL 0000 ER Enter the location ID for the physical count Enter the item ID for the batch Enter the bin number for the item Enter the unit of measure for the item Enter the tag number for the batch Enter or change the counted quantity of the item Enter the serial number of the item Enter the lot number for the item Inventory User s Manual Physical Inventory Physical Counts Worksheet Entry Command Bar Definitions This window has no command bar Saving and Exiting To exit to the Physical Counts Worksheet Entry screen use the Proceed PgDn command Inventory User s Manual 10 31 Physical Counts Worksheet Entry Physical Inventory Selected Sort Window E naas Tiii Gaig Ld Dus bjp r FPhysicml Ccuntz Pockshest Entry Barci Barani Batch a lactad Sort i Lansrica Bin Icem I Lurmtica Prcemct Iram Bin Field Definitions Field Name Description Selected Sort Select how you want the information to be displayed Command Bar Definitions This window has no command
255. o highest and dashes represent blank spaces T 0 n l Z a PIE NOE 01 ELE ee 000000 000001 1 The organization of these codes illustrates the following principles e The system reads codes from left to right until it finds something other than a blank space tems that make up a code are always listed alphabetically The items are listed in this order for each position blank spaces characters numbers 0 9 uppercase letters A Z lowercase letters a z Numbers are sorted as if they were letters When the first characters of several IDs are compared the ID with the smallest first character is placed first in the list If the first character of the IDs is the same the second characters are compared and the ID with the smallest second character is placed first in the list This comparison is made for each character in the range of IDs until they are in alphabetical order For example in the alphabetical sorting ID 112 comes before ID 60 since anything that starts with 1 comes before anything that starts with 6 alphabetically Inventory User s Manual Setup Setup Considerations Listed below are some suggestions for setting up codes and IDs e To prevent organization problems use zeros to make all IDs the same length If IDs are divided into more than one part the part should be the same length in every ID Do not use spaces to divide IDs into more than one part For example us
256. o return to the Item Locations screen if the Serial Numbers screen is the first screen you selected To save the information and go to the next or previous screen press N or P respectively To exit to the File Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 11 39 Item Locations File Maintenance Append Location Window DEAS TaN Itum Locations Ires Dss ripEinn Unita Ek Lucmticcm Loc On Hand Cumi Ted Ln Das kumi Labbe On Order AMG Append Lccarion pun Loe 18 cmm Copy From bo You Vane o Deep Do You Sent Price In ormation TEX Lec cu mer Level Pricing TE Pril Cosr dummacy nf ormarinn TE Coun Verior Information TE Wen Bin lIzfurmatiun7 TET Ein Lert Trrim Numbers TES Field Definitions Field Name Loc ID Copy From Do You Want to Copy 11 40 Description Enter the ID of the location record you want to add Enter the ID of the location record you want to copy Enter Y or N for each option to indicate whether or not you want to copy the information from the location record Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Item Locations Command Bar Definitions This window has no command bar Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the Item Locations screen use the Proceed PgDn command To exit to the Item Locations screen without saving your entries use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 11 41 Item Loc
257. o the Periodic Processing menu without producing the log Saving and Exiting After the log is produced the Periodic Processing menu appears Inventory User s Manual 9 17 Periodic Process Year End Maintenance Log Year End Maintenance 33odey jo pus 0000 0000 0000 0000 TOOOCN 006 3902 M N 3soo PTO Aqtquend men Aqrquend pTO AequnN JOT uoTIeOD0T qI weil UuOT3eOTJT3 A SSOIJ Aqrauen Wd 6v c I obeq Atddng szepttng 6661 L0 80 Inventory User s Manual 9 18 Purge Selected Files Features Use the Purge Selected Files function on the Periodic Processing menu to delete information you no longer need from selected files Reports No report is associated with this function Screen Use Screen Description Purge Selected Files Use the Purge Selected Files screen to delete the following out of date information serial numbers lot numbers bin numbers alternate items physical count information promotional pricing serial history lot history detail history summary history Inventory User s Manual 9 19 Purge Selected Files Periodic Process Purge Selected Files Screen Sas TON Seis Cat fmi kid There Dmlata Zero Oak ley Loe Literate Irene wich Fed Bates Before Frumnticzal Pricing with End Jabes Before Bias jLE Last Fhyjsic amp Count Dale Before Seriaslired History sre Husbers wich Invnice barnes Before Lot History with Detuil History with Transactiun Dates Before em
258. ocs Huger Unita E4 WeaxLlapbe Avg Vein Cost Expires TY n or Srarus a noc E 3 OG TOAD dAvailasia OOO z z sn TEADOL Sold Edit Ent Inf Emari hn Expires Zrmtum divei lable Original Purc amp ase Leforeat bon B Op venm nr 13 Tni cun Hamm ot nn film OD 6 Celi Erg er 2000 FP OCGUDDZ 1 Tava Lor 22420 a uch Unit Cort 2 2500 EA Lire Ho M001 of ODE Prgmm zPFgDn n proceed Field Definitions Field Name Lot No Expires Comment Status Received Sold Returned 11 46 Description Enter or change the number of the lot Enter or change the expiration date of the lot Enter a comment or additional information about the lot Enter A if the lot is available S if the entire lot has been sold or E if the lot has expired Enter or change the received quantity in the lot before any was sold or returned Enter or change the quantity sold in the lot Enter or change the quantity returned in the lot Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Item Locations Field Name On Hand Committed In Use Available On Order PO Vendor ID Name PO Number PO Date Invoice Number Invoice Date Purch Unit Cost Description The quantity on hand in the lot is displayed Enter or change the number of units in the lot that is reserved Enter or change the quantity that has been invoiced but not posted in the lot The quantity available for sale in the lot the on hand quantity minu
259. ol 000701 3unooov 00 cL vc189 cL vcCT89 TeIOL Z0 9po2 T 00 VL T196c VL T96c 0000 0000 FE 0000 rE V4 2000 TOL Elwa 00 2S SSZT cG GGCT 0000 0000 p69ST 0000 6 69ST V4 2000 66600L ELVE 00 89 v6 89 v6 0000 0000 9 0000 9 V4 COOONW 86600L eld 00 TL SvG TL SvG 0000 0000 196 0000 1967 V4 2000 00v00L IVg 00 0c L81 07 L8T 0000 0000 06 0000 06 V4 2000 00 00L ELVE 00 09 S8T 09 S8T 0000 0000 16 0000 16 V4 c000NW 00c00L elvd 00 GL TSST SL TGST 0000 0000 SZ 0000 Sc V4 2000 66100L ELVE 00 9L lLC IL TIL 0000 0000 z 9 0000 c 9 ZO 000 OtI00L EIv 00 V9 vGt V9 PSE 0000 0000 289 0000 289 ZO Z000NN OcI00L eld 00 06 vG 06 vG 0000 0000 ST 0000 ST Las Z000 61100L ELVE 00 79 17 59 17 0000 0000 v 0000 v V4 2000 LITOOL amp l1Vd 00 Sp 981 Sv 981 0000 0000 ST 0000 ST Wa c000NW STTOOL eva 00 0S L 0S L 0000 0000 0000 V4 2000 1100L ELVE 00 AMAA Vy 27 0000 0000 2T 0000 2T Las Z000 ZITTOOL Elwa 00 00 cL 00 cL 0000 0000 0021 0000 0021 ZO Z000NN TIII00L IVg 00 0S 18L9 0S T8L9E 0000 0000 SZS 0000 SZS V4 2000 TITOOL Elva 00 S6 v88v S6 v88v 0000 0000 S8 0000 S8 V4 2000 OTTOOL eld 00 OL v8981 0L v898T 0000 0000 0L1 0000 0L1 V4 c000NW 00100L elvd 00 VL v09 hL t09 TeIOL TOOONN QI uoT4eooT 00 VL v09 VL v09 Tea3ol OOPPOT 3unooov 00 VL v09 VL v09 TeIOL I0 pOO T 00 VL v09 VL v09 0000 0000 0000 Las T000NW 00L Erva 9n eA SoueTIeA en eA
260. om the Item Locations function The field descriptions are in the Item Locations function 11 3 Items File Maintenance Screen Description Append Location Use the Append Location window to copy information from window an existing item record Additional Descriptions The Additional Descriptions window appears if you elected to window use additional descriptions in the Options and Interfaces function in Resource Manager Use it to enter additional information about an item 11 4 Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Items Items Screen F ISAS TID Gaig Lx Due bjp Leem Irem TD ion Description Electrical Package Do Yow Wart ra HMairmaina rneral Informatica TES nite of Reasure THE YES Item Location TES r Vmriftrmticm Pome lt Pgin gt n proceed Field Definitions Field Name Description Item ID Enter the ID of the item whose information you want to add or change Copy From This field appears if you entered a new item ID Enter the ID of the item whose information you want to copy Description Enter a description of the item If you elected to use additional descriptions in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function the Additional Descriptions window appears Do You Want to Enter Y for each screen you want to work on enter N for each Maintain screen you do not want to work on If you are adding new items you must enter general information Inventory User s Manual 11 5 Items Fi
261. ommand bar 6 12 Inventory User s Manual Reorder Processing Generate Purchase Requisitions Saving and Exiting To save your entries use the Proceed PgDn command To exit to the Reorder Processing menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 6 13 Reports Inventory Movement Report Item Status Report Price Report Valuation Report Cost Variance Report Serialized History Report Lot History Report Transaction History Report Inventory User s Manual 7 3 7 7 7 11 7 15 7 19 7 23 7 27 7 31 7 1 Inventory Movement Report Features Use the Inventory Movement Report function on the Reports menu to print summarized information about transactions and transfers and to show beginning and ending balances of selected items Reports A sample Iventory Movement Report is on page 7 6 Screen Use Screen Description Inventory Movement Use the Inventory Movement Report screen to select the Report items locations product lines and periods you want in the report Inventory User s Manual 7 3 Inventory Movement Report Reports Inventory Movement Report Screen ATTONITUS m nny mnt aport A Pick Irem 13 Trus i60 Prize fy Thru 200 1 Item ID Lacarica LP Feo MUI PEoduct Lir Thru THONI Appilicarinn Frnduc Lirm Foom AFFLIAMCI Dmpartrarnt Thru MATERIAL User PeTined Bort 1 Pericc Tenr From 3 1055 User befined Jorr 2 Thru lif Lane ka gn Um Ae ou ki Zu You Want tc Print By Locatio
262. on Screen DEAS DU Being La mit tjip Iter Locations Irem HD Loo Dem zrigrinn Clesertcal FPFacksge Deteulta Eendor Ib ELLE Bin Humber I in Price ID BHILD Cee Tine ta rarus kur iwe Fnracummt Typa BES lmeentorEyg Value Irem Value 436 41 COGS Rdjumtmant ag Adiusted Vala 2438 41 frie uanriries Guanine Statue Hnxrimum Cty LD Cau Gr der Point 1 5000 Calc Safety Itok 0000 Cale EOQ 1 0000 Calc Hin Order OLF Pa OU 0 r Umriftrmricm Prom Loret ion Information mn r lsyentory WIR l1zvmntorT Paroh tya Cm Hand ugat k z In Tee irai Lila Cm Order ZPgDbn amp o prccummd CUB bdgjustment Prio Com Transfer Cost CPO Locarion CADOS Unita PEG GL A rcomnem cake OL 03069 niooc tiati AE Fin s Adjuscmmrt Losec 342056 E WVerisnoe SEX Var cance Zusanoo 102006 Irem Quanririem Field Definitions Field Name Item ID Location displayed Description Units Vendor ID Bin Number Price ID Inventory User s Manual Description The ID of the item you are working with is displayed The location you selected on the Item Locations screen is The description of the item is displayed The unit of measure you are working with is displayed Enter or change the vendor you usually buy the item from Enter or change the bin number where the item is stored Enter or change the price ID for the item 11 21 Item Locations Fie
263. on is displayed depends on the selection you made 10 28 Inventory User s Manual Physical Inventory Physical Counts Worksheet Entry Field Name Frozen Qty Counted Qty Units Description If you elected to show frozen quantities in the Physical Inventory Selection function the system s quantity is displayed The counted quantity for the item is displayed The unit of measure for the item is displayed Command Bar Definitions Command Enter edit Location Append Saving and Exiting Description Move the prompt gt to the line you want to edit and press Enter The Edit Physical Count window appears Press O to go the Location ID field and change the location Press A to add tag numbers The Append Physical Count window appears To exit to the Physical Inventory menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 10 29 Physical Counts Worksheet Entry Physical Inventory Append Edit Physical Count Window F aan Mia Baron Barani Prnduc z Lire APPLTAHCE Irem Ih Bim ID lee Hunder 10000 LED135 ico L20153 L 19 Bo L 13 Cate L 1 moo L i5 au L 15 Field Definitions 10 30 Field Name Location Item ID Bin No Unit of Measure Tag Number Counted Qty Serial Number Lot Number Enter edit Bat ch Loc Iib Tas Ho Serial Husker mool occnnnno 1232LFB amp 2 Hunni oo nnno 1232XBF24 Zidi oo nnpno Hpo ul oOoc nno
264. on is printed on the orders produced in Purchase Order Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Item Locations Field Name Last Order Qty Units Last Order Cost Last Order No Last Order Date Quantity 1 5 Cost Units Description Enter or change the last quantity ordered from the vendor Enter or change the number of units you last ordered from the vendor Enter or change the cost of the last order Enter or change the order number of the last purchase made from the vendor Enter or change the date the last order was placed with the vendor Enter or change the quantity you must purchase before receiving the cost adjustment from the vendor Enter or change the vendor s unit cost for the quantity adjustment The default unit of measure is displayed Command Bar Definitions This window has no command bar Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the Vendor Information screen use the Proceed PgDn command To exit to the Vendor Information screen without saving your entries use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 11 45 Item Locations File Maintenance Edit Lot Information Window C USAS TEN Irem iD ditt Description Jerisa Lor number 120135 Lie oo Lor Ro igisa Co taa LE 16s Rene ved Sold Returned Cn Hand Committed In liz kvailanle On Ordac Po r Vsariftraricsm Iter Lurmticza Let Information Loan Lin SH D
265. on the Master Code Lists menu to produce a list of your user defined fields Reports A sample User Defined Fields List is on page 14 30 Screen Use Screen Description User Defined Fields List Use the User Defined Fields List screen to select the user defined fields that you want in the list Inventory User s Manual 14 27 User Defined Fields List Master Codes List User Defined Fields List Screen E san Tia Tazmr Dafinmd Fields Liat Pick Field Wosbee From i Thru 15 fPbrizzgr p P evinr m ilg S czrzgmn E zd Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Enter the range of field numbers between 1 and 16 you want in the list 14 28 Inventory User s Manual Master Codes List User Defined Fields List Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the list to a printer File Select F to send the list to a file Screen Select S to send the list to the screen End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Master Code Lists menu Saving and Exiting After the list is produced the Master Code Lists menu appears Inventory User s Manual 14 29 Master Codes List User Defined Fields List User Defined Fields List sTerz qeW burqumTd STETI JENW TOTS QUI STETI JFEN AOTIS4AXY STETI JEN OI23299TH sTerz 3eW SutTpTing V N SMOPUTM eouer ddy azo ew queueAo4dug euoH sa urqeo burpTrng Y N uot jdtrzoseq NIINA YOTAAINI YOTYALXA OTa
266. option is assigned a window ID whose characteristics were either installed with Resource Manager or set up in the Global Inquiry Definitions function You need the File Descriptions manual when you use this function Setting up a Global Inquiry window is similar to setting up a report in Report Writer If you are not familiar with Report Writer or the operations associated with Business BASIC consult your value added reseller when you add or change a Global Inquiry window You can use the Global Inquiry Definitions and Application Tables functions to establish and update information about Global Inquiry window IDs A simple installation accomplishes the same tasks As a result when you use the Global Inquiry command the windows should be set up and logically connected to each other with convenient categories usually named after applications as options At that point you are ready to choose an option Inventory User s Manual D 9 Other Commands References Select Global Inquiry from the Other Commands menu F4 twice from a menu F4 once from a field then select an application A window appears ESAn Tiia pot Weadoce ET ID gt LL Hie iw Dus Case Pach zobegin gt gt ACEOOI ACE FLUHBIER SUPPLE COMPARE 127345 ATTOSI ATLANTI TELEPHONE CO T3 PGR HORIS COMSTETCTTONM COMPANY i7u n s CLEGG CLEVELAMD INTERIOR INC lH EURO EDDY RPPLINRWCE CI 1080 ELLOO3 ELLIS ELECTRICAL SOFPLT THLG HENOCGI HEMMEFI
267. or The cursor moves to this field when you enter the number of a suggestion you want to recall If the suggestion has not been printed N is displayed If the suggestion has been printed Y is displayed You can change the print status of the current suggestion The last creation and or last edit date of the current suggestion is displayed Enter the description of the suggestion When you have finished creating or editing a suggestion save your entries PgDn and exit to the Main menu Applications Options Inquiry Use the Applications Options Inquiry utility to view the options for any application Select Applications Options Inquiry from the Other Commands menu F4 twice from a menu F4 once from a field After you enter the application ID the options and interfaces selected for the application appear When you are finished viewing the information press any key to continue D 8 Inventory User s Manual References Other Commands Global Inquiry Use the Global Inquiry command from the Other Commands menu to gather information from all the OSAS files and applications with a common field To produce a list of the windows use the Global Inquiry Window List function To produce a report of occurrences where links between windows are not continuous use the Global Inquiry Window Audit Report function The options on the Global Inquiry menu are set up in the PARAM table in the Application Tables function Each
268. orag UmUTUTW orzd 3ST T orzd eseg orzd ebedeAy sarun sye Ig Aqrquen6 UOT3E8UOJUI OT31d 0000 L A30 aepo UTW 0000 9 Od zepzo uo T O 0000 2I oo3 0000 LT STAET TEAL STeD 0000 F yooqs A3ges 0000 1 esp ur TeO 0000 2I 3uTod 3epao 0000 Dp 33TUuNIOO 0000 Sc AIO umurxeq 0000 8T pueH uo snjejg A3raueno serirquenf wey Serirquen zepuo 000 0S 3800 19gSUeJ 000706 pv s909 O0vvOT A1oqueAuT 000705 eouerieA Juno s ud 00vv0T py Azoqueaul 000108 909 00070 souetze OTId young 00Zr0T dIM 000107 SeTes 10 spo TD squnosoy 19 oad ad 4se0970g qiina qI stad AT3OV snqeis 01 3 ZequMN UTE o s SUTL peeT I00TIM GI zopue sarnez a ebexoeg TeOTI3O TH uot Adrzoseq TOOONW uorqeooT 001 dI ue3l qI wy Ag 3STT suor3eooT uel Wd 70 7 I obeg Aqddng saep rng 6661 10 80 Inventory User s Manual 13 14 Location Detail List Features Use the Location Detail List function on the Master File Lists menu to produce a list of all your locations and their IDs descriptions and addresses Reports A sample Location Detail List is on page 13 18 Screen Use Screen Description Location Detail List Use the Location Detail List screen to select the locations that you want in the list Inventory User s Manual 13 15 Location Detail List Master File Location Detail List Screen CTUM gue Ld Dus Bp r Enrmticz Detail List Pick Locarrtan From Wani Thu TXOUUI Print Ey i nosric ID 1 Lo
269. ormation about the worksheet item location bin number unit of measure counted quantity and lot and serial numbers Selected Sort window Use the Selected Sort window to select how you want the information to be displayed Option 2 Location Product Item Bin is used throughout this function Inventory User s Manual 10 27 Physical Counts Worksheet Entry Physical Inventory Physical Counts Worksheet Entry Screen SAS oe Fhyzicul Counts BPockshest Entry barci Barani Barchi Prnduc z Lire APPLTAHCE Oo t Irem ID Loc Iib Tas Ho Frozen Oly CUAL Of Unless Bim ID lee Hunder Serial Husker i loco npoun1 1 2000 0000 Ek Lz0195 ico maii i ODU n nn pi IzD12 1232XBFz4 Ene LADUUI OO Ooo Doon ER L 19 BOC mooo occ nnmoo 2000 0000 Ek L 19 zen Hai on i C woo F L 1 noo Iani Occunnoo 1 000 pooo EA L i5 L TOS 1510E4 a a FOO oOGUDDOO 1 000 0000 ER L 13 LT 15 1 Irem 0001 of DOO2415 Enter edit Goto Fr duct Patch IL Field Definitions Field Name Description Batch Enter the ID of the batch you want to work with Location ID The ID of the location you are working with is displayed Item ID Bin ID Product The item ID bin ID product line tag number if you are using Line Tag No Lot tags and lot and serial numbers in the physical count are Number Serial Number displayed If you are entering exceptions only these fields are blank The order that informati
270. orts No report is associated with this function Screen Use Screen Costs and Vendors Cost Information Costs and Vendors Vendor Information View Price Information window Inventory User s Manual Description Use the Costs Information screen to view an item s costs standard cost makeup EOQ overrides and cost detail Use the Vendor Information screen to view vendors for the item location Use the View Price Information window to view the last quantity purchased cost order number and order date You can also view quantity price breaks for vendors 4 49 Costs and Vendors Information Inquiry Costs and Vendors Cost Information Screen w An Tiii Faing Ka Dmi thp r Cumtzr mad Vendors Coat Information Irem 1p Loo Location END Dem rigrinn CFleserioal Package Unita PHG Comta Zrzanrdimrd Cort Emkmup AVEC Spe 143 5908 Lode Deseriprion Cost Gast 343 5500 Bara 143 5500 t EO Cverrides Carrying Goer Percear CER Crudaring Cout mourt DONI Standard Cort DDoo cese Detail nit Bares On Hand Init Cosr arendsi Coan Lon Munber 5 DO 347 2100 OEL 30 12 000 347 2400 4122 40 Tural 18 DOO 615 5000 Tab Cort Drtmail Meat Poor Gest Ficat Item Lore Vendorr Unita Field Definitions Field Name Description Item ID Enter the ID of the item whose cost information you want to view Location Enter the ID of the location for the item 4 50 Inventory
271. ou have set up access codes for this function If the comment is shared SHARED is displayed If the comment is private PRIVATE is displayed along with the access name Ref ID Enter a reference ID for the comment You can use reference IDs to group comments Inventory User s Manual D 15 Other Commands Field Name End Date Date Comment Command new Id Ref id end Date Append Enter edit print Online Shared Private First Last Next Prev References Description The workstation date is displayed Accept the displayed date or enter a different date Enter a comment Command Bar Definitions Definition Press I to enter a different user ID Press R to enter a different reference ID Press D to change the end date Press A to add a comment Move the prompt gt to the line you want to edit and press Enter Press O to print the comment This command appears only if you have set up access codes for this function Press E to toggle between shared and private comments Shared comments can be viewed by everyone private comments can be viewed only by the person who enters the correct access code Press F to go to the first comment Press L to go to the last comment Press N to go to the next comment Press P to go to the previous comment When you are finished entering comments use the Exit F7 command to return to the screen or menu you accessed the Other Commands menu from Invento
272. ount List Physical Inventory Physical Count List Screen FAS Ve Bmtch ID BiTa Frist By 1 bee Loc iPro Point Exceptions aly Tia 1 Bin t Print Lnt SZariml Murbers TI 4 Frzduck nel J Frint Hizz3ug Entries Only TIS 5 Tag Hummer i Husbarm ir Hatch Output rice fFbrizzgr p E mEvirw Mh iis fSpzremn E zd Field Definitions Field Name Description Batch ID Enter the IDs of the batches you want in the list Print By Select the option by which you want to organize the list Print exceptions only If you want to list only exceptions for the batches enter Y otherwise enter N Printlot serial numbers If you want to list lot and serial numbers for each item enter Y if not enter N Print missing entries If you want to print a list of items that have not been entered only through tags or worksheets enter Y if not enter N 10 38 Inventory User s Manual Physical Inventory Physical Count List Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the list to a printer File Select F to send the list to a file Screen Select S to send the list to the screen End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Physical Inventory menu Saving and Exiting After the list is produced the Physical Inventory menu appears Inventory User s Manual 10 39 Physical Inventory Physical Count List I Physical Count List Va Va Va Va Va 000
273. ounta Teg Iztry Barci BAT Batch F Te Ho Loc Ib Fr duct Lite Fragen Om ALS ony Unless Item ID Win Th Lot Serial Huntar Ires M000 cf O Entec zsdit sxCgpticzz Append Patch Field Definitions Field Name Description Batch Enter the ID of the batch you want to work with Tag No The preassigned tag numbers in the batch are displayed Loc ID Bin ID Item ID The location ID bin ID item ID and lot serial numbers in the Lot Serial Number physical count are displayed If you are entering exceptions only these fields are blank The order that information is displayed depends on the selection you made Frozen Qty If you elected to show frozen quantities in the Physical Inventory Selection function the system s quantity is displayed 10 20 Inventory User s Manual Physical Inventory Physical Counts Tag Entry Field Name Description Counted Qty The counted quantity for the item is displayed Units The unit of measure for the item is displayed Command Bar Definitions Command Description Enter edit Move the prompt gt to the line you want to edit and press Enter The Edit Tags window appears Exceptions Press C to go to the Enter Exceptions window and enter discrepancies in quantities Append Press A to add tag numbers The Append Tags window appears Batch Press B to go to the Batch field and enter a different batch ID Saving and Exiting To exit to the Physical Inventory menu use the Exit
274. override the ordering cost for an item use the Location Information screen in the Item Locations function Command Bar Definitions This screen has no command bar Saving and Exiting To save your entries use the Proceed PgDn command To exit to the File Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 11 53 Price Structures Features Use the Price Structures function on the File Maintenance menu to set up price IDs for your customers Price IDs are assigned to items in the Items function and they are used when you enter invoices or orders in Accounts Receivable Sales Order If you use Inventory as a standalone system you can enter price IDs in the Inventory Transactions function Reports To produce a list of the information entered in the Price Structures function use the Price Structure List function on the Master File Lists menu To produce a price list for items and customer levels use the Price Report on the Reports menu Screen Use Screen Description Price Structures Use the Price Structures screen to set up and maintain price IDs for customer levels Inventory User s Manual 11 55 Price Structures File Maintenance Price Structures Screen sas TAN Gai L Du bjp Price Structurmr Prio LD APPL Descripcion Appliamcs Prices Draakm Cust Lwl besceriprton Adju stmesr Bas ld kg Set WFT Prios Zrrucrure Defends Calo prices 3 O ALEOGL ica Builders Ccarrmct P
275. p 2 12 Account Codes definition 2 15 function 12 9 setting up 2 15 Account Codes List function 14 15 sample 14 18 Accounts Payable installation order 2 3 interface 2 9 2 10 5 3 Accounts Receivable interface 2 9 2 10 5 3 11 55 adding items 3 3 locations 2 25 lots 2 30 additional descriptions option 2 11 adjustment transactions 3 4 adjustments T accounts 3 12 alias alternate 2 23 allow discounts on serialized items option 2 12 alternate items alias 2 23 bar code 2 24 customer IDs 2 23 IDs 2 23 setting up 2 23 superseded 2 24 vendor IDs 2 24 alternate units of measure 2 21 Analysis Reports menu functions 1 6 Inventory User s Manual Index Applications Options Inquiry D 8 available quantity 2 28 average cost definition 2 29 method 2 9 average price 2 28 B backing up data files 2 33 operating system commands 2 33 programs 2 33 using Resource Manager 2 33 Backup function 2 33 bar codes 2 24 base applications definition 1 3 base cost 2 29 base price 2 28 batch IDs 3 17 Batch List function 10 33 producing 3 20 sample 10 36 bell turning on or off 1 14 1 30 Bill of Materials Kitting interface 2 9 2 10 2 21 bin information setting up 2 30 C Calculate Reorders 3 15 EOQ method 3 16 forecast method 3 16 function 6 3 IX 1 Index min max method 3 16 Calculator consecutive calculations D 4 description of D 1 making calcul
276. peaepdo en eA uezoi A30 eouerdeA A30 peaepbdn A360 uezoaa qrun uor3eooT zequny 1oqueAu uoqeg qyrodey uoraenpeA 3qunoo eors ud WY 92 9 I abeg Aqddng szepttng 6661 01 90 Inventory User s Manual 10 48 Update Perpetual Inventory Features Use the Update Perpetual Inventory function after you complete and verify other Physical Inventory functions to update quantities for the items selected in each batch Reports A sample Update Perpetual Inventory Log is on page 10 52 Screen Use Screen Description Update Perpetual Use the Update Perpetual Inventory screen to enter the Inventory batches you want to update to the general ledger Inventory User s Manual 10 49 Update Perpetual Inventory Physical Inventory Update Perpetual Inventory Screen SAS tia Sting LA Fas blip r Vrdatg Furputumi Invertiocy Rave Tou Backed Up Tour Dars Files TEJ Ham Tou Completed Ertaring TEFmirml Inventecy or thm Patches TEE Enter Barchem rc Opdece BRA Foar ariance A amp wecunr to Geyeral Ledger TEX Fost te General Ledger 1 Current Year Files 21 Gast Yaar Filas Cutput device IFirintsz piB evims Ii iie Irina Field Definitions Field Name Description Have you backed up Enter Y or N to indicate whether or not you have backed up your data files your data files If you enter N the Physical Inventory menu appears Have you completed Enter Y or N to indicate whether or not you have completed
277. pplications are interfaced with Inventory use the Rebuild Item Quantities function to update item quantities Back up your data files and make sure that nobody is using the system before you use this function Inventory User s Manual 3 25 Periodic Tasks Work Flow Printing Selected Reports Periodically you will print selected reports to analyze your items and review information needed to make decisions about inventory and your company Use the functions on the Reports menu and the Slow Fast Movement Report function 3 26 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Price and Availability Summary History Detail History Movement History Sales Trending Items Item Locations Costs and Vendors Lot Numbers Serial Numbers Inventory User s Manual 4 3 4 13 4 17 4 21 4 25 4 29 4 39 4 49 4 55 4 59 4 1 Information Inquiry 4 2 Introduction This chapter explains the features and uses of all the screens windows and processes in the Inventory application Screens are presented first windows associated with the screens in a function are presented after a description of all the screens Inventory User s Manual Price and Availability Features Use the Price and Availability function on the Information Inquiry menu to look at the number of items available for sale and the price of the items You can use the price calculator to calculate a price for an item Reports No report is associated wi
278. printer File Select F to send the list to a file End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Physical Inventory menu Saving and Exiting Before the tags are produced the message Mount Tags Now appears Insert the tag forms into the printer and press Enter when you are ready to print The message Is the form aligned appears If the form is aligned enter Y if not enter N and realign the paper After the list is produced the Physical Inventory menu appears Inventory User s Manual 10 13 Print Physical Inventory Tags Physical Inventory Physical Inventory Tags 10 14 Inventory User s Manual Print Physical Inventory Worksheets Features Use the Print Physical Inventory Worksheets function on the Physical Inventory menu to print worksheets which can be used to record a physical count of your inventory Reports A sample Physical Inventory Worksheet is on page 10 18 Screen Use Screen Description Print Physical Inventory Use the Print Physical Inventory Worksheets screen to Worksheets select the information you want on the worksheets Inventory User s Manual 10 15 Print Physical Inventory Worksheets Physical Inventory Print Physical Inventory Worksheets Screen SSA5 TON Gaig Cat Poe bjp Frint TEysi al Imventury Becksherto Beech ED BAT3 Ea rh 1 Print Ni Eeisnr l Lnurmticz Bin I mm E BNeormamrimalirmd Only L tt lu P Een Line bee fin 2 Berlelibed Only Bin Trem
279. ption 2 11 kitted item 2 21 L last cost 2 29 Left Arrow report command 1 34 LIFO 2 9 List function key 1 30 to printer or file 1 30 list price 2 28 location adding 2 25 cost information setting up 2 29 IDs setting up 2 8 information setting up 2 26 price information setting up 2 28 Location Detail List function 13 15 sample 13 18 Location Transfers entering 3 10 function 5 37 Locations definition 2 18 IX 6 function 11 51 setting up 2 18 Look Up inquiry command 1 33 lost status 2 31 lot adding 2 30 information setting up 2 30 lot detail option 2 11 Lot History Report function 7 27 sample 7 30 Lot Numbers function 4 55 lot item lookup command 1 34 lotted items 2 21 2 29 3 4 lotted serialized items 2 29 3 4 Maintenance function key 1 30 makeup codes setting up 2 16 manual conventions 1 7 organization 1 7 Master Code Lists menu functions 1 6 Master File Lists menu functions 1 6 Menus conventions 1 10 Information 1 30 Other Command 1 13 1 29 messages B 1 min max method for calculating reorders 3 16 minimum order quantity 2 28 minimum price 2 28 miscellaneous credit status purchase transactions 3 7 sales transactions 3 6 modifications and conversion A 1 Movement Trending Report function 8 27 sample 8 30 Inventory User s Manual Index N new order status purchase transactions 3 7 sales transactions 3 5 nonserialized
280. purchase Item The item used in the transaction is displayed Loc ID The location used in the transaction is displayed Quantity The quantity used in the transaction is displayed Units The units used in the transaction are displayed Date The date the transaction took place is displayed 5 6 Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Inventory Transactions Field Name Stat Description The status of the transaction is displayed Adjustment 1 Increase Adjustment 2 Decrease Sale 1 New Order Sale 3 Verify Order Sale 4 Invoice Sale 5 Miscellaneous Credit Purchase 1 New Order Purchase 2 Goods Received Purchase 4 Invoice Purchase 5 Miscellaneous Debit Command Bar Definitions Command Enter edit Adjustment Sale Purchase Saving and Exiting Description Move the prompt gt to the line you want to edit and press Enter Press A to add or edit an adjustment The Append Edit Inventory Adjustments window appears Press S to add or edit a sale The Append Edit Inventory Sales window appears Press P to add or edit a purchase The Append Edit Inventory Purchases window appears This screen is display only information is saved through the windows To exit to the Daily Work menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 7 Inventory Transactions Daily Work Inventory Items Screen sas TANA Irem iB Des ripgrinn Brat Irem Typ
281. q SDTTS 000v5 oS I TJ PUNH 000 9 00900c ebexoeg burqunqd 000v5 OST X00q ioriequ 000v5 00 zoog Azjuy 000V5 OSE uoridraoseq qI uorqeooT GI wei Ueil urg uor3e2oT1 g quTIg I qI g Wd OT T 666T ST 90 Inventory User s Manual 10 18 Physical Counts Tag Entry Features Use the Physical Counts Tag Entry function on the Physical Inventory menu to enter physical counts using tag numbers Before you use this function you must use the Print Physical Inventory Tags function Reports To produce a list of the information entered in the Physical Counts Tag Entry function use the Physical Count List function on the Physical Inventory menu Screen Use Screen Physical Counts Tag Entry Append Edit Tags window Enter Exceptions window Inventory User s Manual Description Use the Physical Counts Tag Entry screen to enter the physical count for each tag number Use the Append Edit Tags window to add or change information about the tag item location bin number unit of measure counted quantity and lot and serial numbers Use the Enter Exceptions window if you elected to enter exceptions only in the Physical Inventory Selection function In this window you can enter only physical discrepancies that arise when the frozen and actual quantities are compared 10 19 Physical Counts Tag Entry Physical Inventory Physical Counts Tag Entry Screen FISAS TID FTEyzi ai C
282. r items together for counting purposes Use Tag Numbers You can assign an inventory tag with a unique number to items This number identifies the item number location bin serial number one tag per serial number or lot within an item one tag per lot You can print preassigned tag numbers in the Print Physical Inventory Tags function If you print tag numbers use the Physical Counts Tag Entry function to enter your counts Inventory User s Manual 3 17 Periodic Tasks Work Flow 3 18 You can also use tag numbers but choose not to print tag numbers For example you might use tag numbers as a tool to verify the number of bins you are counting but use worksheets to record the actual count The tag number for each bin is entered in the Physical Counts Worksheet Entry function and used to verify that all the bins were counted In the Physical Count List an asterisk marks out of sequence or missing tag numbers Display Frozen Quantities When you display frozen quantities the system s quantities in the INQTxxx Quantity Totals file appear on the screen You can compare the system totals with your count totals If you are entering exceptions only frozen quantities are not displayed Enter Exceptions Only With the Enter Exceptions Only toggle counted and frozen quantities are equal and displayed on the screen so you enter only physical discrepancies Default Frozen Quantities If you choose to default counted
283. r Hnir Pelee Unit cost Shabu i LTQ6331DB4 B nnn 27 6600 Jivai lable LTQ amp i4 1054 0000 2397 0000 dived lable LTQEI5 1084 ooo 135 860 Avaliable LT ei et 23 3400 49 4600 3ald LTQECALIDBSA z 2L nDn 233 6600 Sold LTS Loe 422 9100 235 860 Sold LTG06431D84 amp 12 310Dn 337 850 3ald LTgTi35D01 0000 2312 000I dived leble Line Ho jo00001 of DO Hert Frrgw Last Ficat ItEgm lCOcmticn View Field Definitions Field Name Description Item ID Enter the ID of the item whose serial information you want to view Location Enter the ID of the location for the item 4 60 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Serial Numbers Command Bar Definitions Command Next Prev Last First Item Location View Saving and Exiting Description Press N to view the next item location record on file Press P to view the previous item location record on file Press L to view the last item location record on file Press F to view the first item location record on file Press I to go to the Item ID field and enter a different item ID Press O to go to the Location field and enter a different location ID Press V to view information about sales and purchases of serialized items The View Serial Numbers window appears To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 4 61 Serial Numbers Information Inquiry View Serial Numbers Window Zuge Lk Prt bo a
284. r edit serialized and lotted items using the serial lot entry method Use the Lot Serial Number Entry window if you are working with an item that is both lotted and serialized and you use the lot serial entry method to enter transactions Use it to enter adjustments sales or purchases for lotted and serialized items Use the Append Edit Lotted Serial Number window to add lotted and serialized items using the lot serial entry method The Alternate Items and Locations window appears if you entered a quantity greater than the quantity at the location you are working with This screen is display only and shows the quantities available at other locations and alternate items for the item The alternate items must have been set up on the Alternate Items screen in the Items function This screen appears only for sales transactions 5 5 Inventory Transactions Daily Work Inventory Transactions Screen F SAS Mini Zaig Ex font bip inventory Trzzmrticza Typa Loo II Quantity lnirs Dars Tar amp Purchase EHDDO1 znn ococg EX Levies Laas 4 Purczaak EHI zUU COR EA l 6152 1992 4 Purc tang NHDDO amp cOCOO Ek LEIR LOOP 4 Purchase EHDDOOI Inn oocu EL lz 15 19B8 4 Purchase SHOE r00 0 Ek 12 158 18999 4 Line 000001 of DOS Entec edit Adjumstoect Sale Purchase Field Definitions Field Name Description Type Transactions that have not been posted are displayed adjustment sale or
285. r inserts the decimal point and the following zeros if you are working with round numbers The subtraction operator works the same as those on adding machines Press a number and 3 Enter the second number 99 It appears in the Entry field as you type and moves to the bottom of the tape when you press Enter The calculation is then made and the total 131 00 followed by two asterisks is shown at the bottom of the tape 4 If you want to start a new tape press F1 or C to clear the tape before you start another calculation Making a String of Calculations You can make consecutive calculations using the running total from each previous operation 1 Enter the first number of the calculation to reset the current total The new total appears on the tape D 4 Inventory User s Manual References Other Commands Type the operator you want to use do not press Enter The number you typed in step 1 and the operator appear in the Tape field Enter the second number The calculation is made and the total is displayed at the bottom of the tape This total is used to start the next calculation Type the second operator do not press Enter The last total is recalled from memory The operator is then displayed in the Tape field behind the last total Enter the next number The calculation is made and the new total is displayed at the bottom of the tape Repeat steps 2 5 until the calculation is complete As new ca
286. r level pricing setting up 2 29 D daily tasks 3 3 Daily Work menu functions 1 5 Data File Conversion screen A 3 steps A 3 default frozen quantities 3 18 default location information setting up 2 26 defining types of inventory items 2 5 Inventory User s Manual Index delete files 3 24 information on a screen 1 29 line item 1 35 Detail History function 4 17 4 21 detail history option 2 11 detail lookup command 1 34 discounts on serialized items option 2 12 Down Arrow inquiry command 1 33 report command 1 35 scroll region command 1 35 E edit line item 1 35 End inquiry command 1 32 report command 1 34 scroll region command 1 35 Enter data 2 13 customer levels 2 14 establishing account codes 2 15 establishing locations 2 18 product lines 2 14 sales categories 2 14 setting up forecast types 2 15 setting up item IDs 2 20 setting up makeup codes 2 16 setting up price structures 2 18 setting up user defined fields 2 17 tables 2 13 user defined field sorts 2 17 exceptions for physical inventory 3 18 inquiry command 1 33 location transfers 3 10 physical counts 3 20 scroll region command 1 35 transactions 3 4 lotted items 3 4 lotted serialized items 3 4 serialized items 3 4 serialized lotted items 3 4 Inventory User s Manual entering prices for sales transactions option 2 11 EOQ definition 2 28 method 2 29 for calculating reorders 3 16 overriding cost infor
287. r s Manual 8 6 Overstock Report Features Use the Overstock Report function on the Analysis Reports menu to list items whose in stock quantities are above the order points you specified on hand value is greater than the maximum on hand value Reports A sample Overstock Report is on page 8 10 Screen Use Screen Description Overstock Report Use the Overstock Report screen to select the items locations product lines and user defined fields that you want in the report Inventory User s Manual 8 7 Overstock Report Analysis Reports Overstock Report Screen C SAS TODA Gai La Pere bjp Dafsty Stock Alert Fapart Bick Irem 13 Tene i60 Prime py Thru 200 1 Itum ID L paricoam Ib From CRUUDI 2 Petites Line Thru THONI Appilicaricn i Frodoct Ling From ARFSLIAMRCI 4 ThE ti D Ed pplicazczinn Fros User Defined nrr Thru 4 Bepartment TEGERE EUVILDIBK Thru INTERTZF Include Zrarum Zupmarmacad TES Pisconbimuged TES Frinr Dacca besoription Me Shan Late TES Print Py Ln mrtan MG Feink Item it Tero ZuaIrty HJtnck HC EPicintec pF evinr W ilg S zrmgen E zd Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Enter the range of items locations product lines and user defined fields you want in the report Print By Select the option by which you want to organize the report Include Status Enter Y for each item status you want to include in the report Enter N for each statu
288. r use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 35 Location Transfers Features Reports Use the Location Transfers function on the Daily Work menu to move items from one location to another Before you can transfer an item you must set up the item in the destination location To produce a list of the information entered on the Location Transfers screen use the Transfers Journal function on the Daily Work menu Screen Use Screen Location Transfers Append Edit Transfer window Lot Entry window Append Edit Lot Number window Serial Number Entry window Append Edit Serial Number window Serial Lot Number Entry window Append Edit Lotted Serial Number window Inventory User s Manual Description Use the Location Transfers screen to add or edit a transfer Use the Append Edit Transfer window to enter information about the location you are transferring items from and to enter transfer costs The Lot Entry window appears if you are tracking lots for the item you are transferring Use it to indicate whether you want to add or edit a lot number Use the Append Edit Lot Number window to add or edit lot numbers The Serial Number Entry window appears if you are working with a serialized item Use it to indicate whether you want to add or edit a serial number Use the Append Edit Serial Number window to add or edit serial numbers Use the Serial Lot Number Entry window to enter loc
289. re of the item is displayed To Item ID The ID of the transferred item is displayed To Loc ID The ID of the location the item is being transferred to is displayed Requested Qty The quantity that is being transferred is displayed Serial Number The serial number of the transferred item is displayed 5 50 Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Location Transfers Field Name Description Unit Cost The unit cost of the serialized item is displayed Command Bar Definitions Command Description Enter edit Move the prompt gt to the lot number you want to edit and press Enter The Edit Lotted Serial Number window appears Append Press A to add a lot number The Append Lotted Serial Number window appears Done Press D to go to the Location Transfers screen Saving and Exiting To exit to the Location Transfers screen press D or use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 51 Location Transfers Daily Work Append Edit Lotted Serial Number Window F USAS TONI mmi ye Etinn TrurzZimgrxz SS Berial Lor Bamber Facey From Irs Ta Irem ED aonan From Lor ZD Te Loc IS ESUDD1 Unies Requested cry L OO Saciel Bromberc 000001 of Doocon igpend Loteed Sariml Rusher mz Lal umber IZTILFISI Bore Lor is0i95 Damcirnmricu Lot L20125 Cairt 2953 0000 Trans Cost Mamai Der r Umriftirmt icm Frugmm lt Pgln gt u proceed Field Definitions Field Name Description Serial Number
290. re the deletion should stop Promotional price IDs with end dates before the date you enter will be deleted Enter the end date for the physical count date where the deletion should stop Bins with physical count dates before the date you enter will be deleted This field appears if you keep serialized history Enter the invoice date for serialized history and serial numbers where the deletion should stop Serialized history and serial numbers with invoice dates before the date you enter will be deleted Enter the invoice date for lot history where the deletion should stop Lot history before the date you enter will be deleted This field appears if you keep detail history Enter the transaction date for detail history where the deletion should stop Detail history before the date you enter will be deleted Enter the period year for summary history where the deletion should stop Summary history before the date you enter will be deleted Command Bar Definitions This screen has no command bar Saving and Exiting After the files are purged the Periodic Processing menu appears Inventory User s Manual 9 21 Rebuild Item Quantities Features Use the Rebuild Item Quantities function on the Periodic Processing menu to update the Inventory system with on order committed and in use information from Inventory or other applications that interface with Inventory Reports A sample Rebuild Item Quantities Log is on p
291. re you produce the report select E and then press Enter To end the function and return to the menu without producing the report select E and then use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 1 39 Setup Installing the Application 2 3 Setup Considerations 2 5 Entering Your Data 2 13 Creating a Backup Schedule 2 33 Inventory User s Manual 2 1 Installing the Application The best time to install Inventory is at the beginning of your fiscal year so that you will not have to enter information for an entire year If you cannot install Inventory at the beginning of your fiscal year install it at the beginning of a month or an other accounting period If you plan to use General Ledger and Accounts Payable Purchase Order install and set up the current version of those applications in that order before you install Inventory You can put this version of Inventory on the system in one of two ways you can install a new system or you can convert the old files and upgrade the system To install Inventory use the Install Applications function in Resource Manager see the Resource Manager User s Manual To convert files and upgrade the system see appendix A Inventory User s Manual 2 3 Setup Considerations Follow these steps to prepare for entering your data Define types of inventory items Organize your inventory items Set up codes and IDs Choose costing methods Determine options and interfaces Set up acce
292. rial Boobecs h Irem iB un Location EHUDUI Description Befrigerarzr Miest Beriab Humber hit Felee Unit Cost Brarus View Seriml Huxr era Seria Hn LTGo5111084 Zrtmtum Lrai Le la C nem m Init Bate Oi 0i ie Purctamm Information Vender ID EDD2OO1 Hame NOE cs Tile Kumbar Iaute BO nnnaooccn OL OL 1935 DELI z2B5 rann Invoice r7ii OT fe j53 Sale Infcrmatricn Cumtormr ID H arr Wumbar Fama Coder Pricw 2000 Dien ie L Pream any key Field Definitions The information in the View Serial Numbers window comes from the Serial Numbers screen in the File Maintenance Item Locations function Command Bar This screen has no command bar Saving and Exiting To exit to the Serial Numbers screen press any key 4 62 Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Inventory Transactions 5 3 Location Transfers 5 37 Transactions Journal 5 55 Transfers Journal 5 59 Inventory User s Manual 5 1 Inventory Transactions Features If Inventory is being used as a standalone system use the Inventory Transactions function on the Daily Work menu for the following purposes toadjust quantities toreflect sales after you sell an item toreflect transfers after you transfer an item toreflect purchases after you purchase an item place an order or receive an item If Accounts Payable Purchase Order are interfaced with Inventory Inventory transactions are updated automatically If Accounts Recei
293. rices locations product lines and user defined fields whose price information you want to change Print audit log If you want to print an audit log that shows the old and new prices enter Y if not enter N Print By If you chose to print the audit log select the option by which you want to organize the log Adj Base Enter the adjustment base for the item price change base list or minimum 9 4 Inventory User s Manual Periodic Process Item Price Change Field Name Description Adj Type Enter for a percentage adjustment enter for a dollar adjustment Adj Amount Enter the amount of the adjustment For negative quantities use the minus symbol enter positive quantities without a plus sign Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the log to a printer File Select F to send the log to a file End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Periodic Processing menu Saving and Exiting After the log is produced the Periodic Processing menu appears Inventory User s Manual 9 5 Periodic Process Item Price Change Item Price Change Log 00 c 00 c 00 2 00 c 00vS 00vS 00vS 00v 6ELZ BELZ 6ELZ BELZ 628 82S 628 82S eond d eond d eond d eond d M N ONICGTING SNIGI na ONICGTING SNIGI SNIGI na na OIWLOWIS na WIV IVSH a1 na WIV IVSH
294. rify Order Decrease Increase Invoice Increase Transaction Post Decrease Misc Credit Decrease Purchase New Order Goods Received Invoice Misc Debit 3 8 Quantity Quantity On Hand On Order Increase Decrease Decrease Increase Increase Decrease Increase Decrease Quantity Available Increase Decrease Decrease N A Decrease Increase N A Increase Increase Decrease Inventory User s Manual Work Flow Daily Tasks The table below shows the transaction type the default in the Cost field and whether or not you can change the value in the Cost field If the default in the Cost field is Costing Method the value that appears in the Cost field is based on the costing valuation method you set up in the Options and Interfaces function in Resource Manager FIFO LIFO average or standard The Cost field for sales transactions appears only if you elected to show the cost for sales transactions in the Options and Interfaces function in Resource Manager Costs in Transactions Transactions Status Default in Cost Field Allowed to Change Cost Adjustment Increase Last Cost Yes Decrease Costing Method Yes Sale New Order Costing Method No Verify Order Costing Method No Invoice Costing Method No Misc Credit Costing Method Yes Purchase New Order Last Cost Yes Goods Received Last Cost Yes Invoice Last Cost Yes Misc Debit Average Cost Yes Inventory User s Manual 3 9 Daily Tasks Work Flow
295. riptions identify the inventory item and are used throughout Inventory To save time set up one item first following all the steps through Serial Information later in this chapter Then when you enter new items use the Copy From window to copy any of the following information alternate items user defined fields location information price information customer level pricing cost summary information vendor information bin Information Select Items from the File Maintenance menu Then enter each item or copy an existing item record and enter a description of the item If you elected to use additional descriptions in the Options and Interfaces function you can add 1 to 10 lines of additional descriptions for the item If you choose to add or edit information on the General Information Units of Measure Alternate Items and Item Locations screens see the explanation of those screens below If you are entering a new item you must enter general information Inventory User s Manual Setup Entering Your Data General Information The information you set up on the General Information screen is used at the item level and is not associated with a location Enter the status of the item active discontinued obsolete or superseded Enter the type of item you are working with serial nonserial or service If Bill of Materials Kitting is interfaced with Inventory and the item will be described
296. rizzgr p E Evirw qiia fSpzrmmn E zd Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Enter the range of items locations product lines and user defined fields you want in the report Print For Period Year Accept the displayed period and year or enter a different period and year Calculate Turns As Of The date that indicates where the calculation of turns starts is displayed Print By Select the option by which you want to organize the report Print Order Select the order you want the information to be in slowest to fastest or fastest to slowest 8 16 Inventory User s Manual Analysis Reports Sales Analysis Report Field Name Print Suppress zero quantity items Description Select the option that specifies the amount of history you want in the report To exclude items with a quantity of zero enter Y to include them enter N Command Bar Definitions Command Printer File Screen End Saving and Exiting Description Select P to send the report to a printer Select F to send the report to a file Select S to send the report to the screen Select E to change your selections or exit to the Analysis Reports menu After the report is produced the Analysis Reports menu appears Inventory User s Manual 8 17 Analysis Reports Sales Analysis Report Sales Analysis Report 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
297. roduct Lines The INPLxxx file stores product line codes INPPxxx Promotional Pricing The INPPxxx file stores promotional pricing codes and the criteria used to evaluate whether to apply a promotion to a specific item when you sell it INPSxxx Price Structures The INPSxxx file stores price structure information Inventory User s Manual C 3 File Descriptions References INQLxxx Quantity Locations The INQLxxx file stores detail cost information for each nonserialized item location INQTxxx Quantity Totals The INQTxxx file stores total quantity information for each item location lot number and on hand committed in use and on order information INRQxxx IN Requisitions The INRQxxx file stores reorder information for each item location when you use the Calculate Reorders function INSHxxx Serial History The INSHxxx file stores detail serial history for each transaction processed in Inventory and for Accounts Payable Accounts Receivable Purchase Order and Sales Order if these applications are interfaced with Inventory INSNxxx Serial Numbers The INSNxxx file holds serial number information for each serialized item location INTB Tables The INTB file stores Inventory tables INTLxxx Transfer Lot Serial IDs The INTLxxx file stores lot and serial number information used when processing a transfer for serialized lotted or lotted serialized items INTRxxx Transactions The INTRxxx file stores tra
298. rt T 0000 9161 c06 L8LO lvE 00 SSPT8ZT 0000 00686 282695 000v cLlclL 0000 0000 TE9 0000 8802 31odey jo puq TWLOL INVHD 3soo arun bed Aaraquen0 Aieuung s seuozna 31odey srs euy pue4 Tddns szepttng Md abeyoeg BurTooo burqe H WIV LVHH TOOONN 002 Oud ebexoeg Hutquntd IVIHXIVA TOOONN 0S1 Ovid ebexoeg eotuaoe s IVIHXIVA TOOONN 001 Won uoradiioseq 3ed ij BUTT 3onpoag uor3eooT qI wy G66T ZT MAUL S661 10 pOTz d Wd 00 6661 L0 80 Inventory User s Manual 8 26 Movement Trending Report Features Use the Movement Trending Report function on the Analysis Reports menu to produce a summary of inventory item movement Reports A sample Movement Trending Report is on page 8 30 Screen Use Screen Description Movement Trending Use the Movement Trending Report screen to select the Report range of items and locations you want in the report how you want the number of items rounded and whether you want to include purchases sales or other inventory information Inventory User s Manual 8 27 Movement Trending Report Analysis Reports Movement Trending Report Screen sas Vo Ge Lx Dae kb TereExent Trending Paepcrt Bick Item TI Fr 500 Frtnr Thru 200 Ferzrhmmaz TIN Lu csBripom ID Fe EHUUL Tales TEO Thru TEZn ni Ferchame Besrurrm TIS Frnduct Cine Feo AFPLIAPCE Salen Farurnms TI3 THEW EATEBIRL Ba
299. rticzs Ene II Quarrit Unire Dare Irar Edit Irvmntory Purchases Pars FEIER Pertnd 12 Teer i896 BHIHMEAFOLIS WAFIHOUSZE Padiatr Stain Pax Field Definitions Field Name Status Date Period Year Loc ID Item ID 5 12 Description To make an adjustment that increases the quantity available enter I To decrease the quantity available enter D Enter or change the date of the adjustment Enter or change the period of the adjustment The current year is displayed Enter the ID of the location of the item Enter the ID of the item whose quantity you want to adjust The quantity on hand and available appear at the bottom of the screen Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Inventory Transactions Field Name Description Adjust Acct If the adjustment is an increase in inventory enter a credit account If the adjustment is a decrease in inventory enter a debit account Quantity Enter or change the quantity you want to adjust Units Enter the unit of measure you want to work with Cost Enter or change the cost of the item Ext Cost The extended cost quantity x cost is displayed Comment Enter additional information about the transaction Command Bar Definitions This window has no command bar Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the Inventory Transactions screen use the Proceed PgDn command To exit to the Inventory Transactions screen without saving your entries us
300. rting When you are ready to convert files use the Data File Conversion function on the Company Setup menu in Resource Manager see the Resource Manager User s Manual Consider Your Setup Before you try to convert your version of Inventory to the current version consider the exact setup of your system Modifications to your system might be lost if you install a new version of a program or update a file If you are not sure whether your system is ready for conversion consult your value added reseller Inventory User s Manual A 1 Conversion References A 2 Because of the ways tax information is stored in Accounts Payable and depending on which other applications you are using you must follow several steps to convert existing Accounts Payable data If you are converting from version 4 5x to 6 00 and you are using Accounts Receivable you have two choices Convert Accounts Receivable files from 4 5x to 6 00 first then convert Accounts Payable from 4 5x to 6 00 e Create Inventory files first then set up tax location and tax group information before converting Accounts Payable from 4 5x to 6 00 If you are converting from version 4 5x to 6 00 and you do not have Accounts Receivable on your system you must create Inventory files first Then set up tax location and tax groups information before converting Accounts Payable from 4 5x to 6 00 If you are converting from version 5 0x to 6 00 whether you are using Accou
301. ry History file are reset to begin accumulating data for the next year Inventory User s Manual 9 15 Year End Maintenance Periodic Process Year End Maintenance Screen STUNT MEE gu Ka Emi tjap r Tumr Izd Aeistensns Harm You Backed Dp Tour Para Fires Hada Sure Hn ore Else is Using rhe Jyarem YES Dc you wazc to run gumzcity Croas wWarificmrtinn TES Cutput device F cintaz piB eavrimu hiie Irina Field Definitions Field Name Description Have You Enter Y or N to indicate whether or not you have backed up your data files and made sure that no one else is using the system If you enter N the Periodic Processing menu appears Note You should also post the Inventory transactions and COGS adjustments for the year in which you are performing the maintenance before you use this function You do not have to post Inventory transactions that are for the next year Do you want to run Enter Y or N to indicate whether or not you want to produce Quantity Cross the Quantity Cross Verification Log If you enter N the log is Verification printed without verifying that the quantities are the same in the INQLxxx Quantity Locations and INQTxxx Quantity Totals files 9 16 Inventory User s Manual Periodic Process Year End Maintenance Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the log to a printer File Select F to send the log to a file End Select E to exit t
302. ry User s Manual References Other Commands Inventory Price Calculator Seu E fmi kp nmziry dJeformerian n Emnd utr Comit ted CEU oy dEr JEF Son Informarica LIFO FIFG Awerugut Bramderd oar Bese Comt Fricm Cmlcuzlmtar Lmzwricon Ib MMOs Itera ID Loo Bale mirs PRO Price ID EDILI Curtcmmr ID ACEOOI Cush Level ACETIL Hale Bare s cr E Sele Quantity Press Any Fey 15 0000 toop 1 0000 17 0000 aon Unit Frice EXE Price l c Pricing Information 422 8020 422 53 Ceanriry Breaks ant itor Dait Frica l Dooc 422 5920 B DOOC Field Definitions Field Name Location ID Item ID Sale Units Price ID Customer ID Cust Level Sale Date Inventory User s Manual Description Enter a location ID Enter an item ID Accept the displayed unit of measure or enter a different unit of measure Enter a price ID optional Enter a customer ID optional Enter a customer level optional Accept the displayed sale date or enter a different date Other Commands References Field Name Sale Quantity On Hand Qty Committed Qty In Use Qty Available Qty On Order Qty LIFO FIFO Cost Average Cost Standard Cost Base Cost Calc Unit Price Calc Ext Price Base Quantity Description Accept the displayed sale quantity or enter a different quantity The quantity on hand is displayed The committed quantity is displaye
303. s Command Description Enter edit Move the prompt gt to the customer level you want to edit and press Enter Append Press A to add a customer level Delete Price ID Press D to delete an entire price ID and all the customer levels Price ID Press P to enter a price ID Saving and Exiting To save your entries use the Proceed PgDn command To exit to the File Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command 11 58 Inventory User s Manual Promotional Pricing Features Use the Promotional Pricing function on the File Maintenance menu to set up markups or discounts for selected inventory items If you set up more than one promotional pricing adjustment for the same item the pricing adjustment that is closest to the current start date is the default Reports To produce a list of the information entered in the Promotional Pricing function use the Promotional Pricing List function on the Master File Lists menu Screen Use Screen Name Description Promotional Pricing Use the Promotional Pricing screen to select the criteria for the promotional pricing and to enter the adjusted base adjusted amount and adjustment type Inventory User s Manual 11 59 Promotional Pricing File Maintenance Promotional Pricing Screen SAS TANA Zug Dat Dus bjp Pros EID Description TR ENI Pelee ID From Thru Customer Level From Thru Irem T From Thru LbzaLtia n ID From Thre i kdj Faase CO Adi Typa ft
304. s Field Name Source Lot Destination Lot Quantity Trans Cost Comment 5 44 Description Enter or change the number of the lot you are transferring the item from Enter or change the number of the lot you are transferring the item to Enter or change the quantity of the item being transferred from the lot Enter or change the cost of transferring the quantity of items from the lot Enter additional information about the quantity being transferred from the lot Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Location Transfers Field Name Description Cost The cost of the lotted item being transferred is displayed Ext Cost The total cost quantity x cost of the lotted items being transferred is displayed Command Bar Definitions This window has no command bar Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the Lot Entry window use the Proceed PgDn command To exit to the Lot Entry window without saving your entries use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 45 Location Transfers Daily Work Serial Number Entry Window D I I aa Locmtion TrunzfErz Dral Mber Entry From Trem ID wd To Trem ED mui From bor ZD NuccUI Te Lnc IS ESUDDI Unita EA kequesred cry L OO Saciel Bromberc Tnit Coat 000001 of Owm000 Appazd Serial Hunmbar mz Lal Bumbec RTQ712 1002 Dcum z31 020 Treas Cost 2000 co DE r Umriftrmticm Poems lt Pgln gt u proceed Field Definition
305. s Field Name Description From Item ID The ID of the transferred item is displayed From Loc ID The ID of the location the item is being transferred from is displayed Units The unit of measure for the item is displayed To Item ID The ID of the transferred item is displayed To Loc ID The ID of the location the item is being transferred to is displayed Requested Qty The quantity that is being transferred is displayed Serial Number The serial number of the transferred item is displayed 5 46 Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Location Transfers Field Name Description Unit Cost The unit cost of the serialized item is displayed Command Bar Definitions Command Description Enter edit Move the prompt gt to the serial number you want to edit and press Enter The Edit Serial Number window appears Append Press A to add a serial number The Append Serial Number window appears Done Press D to go to the Location Transfers screen Saving and Exiting To exit to the Location Transfers screen press D or use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 47 Location Transfers Daily Work Append Edit Serial Number Window sas od Location TrunafzErz Bal Mumher Ente y From Trem ID 03 To Trem ED eni From bor I0 muccul Te Loc IS m0001 Unite EA bequesre cry L DOTI Saciel Hocrhwr Tnit Coat Mirbti 000001 of 00000 Appazd Serial Humber mz Lani umber ETOTIZ1UUZ Coun 231 c200
306. s Print profit margin If you want the report to include profit margins enter Y if not enter N Print quantity breaks If you want the report to include quantity price breaks enter Y if not enter N 7 12 Inventory User s Manual Reports Price Report Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the report to a printer File Select F to send the report to a file Screen Select S to send the report to the screen End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Reports menu Saving and Exiting After the report is produced the Reports menu appears Inventory User s Manual 7 13 Reports Price Report Price Report T ebeq V N Y N V N Y N V N 0000 0000 S906 S906 0c 9 2S6 756 EZT O0EZ 6ELZ O0EZ 6ELZ 009L E9PT 009L E9PT 00vS 67S 00vS 62S 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 aseg aseg aseg aseg aseg Md Md Md Md Md IINE IINE IINE qina qina 33od u jo puq abeyoeg Burrooo Burqae H 000XL 00 abeyoeg bur ooj bur3eeH OOONW 000XL 000NW 000XL 00 ebexoeg burqunqd 0S ebexoeg burqunqd 0S abeyoeg eo11329T4 00 ebexoeg eor1329T4 00 pesn 9o13g Ouodg dI oworg eorid Cp orzd STIO TOOHOW 9A9 I9UO1Sn 6661 L0 80 JO se seorad Aqqquend qodey eotid xeeig WON dl 9 tud uoridraoseqg qI weil Wd
307. s and sales history are updated If Inventory is interfaced with General Ledger debit and credit entries are created in the GLJRxxx Journal file If you post detail line item information entries are made for each line item If you post summary totals information one entry is made for each account Inventory User s Manual 3 11 Daily Tasks Work Flow If Inventory is not interfaced with General Ledger use the Post Transactions Log to manually adjust the accounts affected by this function When you post transactions entries are made to the following accounts Adjustment increase in quantity and value the reverse is true for a decrease Inventory Adjustment DB CR Purchase increase in quantity and value Inventory Adjustment DB CR Sale decrease in quantity and value Inventory COGS Sales Adjustment CR DB CR DB Transfer decrease from source increase in destination add transfer cost IN Source IN Destination Transfer Cost Destination Cost CR DB CR DB Producing the GL Adjustments Journal The GL Adjustments Journal is a record of the cost of goods sold COGS adjustments and purchase price variances PPV in the INCJxxx COGS Journal file Use it to verify that the adjustments are correct 3 12 Inventory User s Manual Work Flow Daily Tasks A COGS adjustment is made under the following circumstances e The estimated cost is different from th
308. s item location The vendor is already an alternate for the specified item Edit the existing alternate vendor or set up a new vendor for the item location in the Item Locations function Unable to allocate sort file Someone else may be using the same terminal ID and filename as the sort file you are trying to use or the system is creating the sort file in a directory where you do not have permissions set up Unit of measure has previously been entered Select a different unit of measure Unposted adjustments exist in COGS Adjustments File Unposted transactions exist in Inventory Transactions File Unposted transactions exist in Location Transfers File Post these adjustments or transactions before using the Year End Maintenance function User defined field 1 does not match the from thru criteria for this batch User defined field 2 does not match the from thru criteria for this batch When you append an item location during physical counts you must enter a user defined field that meets the from thru criteria or work with a different batch Inventory User s Manual B 5 System Messages References User defined field will not be available if no description is given User defined sort will not be available if no description is given If you do not enter a field description the system will not recognize the user defined field or sort B 6 Inventory User s Manual File Descriptions C INAIxxx Alternate Items The INAIx
309. s the company ID INUDSxxx Table The INUDSxxx table holds three fields that are used to define the user defined field sorts This table is accessed through the User Defined Field Sorts function on the Code Maintenance menu Enter the table ID INUDSxxx xxx is the company ID INUSRxxx Table The INUSRxxx table holds two fields that are used to define the user defined field prompts This table is accessed through the User Defined Fields function on the Code Maintenance menu Enter the table ID INUSRxxx xxx is the company ID 11 66 Inventory User s Manual Code Maintenance Sales Categories Customer Levels Product Lines Account Codes Forecast Types Standard Cost Makeup Codes User Defined Fields User Defined Field Sorts Inventory User s Manual 12 3 12 5 12 7 12 9 12 13 12 17 12 19 12 23 12 1 Sales Categories Features Use the Sales Categories function on the Code Maintenance menu to set up and maintain sales categories Sales categories codes are used to sort historical information from Accounts Receivable and Sales Order Reports To produce a list of the information entered in the Sales Categories function use the Sales Categories List function on the Master Code Lists menu Screen Use Screen Description Sales Categories Use the Sales Categories screen to set up your sales categories codes Inventory User s Manual 12 3 Sales Categories Code Maintenance Sales Categories Screen
310. s the in use and committed quantities is displayed Enter or change the amount on order The ID of the vendor the lot was purchased from is displayed The name of the vendor the lot was purchased from is displayed The purchase order number is displayed The date the purchase order was made is displayed The invoice number is displayed The date of the invoice is displayed The unit cost of the purchase is displayed Command Bar Definitions This window has no command bar Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the Lot Information screen use the Proceed PgDn command To exit to the Lot Information screen without saving your entries use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 11 47 Item Locations File Maintenance Edit Serial Numbers Window aaa Sting Edt Fert Hala Irem locat itas serial lIurarmarsion Irem 70 TOG Boe Lema Lon EHDE Description Jmriar Huser Unita Es I Edit Serial Huxibers erial Mn if toto acarus krai lenis Lut Fkz 120195 Cimpia Enit Dama OT 15 1598 Cost G00 Price Ta Purctamm Irfnrmmricn Vends ID TIAGO Hema Wot cz film Wu r Pare Po Bnnnoooz L nj 15 1298 Cort 2 2500 Envoice 3820 O77 08 1228 r Sale InPormernlon Customer ID Hame His ate Leer Price odo Invoice r Vmriftrmticz Preces Paine s proceed Field Definitions Field Name Serial No Lot No Comments Cost 11 48 Description Enter or change the serial
311. s you want to exclude Print extra description If you want the report to include additional descriptions enter Y if not enter N You can enter Y only if you elected to use additional descriptions in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function 8 8 Inventory User s Manual Analysis Reports Overstock Report Field Name Print by location Print items with zero max on hand Description If you want to separate the information by location enter Y if not enter N If you want to include items with a quantity of zero in the Maximum Quantity field in the Item Locations function enter Y if not enter N Command Bar Definitions Command Printer File Screen End Saving and Exiting Description Select P to send the report to a printer Select F to send the report to a file Select to send the report to the screen Select E to change your selections or exit to the Analysis Reports menu After the report is produced the Analysis Reports menu appears Inventory User s Manual 8 9 Analysis Reports Overstock Report Overstock Report T 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 L 0000 0000 T 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 ST 0000 0000 0000 000021 0000 0000 ST 0000 0000 9c 0000 0000 11 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 2T 0000 0000 L
312. se standard cost as the adjustment base enter B if you want to use base cost as the adjustment base Pick Enter the range of items locations product lines and user defined fields whose cost information you want to change Print By Select the option by which you want to organize the log Cost Code This field appears if you selected standard cost as the adjustment base Enter the range of cost codes you want in the log 9 8 Inventory User s Manual Periodic Process Cost Changes Field Name Description Adj Type Enter to use a percentage adjustment enter to use a dollar adjustment Adj Amount Enter the amount of the adjustment For negative quantities use the minus symbol enter positive quantities without a plus sign Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the log to a printer File Select F to send the log to a file End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Periodic Processing menu Saving and Exiting After the log is produced the Periodic Processing menu appears Inventory User s Manual 9 9 Periodic Process Cost Changes Log Cost Changes 331odew jo pug 3jueuaiedeq uoradidoseq uot eot Tddy eur qonpo4ud UOTILOOT GI weit qI uejl Ag boT sebueu 3s0 paepueis Wd Lv C d ebeg K ddng szepttng 6661 L0 80 Inventory User s Manual 9 10 Quantity Cross Verification Features Use the Quantity Cross Verification function on the Perio
313. selecting the mouse pull down menu Favorites Menu Text Style Favnritazx Menu TDOO F T S Ar Ir BneAmcri ane GL Edit Trmnmgm tinnmg If Transfers Journal There are two ways you can set up your Favorites menu depending on if you use the text style menu or the graphical style menus To set up the text style Favorites menu follow these steps 1 Move your cursor to the submenu or application that you want placed in the Favorites menu 2 Press F10 You can press F2 to verify your selection was added to your Favorites menu To remove an application 1 Press F2 to display the Favorites menu 2 Move your cursor to the submenu or application you want removed 3 Press F10 Inventory User s Manual 1 25 Favorites Menu Introduction Favorites Menu Start Style a OL Ed Tensei us To set up the graphical style display you can find an example of the graphical style Favorites menu on page 1 10 follow these steps 1 Position the cursor over the submenu or function you want placed into your Favorites menu 2 Right click on the function or submenu The Favorites menu set up box shown below appears 3 Click on Add to Favorites 1 26 Inventory User s Manual Introduction Screen Use Screen Add to Remove Favorites Change to Favorites Main Sample data Live data Setup Function Information Inventory User s Manual Favorites Menu Description Use the Add to Remo
314. ss codes ONG a pas Defining Types of Inventory Items Many businesses have a variety of serial nonserial and service items Serial numbers are used to track large ticket items such as appliances computers and stereo equipment Nonserialized items are regular inventory items identified by the item ID and description Service items are work you perform for your customers for example service warranties and repair services Organizing Inventory Items Items in Inventory are identified by an item number and a description You can also assign additional identification to an item product line location user defined fields bin number status vendor ID unit of measure serial number and lot number In some of the Inventory reports functions you can select the order the information is presented In the Price Report you can sort the information by item ID or by location ID in the Valuation Report you can sort the information by product line or user defined fields Organize your inventory items with this information in mind Setting Up Codes and IDs When you set up the system you assign codes and IDs to tell the system how to identify each item on file The system uses these identifiers to organize the information in reports and inquiry windows Inventory User s Manual 2 5 Setup Considerations Setup 2 6 The system arranges code characters in a particular order In the following list codes and IDs are sorted from lowest t
315. st Makeup Codes List 14 23 User Defined Fields List 14 27 User Defined Field Sorts List 14 31 References Conversion A 1 System Messages B 1 File Descriptions C 1 Other Commands D 1 Price Calculator E 1 Index Inventory User s Manual Introduction General Information Inventory System Conventions Text Menu Graphical Style Menus Favorites Menu Function Commands Reports Inventory User s Manual General Information The OPEN SYSTEMS Accounting Software OSAS product line consists of several accounting applications Each application addresses a different phase of your financial operations together they form a powerful accounting solution to your daily and periodic accounting needs Customer Support Open Systems has a strong commitment to customer service and product quality If you have difficulty in using Open Systems products consult the user s manual and other OSAS reference materials If you need more information consult a customer support representative The Structure of OSAS Resource Manager The Resource Manager application is the foundation or shell of OSAS it provides the operating environment that holds the other applications To use OSAS you must run Resource Manager through an operating system based on Microsoft Windows Windows 959 Windows NT UNIX or Novell NetWare OSAS operates on LAN systems across a web server using the OSAS Web program and within a single computer After you
316. st Screen C AS De Faing LE Fmi bjp r Frumuticzml Pricing Lim Fick Prom ID From YE EHTD tart Dat End Bura Prim By Proms ID 1 Z Srmrr Dura Cutmgut rice fPbrizzgr p F evirt m ilg S crzgmen E zd Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Enter the range of promotional price IDs and starting and ending dates you want in the list Print By Select the option by which you want to organize the list 13 24 Inventory User s Manual Master File Promotional Pricing List Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the list to a printer File Select F to send the list to a file Screen Select S to send the list to the screen End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Master File Lists menu Saving and Exiting After the list is produced the Master File Lists menu appears Inventory User s Manual 13 25 Master File Promotional Pricing List List icing Promotional Pr T obeq 0000 01 orzd peqyeTnote9 sep sep sep sep sep sep sep sa sag sa sag sag sa sa queunaedeq uoraeoriddy UOI3e20T sarun qI u 3I T A T z ulo3sno qI eotud 33odew jo pug 3noeso pusg 4eex G66 T TE ZT 8661 10 71 QNd HA 3unouy queunsntpv eseg queunsntpy d r queuqsnCpy qI ouoag Ag AsTT Burotad Teuoraouozq Atddns szepttng uotadraoseq qI qeq puq ouo3id
317. st contains information about your inventory items general information alternate items units of measure and location summary information Reports A sample Item Detail List is on page 13 6 Screen Use Screen Description Item Detail List Use the Item Detail List screen to select the items product lines and user defined fields that you want in the list Inventory User s Manual 13 3 Item Detail List Master File Item Detail List Screen Sino La Ew bp Itam Detmil List Pick Irem 13 Trom i60 Primer py Thru 200 1 Itum ID FEDSucT Line From APTLIAMCE Zi Premer Line Thru BATERTAL 3 Applacaricn Applicm inn Feom BUILDISE 4 Dapar mant Thru ME APPL ss User BDefrined Bork 1 Bepsrrmenr From BUILD IKG HUmsep Defirned nrr Thru FLZIMBIZk Print General InfZormarion ves idditicaal Damcripricnm TES Tnit of ftar eT TZ icernece Ires ma Locatica Summary TIU Output rict KPhirirzmr pF evirt dU ila CSpcregn E zd Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Enter the range of items product lines and user defined fields you want in the list Print By Select the option by which you want to organize the list Print Enter Y for each type of item information you want to include in the list Enter N for each type of information you want to exclude 13 4 Inventory User s Manual Master File Item Detail List Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the list
318. st is produced the Master Code Lists menu appears Inventory User s Manual 14 33 Master Codes List User Defined Field Sorts List User Defined Field Sorts List Sur 3onpozd 66 91 ST v ET obeq SuoN Aaeraa L 3OTOO 0 Zdepuoo s eur Jonporg Axeurid uoN Azqet qe euoN Aaepuooeg JOT O O Azewtig e TI oT ASTI SHOS PT9T4 peurgeq zesn Ajtddns szepttng 33odey jo pus Z Mog peurjeq esn Z T HOS peurjeq 2esQn T uo gd a os q 3209 8 L 30102 9 queunazedeq G uorieor ddy suotjdrzoseq pieta Wd 68 1 6661 10 80 Inventory User s Manual 14 34 Conversion You can put this version of Inventory on the system in one of two ways you can install a new system see chapter 2 or you can convert an older version of Inventory to the current version keeping your old files intact Before you convert files you must install the new version of Inventory You can replace and update the programs properly only by using the Install Applications function in Resource Manager Before you convert an application s files verify the version number of the application you are converting from You can upgrade Inventory from version 3 2 4 0x 4 1x 4 5x or 5 x If you want to convert to version 6 00 from a version earlier than 3 2 contact a client support representative The Data File Conversion function cannot determine the information from the function You must complete month end tasks before conve
319. standard costing valuation method you can change standard cost codes If you change the base cost for items the base cost on the Cost Information screen in the Item Locations function is updated Inventory User s Manual Work Flow Periodic Tasks When you change the cost of an item the item s cost is adjusted by the percentage or dollar amount you specify Verifying Quantities The Quantity Cross Verification function compares the INQTxxx Quantity Totals file and the INQLxxx Quantity Locations file to make sure that the quantities match Although these files are updated in the same functions produce the log periodically to check their accuracy If the quantity files do not match totals in reports will be incorrect The Quantity Cross Verification function checks the on hand total in the INQTxxx file and verifies that the total records for each location in the INQLxxx file are the same If lots are used the quantity for lots in the INQLxxx file is compared If serial numbers are used the quantity of serial numbers is compared The system changes inconsistencies between the two files and updates them The Quantity Cross Verification Log shows the inconsistencies and the adjustments the system made to the files If quantity discrepancies are not found when you produce the log it is blank Year End Maintenance Year end maintenance prepares for the upcoming year It increments the current fiscal year by 1 in the INPDxxx table
320. stments to Inventory User s Manual 5 71 Post GL Adjustments Daily Work Post GL Adjustments Screen DEAS DD gu Le Du kjp Port uL khdjuscmeuntz Have Tou Printed the GL amp djumrmenrs Jourmal TES Backed Up Tour bara Files TER Pest TS i urrant Fiscal Yaar 1339 Z Last Fimoal Year 19285 Cutput dewice IFirintez piR avigsw Wi iis Irina Field Definitions Field Name Description Have You Enter Y or N to indicate whether or not you have printed the GL Adjustments Journal and backed up your data files If you enter N the Daily Work menu appears Post To If Inventory is not interfaced with General Ledger or if you have not created last year data in General Ledger is displayed If Inventory is interfaced with General Ledger and you have created last year data in General Ledger select 1 to post the transactions to the current year GLJRxxx file or 2 to post them to the last year GLJRxxx file 5 72 Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Post GL Adjustments Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the log to a printer File Select F to send the log to a file End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Daily Work menu Saving and Exiting After the log is produced the Daily Work menu appears Inventory User s Manual 5 73 Daily Work Post GL Adjustments GL Adjustments Log TWLOL GNVHD TeqOL 0 potzed 00 v01 queunsntpv S909 0
321. t Beopa lsi iu 10633 TES Asplicsrinn From PTILDTER Transfers In Tra Thru BIB kFFi Transfers Cut I Pepatrtmenk From EWXILDIPE AS Roe m TES Thru INTERIJF Fai lda ma lmaumm ma Lptices7 rH Frinkb Ey Bound CB nearest i Irem ID i tito Froadurr Lines Tia Z Predurt Liza z LODO Imar Dafinmd Fialum TI3 Applirutice 1 Doo Tee peur ran 4 10 Ending Period 7 1933 Deer Detinad Sart 1 5 1 Umar DgEirmd Sort Z 3 oU dA hon Print Ey Lurmticn TIS Output rice CPhcintec pF evinr X ilg Shzrumm E zd Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Enter the range of item IDs location IDs product lines and user defined fields you want in the report Print By Select the option by which you want to organize the report Round to Nearest Select 1 to round quantities to the nearest ten thousand 2 to round to the nearest thousand 3 to round to the nearest hundred 4 to round to the nearest ten or 5 to round to the nearest whole number Print Enter Y or N at each prompt to indicate whether or not you want to include it in the report 8 28 Inventory User s Manual Analysis Reports Movement Trending Report Field Name Description Ending Period Enter the period number and year you want to use as the cutoff Print by location Enter Y or N to indicate whether or not you want the locations to appear in ascending order Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the report
322. t and adjusted value fields are displayed Order Quantities Set up the following order quantities for the item The maximum order quantity is the maximum number of units you want to have on hand at one time It is used in the Reorder Report when you use the Min Max calculation method Inventory User s Manual 2 27 Entering Your Data Setup 2 28 e The order point is an estimate of the quantity you will use during the order process plus safety stock you want to maintain If you want the system to calculate reorders fill in an order point for the item Safety stock is the minimum number of units you want to keep on hand at all times because of uncertainty in the order process e The EOQ is the quantity you want to order weighted against the cost to place an order versus the cost to carry additional stock to inventory EOQ is used in the Reorder Report when you use the EOQ calculation method The minimum order quantity is the minimum quantity you want on hand The minimum order quantity is used in the Reorder Report when you use the Min Max calculation method GL Accounts You assign GL accounts to an item location Enter a GL account code for the item location Item Quantities Enter the in use committed and on order quantities for the item location The available quantity on hand minus committed minus in use is displayed The on hand quantity is entered on the Cost Information screen or the Serial Numbers scre
323. t E to change your selections or exit to the Master File Lists menu Saving and Exiting After the list is produced the Master File Lists menu appears Inventory User s Manual 13 29 Master File Tables List Tables List bea bea ebeq Tp punoy adoqueAU ASTT SeT del Atddng sxepirng z Mos peurjeq aesn 66 T 3308 p utj q a sn 0 uoradrioseq prera z sn V d L oz uabuei umo S310g peurgeq 2esQ uoridraoseq Wd 80 2 661 L0 80 Aieradel Azepuooss Axeurid AzetqzeL Azepuooss Azeut srg suum O JO ON HSGANI dI T L Azoqusaut ASTI Se qel Wa 80 2 A ddng sz plIng 6661 L0 80 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 2T 00 S661 00 WVHA SQOINNd UWAA WOSIA doldad N dil Zt uqbueT uunToo e qej ALOR eosr4 poraeg uoridraoseg AqoqueAul ASTT SOTCRL Ajtddns szepttng suun o JO ON HGdNI GI T L Wd 80 2 6661 L0 80 Inventory User s Manual 13 30 Master Codes List Sales Categories List Customer Levels List Product Lines List Account Codes List Forecast Types List Cost Makeup Codes List User Defined Fields List User Defined Field Sorts List Inventory User s Manual 14 3 14 7 14 11 14 15 14 19 14 23 14 27 14 81 14 1 Sales Categories List Features
324. t have serial tracking or lot tracking status e Ifyou are working with a lotted item the Lot Entry window appears e Ifyou are working with a serialized item the Serial Number Entry window appears Ifyou are working with both a serialized and lotted item and you elected to sort by serial number then lot the Serial Lot Number Entry window appears Ifyou are working with both a serialized and lotted item and you elected to sort by lot then serial number the Lot Serial Number Entry window appears Adjustments Adjustment transactions correct differences in quantity which might be found during a physical count Adjustment transactions are also used to adjust quantities and costs of transactions posted from other applications When you enter an adjustment to increase the quantity of an item the on hand and available quantities increase and the last cost of the item appears in the Cost field but can be changed 3 4 Inventory User s Manual Work Flow Daily Tasks When an adjustment to increase the quantity is made to a serialized item the serial number cannot exist in the INSNxxx Serial Numbers file you must enter a new serial number and cost When an adjustment to increase the quantity is made to a lotted item you must enter the number quantity and unit cost of each lot When you enter an adjustment to decrease the quantity of an item the on hand and available quantities decrease and the costing method you ar
325. t to override what you set up in the Locations function enter the EOQ overrides If you want to calculate standard cost enter your standard cost codes that make up the standard cost of the item location If quantities are already assigned to the item you can enter cost detail information but you will not have a record of your cost history To keep records of your cost history use the Inventory Transactions function on the Daily Work menu Enter the current date the on hand quantity and the unit cost of the item The extended cost is calculated Inventory User s Manual 2 29 Entering Your Data Setup For lots enter the lot number associated with the item For serialized items you must enter cost information on the Serial Numbers screen For both lotted and serialized items enter cost information on the Serial Numbers screen Vendor Information Enter each vendor ID the name of each vendor the number of days it takes the vendor to ship the item to you the order quantity cost and number and the date of the last purchase of the item from the vendor If the vendor gives quantity breaks enter the quantity cost and units you must purchase before receiving the quantity break Bin Information Bins identify where the item is located They are assigned to an item location on the Location Information screen Enter each bin ID If you use bins during the physical count process the other fields on this screen will contain
326. tem ID The ID of the item you are working with is displayed Location The location you specified on the Item Locations screen is displayed Description The description of the item is displayed Units The default unit of measure is displayed Average Price The average price for the item at the location is displayed Base Price The base price of the item at the location is displayed List Price The list price of the item at the location is displayed Inventory User s Manual 11 25 Item Locations File Maintenance Field Name Minimum Price Cust Lvl Description Adj Base 96 Adjustment Promo 11 26 Description The minimum price of the item at the location is displayed Enter the customer level you want to associate with the location The description of the customer level is displayed Enter the adjustment base for the customer level N no base fixed dollar amount S standard cost cost of the item determine by the component costs base cost fixed cost average price weighted average of selling prices price selling base price list price published price minimum price lowest selling price S gt w calculated price price at the time the price break is calculated If you want to use a percentage adjustment enter if you want to use a dollar adjustment enter Enter the amount of the adjustment For negative amounts use the minus symbol enter positive quantities without
327. tem Locations Location Use the Location Information screen to enter or change Information default information inventory values order quantities GL accounts and item quantity information Item Locations Price Use the Price Information screen to define item specific Information pricing for selected customer levels Inventory User s Manual 11 17 Item Locations Screen Item Locations Cost Information Item Locations Vendor Information Item Locations Bin Information Item Locations Lot Information Item Locations Serial Numbers Append Location window Edit Price Information window Edit Vendor Information window Edit Lot Information window Edit Serial Numbers window File Maintenance Description Use the Cost Information screen to define item specific costs EOQ overrides standard cost makeup and cost detail Use the Vendor Information screen to set up vendors for the item Use the Bin Information screen to enter bin locations for the item Use the Lot Information screen to define lots for the item Use the Serial Numbers screen to define serial numbers for the item Use the Append Location window to copy information from an existing location record Use the Edit Price Information window to change pricing information for the unit specified and to view quantity breaks for the item Use the Edit Vendor Information window to update quantity price break information and to chang
328. tency Open Systems Holding Corp 1157 Valley Park Drive Suite 105 Shakopee Minnesota 55379 General Telephone 612 403 5700 General Fax 612 496 2495 Support Telephone 800 582 5000 Support Fax 612 403 5870 Internet Address www osas com Contents Introduction General Information 1 3 Inventory System 1 5 Conventions 1 7 Text Menu 1 11 Graphical Style Menus 1 15 Favorites Menu 1 25 Function Commands 1 29 Reports 1 37 Setup Installing the Application 2 3 Setup Considerations 2 5 Entering Your Data 2 13 Creating a Backup Schedule 2 33 Work Flow Daily Tasks 3 3 Periodic Tasks 3 15 Information Inquiry Price and Availability 4 3 Summary History 4 13 Detail History 4 17 Movement History 4 21 Sales Trending 4 25 Items 4 29 Item Locations 4 39 Costs and Vendors 4 49 Lot Numbers 4 55 Inventory User s Manual Serial Numbers 4 59 Daily Work Inventory Transactions 5 3 Location Transfers 5 37 Transactions Journal 5 55 Transfers Journal 5 59 Post Transactions 5 63 GL Adjustments Journal 5 67 Post GL Adjustments 5 71 Reorder Processing Calculate Reorders 6 3 Reorder Report 6 7 Generate Purchase Requisitions 6 11 Reports Inventory Movement Report 7 3 Item Status Report 7 7 Price Report 7 11 Valuation Report 7 15 Cost Variance Report 7 19 Serialized History Report 7 23 Lot History Report 7 27 Transaction History Report 7 31 Analysis Reports Safety Stock Alert Report 8 3 Overstock Report 8 7
329. ternate part number Customer part number Superseded part number Bar code Vendor part number Inventory User s Manual 11 11 Items File Maintenance Field Name Src ID Alternate Item ID Start Date End Date Description If you selected a customer alternate enter a customer ID if you selected a vendor alternate enter a vendor ID Enter or change the ID for the alternate item you selected Enter the date you will begin using the alternate item Enter the date you will stop using the alternate item To set the end date for an indefinite amount of time leave this field blank Command Bar Definitions Command Enter edit Append Next screen Previous screen Saving and Exiting Description Move the prompt gt to the line you want to edit and press Enter Press A to add an alternate item to the list Press N to go to the next screen you selected or to return to the Items screen if the Alternate Items screen is the last screen you selected Press P to go to the previous screen or to return to the Items screen if the Alternate Items screen is the first screen you selected To save the information and go to the next or previous screen press N or P respectively To exit to the File Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command 11 12 Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Items Items Locations Screen Su E Pw ben T Etem Irem 1b Loo Deserigeion CFlecsertoal Pack
330. th this function Screen Use Screen Price and Availability Lot Price and Availability Inquiry Serial Number Price and Availability Inquiry Item Price and Availability Detail window Price Calculator window Inventory User s Manual Description Use the Price and Availability screen to view an item s available and on order quantities at each location and to view base and list prices for an item To add or change information on this screen use the File Maintenance Item Locations function Use the Lot Price and Availability Inquiry screen to view a lot s availability and on order quantities at each location Use the Serial Number Price and Availability Inquiry screen to view a serial item s availability and unit price at each location Use the Item Price and Availability Detail window to view the on hand committed in use available and on order quantities for an item You can also view the average base list and minimum prices for an item Use the Price Calculator window to calculate the price of any quantity of items for a customer 4 3 Price and Availability Information Inquiry Price and Availability Screen E aan Ss EX Pw bjp Fcicu mud Kwmilmbilizg Irem 1D LOO Ait AE 1 Dem rigrinn EClecerioal Package Irem Type Hnnserializad Unita FEG Price ID ETILO Trmck Lotz Hn Lamation bead Lach be On Onder Liat Price i CAOOUL 10 0000 oo ADL 3 OE 5 0000 Buon 17 0D B TXOOGCL
331. the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 39 Location Transfers Daily Work Append Edit Transfer Window eas TiN gui Dat Du Bp r Location TrmuafgErz Tyra Irem Lec TD Quantity Once Trans Pace From TODO fool 1 200 SET O77 177 3999 TE mu BHL Append Trans ter From Toa Lom ion mul Locmtinn HHOO Irem LD TOU Item ID Too JN inry i ODE Unita ZET Sty Dafora 1 0000 Unit Coat 201 5BDO Oty iret 2 0000 Excresded oar idi B52 TrarafEkr Coat cc Trameaporiom sre Puig Pepiod OT Tear 1773 Coant Transfer 000001 of Oimiuhiti Field Definitions Field Name Description From Location Enter or change the ID of the location you are transferring the item from Item ID Enter or change the number of the item you want to transfer Quantity Enter or change the quantity you are transferring Units Enter the unit of measure you want to work with Unit Cost The unit cost unit cost x quantity of the item you are transferring is displayed Extended Cost The total cost item cost x quantity of the item you are transferring is displayed 5 40 Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Location Transfers Field Name To Location Item ID Qty Before Qty After Transfer Cost Transaction Date Period Year Comment Description Enter or change the ID of the location you are transferring the item to Enter or change the ID of the item you are transferring The on hand quantity of the
332. this field is updated when you enter orders or a new sales order in the Inventory Transactions function Enter or change the quantity that has been invoiced but not posted When you sell an item through Accounts Receivable or Sales Order the quantity that is sold is stored in this field until it is posted The quantity available for sale the on hand quantity minus the in use and committed quantities is displayed Enter or change the quantity that is on order from the vendors Command Bar Definitions This screen has no command bar Saving and Exiting When you save your entries PgDn the next screen you selected from the Item Locations menu appears If you did not select another screen the File Maintenance menu appears 11 24 Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Item Locations Item Locations Price Information Screen as TONA Gating Eat ft b Tee Lurmticzz Fr cg Infccmmtica Irem iB Lun Location K tipi ab Description Cleserical Package Unita PEG Unit Ferice lIzfnrmatinn Tuit Quantity Srmmkm Unkle LYEEaRe FE LCE Base Price SLAC PreLce Elnimum Price i FR te AE E FEB P400 8158 2300 ITF DDD Line Ho ICO00Di cf DOE Currcmar Llavmlm Cust LiL D scripbian jj Base LER R ayyusbmezme Peo Td oer im Builders Goptracr Sac price i 200 TEF Lime Ho jo00001 of ODE Tab Customer Levels Enter edit Hert gcceen FrEewicus sz ruggn Field Definitions Field Name Description I
333. thods You must select a costing method for your items in the Options and Interfaces function in Resource Manager The FIFO first in first out method uses the oldest items in your inventory as the basis for costing your sales and inventory FIFO allocates the oldest unit costs to the cost of goods sold and the most recent unit costs to the ending inventory When costs rise the FIFO method yields the highest net income when costs fall the FIFO method yields the lowest net income The LIFO last in first out method uses the last items brought into inventory as the basis for costing sales and inventory When costs of your inventory items rise the LIFO method yields the lowest net income of all the costing types when inventory item costs fall the LIFO method yields the highest net income The average cost method calculates a weighted average cost by dividing the total cost of all units of an inventory item by the number of units on hand The standard cost method is an estimate of costs you set yourself For example in a manufacturing operation the standard cost is the cost of the item plus costs of raw materials labor and overhead Set up standard cost codes in the Standard Cost Makeup Codes function and assign them to item locations on the Item Locations Cost Information screen Determining Options and Interfaces Interfaces Inventory can be interfaced with General Ledger and Purchase Order If you want to interface Accounts Receivab
334. tion you want to view Units Enter a unit of measure for the item you want to view 4 40 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Item Locations Command Bar Definitions Command Description Next Press N to view the next item location record on file Prev Press P to view the previous item location record on file Last Press L to view the last item location record on file First Press F to view the first item location record on file Item Press I to go to the Item ID field and enter a different item ID Units Press U to go the Units field and enter a different unit of measure General Press G to view general information about the item location The General screen appears Pricing Press R to view pricing information about the item location The Unit Price Information screen appears Bins Press B to view bin information about the item location The Bin Information screen appears Saving and Exiting To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 4 41 Item Locations Information Inquiry Item Locations General Screen 0545 Tii Sui L4 Dei He Itam Loret ions Irem 1B Loo Location CAODOI Dem rigrinn Elezrrical Package Unite FRG DagZmulcts odes Qumrrtttiam Menor ID ILLE Rax im Quy 80 Doc Bin Member r 1 rdar Foint 1 5000 Irem FELCE 13 BUILD marery Stock DOT Lead Tire T U po i DOO Stato fictive znimums Order 7 00a GL coowsks Tier Cuanbseies
335. tments Journal Command Description Screen Select S to send the journal to the screen End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Daily Work menu Saving and Exiting After the journal is produced the Daily Work menu appears Inventory User s Manual 5 69 Daily Work GL Adjustments Journal T GL Adjustments Journal ebeq 90 2T 90 2 T TES Tl S6 6 4tTpezD 3rq q TWLOL QNVHD 3ueu3snfpy 900 TO NI 10000000 700000 S661 90 GS661 v1 90 TOOONN queujsntpy S500 TO NI 10000000 100000 S661 90 S661 v1 90 1000NA 3oov tpy NI p09 d r queunsntpy 399V Add S900 ddy eoueaegeg oN beg d ei pd eyed dI 901 uoraeooT ueil Aq quTIg Teuxnop squeunsn py 19 Aqddng szepttng 331odew jo pug abeyoeg qeoriqoetsu 00 ebexyoeg eora3oe su 00 uoradiadoseq qI uei Wd LIT Z 666T ST 90 Inventory User s Manual 5 70 Post GL Adjustments Features Use the Post GL Adjustments function on the Daily Work menu to post COGS adjustments and purchase price variances to General Ledger Before you post complete the following tasks e Ifyou have a multiuser system make sure that no one else is using the Inventory system Print the GL Adjustments Journal e Back up all the data files Reports A sample posting log is on page 5 74 Screen Use Screen Description Post GL Adjustments Use the Post GL Adjustments screen to select the fiscal year you want to post the adju
336. to a printer File Select F to send the list to a file Screen Select S to send the list to the screen End Select E to change your selections or exit to the Master File Lists menu Saving and Exiting After the list is produced the Master File Lists menu appears Inventory User s Manual 13 5 Master File Item Detail List Item Detail List I 0000 pozd abw pul 0 obegq 3ubTeM uei sseTO Xe Axzeuung UoT3e2O0T SnOHWHVM SVI IVG TOOOXL SSDQOHWHVM SITOdVENNIN TOOONW WSQOHWHVM SYONI LTE TOOOCN SQOHWHVM ONVINVO 1000V5 uoradraoseq uor3eooT QI uor3eooT SIHGEZCLGL TOOTTE peq Topue OINIONIS SeTIV N TICcvVVE TOONNS peg Jowo sng GE OX8SET I0030V ped 1euojsn ZZ6S901LF8 poo reg e3eq pug eyed PeF GI WJI eqeuzeiTy dI eounos ad sueql eqeureqTy soqeuzeq Ty Dvd 0000 00001 Oud eseg 3Tnegeq Aqreued 103994 UOTSTSAUOD sarun eanseew Jo sarun e LO 9T TI 90 ST oT S0 27 60 v0 ET 80 TOTO 0 Sp er4 19470 OIHIONIH queujzedeq 70 ONIGTINg uotTyeot Tddy 10 Sp et4 peqz0s GII0H qI Pda WM Won eseg ON amp Ue3I peq4Ty TVISHIVN eur 3onpoud sox i31epaoey OMY POZTTETISSUON T adAy ue3r ta Azobejzep sotes ESOT Xoe4d SATION snqeis uoT eUUOFUT edeuep xog Teyeerg pue s3e ano TeoTtzOeTY S PNTOUI abeyoeg Teotz OeTyY uoradiaoseq 001 qI weit qI weqr Ag ASTI TTe3 q WJI Atddng szepttng Wd 20 c 6661 10 80 Inventory User s Manual 13 6 Item Summary List Features Use the
337. try cel Fa Hemory Hl T4 Harcry cA T5 Mem Bercall cael T ERCI T7 KG TH cr r ii FLO Exit Total Hl ct ae zEnrrEg Printer OFF Peeters eres Purimal Z Inventory User s Manual D 1 Other Commands References D 2 Field Definitions Field Memory Tape Entry Functions Keys Fl or C Erase Tape F2 or E Clear Entry Description The number or total stored in memory is displayed The printout tape of a real calculator is simulated in the Tape display area Numbers operators and a running total of the calculations are displayed Each workstation has its own unique tape for the calculator The last tape that was used is recalled when you start the calculator The tape is stored as a file on the hard disk and reloaded each time you use the calculator When you want to start a new tape press F1 to erase the current tape The number or comment you are entering or have just entered is displayed To enter a number type the number To enter a comment type a quotation mark and then a comment Comments can be 16 characters long To make calculations with the Calculator use postfix notation First type a number Then press the key of the operator X or you want to use Type a second number and press the key of another operator or press Enter to total the calculation The Calculator functions are displayed in the Functions field Press S to see the subtotal
338. tting up 2 30 serial number item lookup 1 34 Serial Numbers function 4 59 Serialized History Report function 7 23 sample 7 26 serialized items 2 5 2 20 2 29 3 4 serialized lotted items 2 29 3 4 service items 2 5 2 20 adjusting 5 3 setting up access codes 2 12 account codes 2 15 alternate items 2 23 bin information 2 30 codes and IDs 2 5 customer levels 2 14 customer level pricing 2 29 defining types of inventory items 2 5 forecast types 2 15 general information 2 20 GL accounts 2 28 installing 2 3 IX 10 inventory value 2 27 item IDs 2 7 item IDs and descriptions 2 20 item locations 2 25 item quantities 2 28 location cost information 2 29 location IDs 2 8 location information 2 26 defaults 2 26 location price information 2 28 locations 2 18 lot information 2 30 makeup codes 2 16 order quantities 2 27 organizing inventory items 2 5 price IDs 2 8 price structures 2 18 product lines 2 8 2 14 promotional pricing 2 31 serial information 2 30 tables 2 13 units of measure 2 21 2 28 user defined field sorts 2 17 user defined fields 2 17 vendor information 2 29 Shift F2 function key 1 30 Shift F5 inventory search command 1 34 Shift F6 inventory search command 1 34 Shift F7 inventory search command 1 34 Shift F8 inventory search command 1 34 show costs in price and availability lookup option 2 12 show costs in sale transactions option 2 11 Slow Fast Movement
339. tting up 2 8 IX 8 variance 3 13 Price and Availability function 4 3 Price Calculator window E 1 Price Calculator E 1 Price Calculator window E 1 Price Report function 7 11 sample 7 14 Price Structure List function 13 19 sample 13 22 Price Structures function 11 55 setting up 2 18 Print Physical Inventory Tags function 10 11 list 10 14 Print Physical Inventory Worksheets function 10 15 sample 10 18 printing reports 3 26 screen contents 1 30 tags 3 19 worksheets 3 20 Proceed function key 1 30 Product Lines definition 2 14 function 12 7 setting up 2 8 2 14 2 21 Product Lines List function 14 11 sample 14 14 Product Suggestions D 7 programs updating A 1 Promotional Pricing function 11 59 setting up 2 29 2 31 Promotional Pricing List function 13 23 sample 13 26 Purchase Order installation order 2 3 interface 2 9 2 10 3 17 5 3 Inventory User s Manual Index purchase price variances posting 3 13 T accounts 3 14 purchase requisitions generating 3 17 purchase transactions 3 6 goods received 3 7 invoice 3 7 miscellaneous credit 3 7 new order 3 7 purchases T accounts 3 12 Purge Selected Files function 9 19 purging files 3 24 INAIxxx 3 24 INHIxxx 3 25 INHSxxx 3 25 INLHxxx 3 25 INLTxxx 3 24 INPPxxx 3 24 INSHxxx 3 25 INSNxxx 3 24 Q quantities updating 3 25 verifying 3 23 quantities and transactions description of 3 8 differences 3 8
340. tus you want to include in the report Enter N for each status you want to exclude Print extra description If you want the report to include additional descriptions enter Y if not enter N You can enter Y only if you elected to use additional descriptions in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function 8 4 Inventory User s Manual Analysis Reports Safety Stock Alert Report Field Name Print by location Print item with zero safety stock Description If you want to separate the information by location enter Y if not enter N If you want to include items with a quantity of zero in the Safety Stock field in the Item Locations function enter Y if not enter N Command Bar Definitions Command Printer File Screen End Saving and Exiting Description Select P to send the report to a printer Select F to send the report to a file Select to send the report to the screen Select E to change your selections or exit to the Analysis Reports menu After the report is produced the Analysis Reports menu appears Inventory User s Manual 8 5 Analysis Reports Safety Stock Alert Report Safety Stock Alert Report c T 33oded jo puq xXoo3s Ajeges abeg 0000 000821 0000701 000S 0000 0000 0T 0000701 STACT TEAL 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 8 esp ur pea3ruuo 0000 0000 0000 S 0000
341. ty on hand 11 29 Item Locations File Maintenance Field Name Unit Cost Extended Cost Lot Number Total On Hand Total Extended Cost Description Enter the unit cost of the item The extended cost of the unit is displayed If lots are used the lot number is displayed The total on hand quantity of the unit is displayed The total of all the cost buckets is displayed Command Bar Definitions Standard Cost Makeup Command Tab Cost Detail Costs Enter edit Append Next screen Previous screen 11 30 Description Press Tab to go to the Cost Detail section of the screen Press C to go to the Costs section of the screen Move the prompt gt to the standard cost bucket you want to edit and press Enter Press A to add a standard cost makeup code Press N to go to the next screen you selected or to return to the Item Locations screen if the Cost Information screen is the last screen you selected Press P to go to the previous screen or to return to the Item Locations screen if the Cost Information screen is the first screen you selected Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Item Locations Cost Detail Command Tab Cost Makeup Costs Enter edit Append Next screen Previous screen Saving and Exiting Description Press Tab to go the Standard Cost Makeup section of the screen Press C to go to the Costs section of the screen Move the prompt
342. uld cost based on its standard costing model The standard costing model varies from company to company and is usually used in a manufacturing environment 2 16 Inventory User s Manual Setup Entering Your Data If you use the standard costing valuation method you must define cost codes that make up your standard cost Cost codes are used on the Cost Information screen in the Item Locations function and define the composition of the standard cost for an item Examples of standard costs for items are marketing labor and distribution costs Select Standard Cost Makeup Codes from the Code Maintenance menu Then enter each cost code and a description of each code User Defined Fields You can set up 16 user defined fields which can be used to describe an item User defined fields 1 and 2 are sort options in report functions User defined fields 3 to 16 are unsorted fields All user defined fields can be assigned to an item on the General Information screen in the Items function When setting up the sorted fields use fields that you sort by most often These fields are used as sort options in several reports and in the Calculate Reorders Item Price Change Cost Changes Physical Inventory Selection and Freeze Quantities functions Select User Defined Fields from the Code Maintenance menu Then enter a user defined field number and a description of the user defined field Enter an unlimited number of field values and a description o
343. urned on it sounds at an error or when you must Bell on off verify a command To turn off the bell use this command or the Defaults function in chapter 3 To turn the bell back on use this command again 1 14 Inventory User s Manual Graphical Style Menus There are two types of graphical style menus to choose from The standard Graphical menu features application buttons that resemble many Windows functions The Start Main menu is named because of its functional resemblance to the Start menu in Windows 95 and Windows NT Featuring graphical displays access buttons for your installed applications and allowing access to OSAS functions via both the mouse and function keys both graphical style menus allow you a greater selection of interaction with OSAS and your data Both graphical style menus are available in a Windows environment only Much like the Text menu when you select an application in either graphical menu the application s menu presenting several related functions is displayed beside the Main menu Selecting a function leads you to a function screen or to another menu If you are using the Graphical menu click the appropriate button with the mouse to select an application from the Graphical menu To select a function from an application menu click the function s button with the mouse the same way as you do for an application If you choose the Start menu you can select applications from the Main menu in these ways
344. use from the INLTxxx Lot Detail file If you do not keep lot history lots with a quantity of zero are deleted regardless of the date they were sold If you keep lot history print the Lot History Report before purging this file INAIlxxx Delete the alternate items you no longer need from the INAIxxx Alternate Items file INPPxxx Delete the promotional pricing IDs you no longer use from the INPPxxx Promotional Pricing file Print the Price Report before deleting promotional price IDs Inventory User s Manual Work Flow Periodic Tasks INSHxxx Delete serial history from the INSHxxx Serial History file Print the Serialized History Report before you delete information from this file INLHxxx Delete lot history from the INLHxxx Lot History file Print the Lot History Report before you delete information from this file INHIxxx Delete detail history for transactions from the INHIxxx Detail History file Print the Transaction History Report before you delete information from this file INHSxxx Delete summary history from the INHSxxx Summary History file Print the following reports before you delete information from this file Inventory Movement Report e Valuation Report Cost Variance Report Slow Fast Movement Report Sales Analysis Report e Gross Profit Analysis Report Trend Analysis Report Rebuilding Item Quantities Whether you use Inventory as a standalone application or other a
345. ustomer levels quantity price breaks and bin information To add or change information use the Item Locations function on the File Maintenance menu Reports No report is associated with this function Screen Use Screen Item Locations Locations Item Locations General Item Locations Unit Price Information Item Locations Bin Information View Price Information window Inventory User s Manual Description Use the Item Locations screen to view the locations set up or an item Use the General screen to view location defaults GL accounts order quantities and item quantities Use the Unit Price Information screen to view unit price information and customer levels Use the Bin Information screen to view the bin numbers assigned to the item Use the View Price Information window to view quantity price breaks for an item 4 39 Item Locations Information Inquiry Item Locations Locations Screen W aan oi qux Lx Du ijp Itam Locwtinns Irem HD Loo Dem zrigrinn Elecrrical Packsge Unire PEG Enrmticnm vcn Had Ci tt d in Tae Available Un order T C Uf 1 060 0n 109000 0000 oo o000 7 0000 3 0000 0000 Leo O 1 0000 17 0000 6 0000 amp CO OU 4 0000 in n n nn Toral 21 0000 on 1 0000 14 0000 11 0000 Peer Lest Firzt Item Unita General pricing Pinus Field Definitions Field Name Description Item ID Enter the ID of the item whose location informa
346. vable Sales Order are interfaced with Inventory Inventory transactions are updated when you post If you have these applications use the Inventory Transactions function only to make corrections You cannot make adjustments for service items Reports To produce a list of transactions for a period use the Transaction History Report function on the Reports menu Screen Use Screen Description Inventory Transactions Use the Inventory Transactions screen to choose a transaction type All the transactions are listed on this screen before you post If you want to delete a transaction that is associated with a lot or serial number you must first delete the lot or serial numbers associated with that transaction Inventory User s Manual 5 3 Inventory Transactions Screen Inventory Items Units of Measure Append Edit Inventory Adjustments window Append Edit Inventory Sales window Append Edit Inventory Purchases window Lot Entry window Append Edit Lot Number window Serial Number Entry window Append Edit Serial Number window Serial Lot Number Entry window Daily Work Description Use the Inventory Items screen to add an item ID and information about that item or to maintain information about an item Use the Units of Measure screen to add or change units of measure for an item Use the Append Edit Inventory Adjustments window to add or edit an adjustment You can increase or decrease the on hand quant
347. ve Favorites menu button to add the desired submenu or function to or from your Favorites menu Toggles your display menu between your Favorites menu and your Main menu Switches between your sample data and your live data Clicking on this button or pressing F9 sets up the selected application Setup works only in certain applications If an application requires a setup function you will find instructions in that application s user s manual Displays information about the selected function 1 27 Function Commands Once you select an OSAS application function from the menu the function screen appears The way that you enter data on OSAS screens is consistent from function to function To move around the OSAS screens you use the function commands described below Most keyboards have a set of function keys usually labeled with the letter F and a number In OSAS commands are assigned to these function keys You can use the commands to work with data entry screens Except for the Command Help Esc and Jump Tab commands and the Enter key you can use the Keyboard function in Resource Manager to reassign any function key to any command Key Operation Esc View the list of commands for the screen you are on and the Command help field you are in To close the commands window press any key Fl Get information about the field you are working on Help F2 Make a selection from a range of entries for a field if the
348. ventory User s Manual 10 11 Print Physical Inventory Tags Physical Inventory Print Physical Inventory Tags Screen SAS TELE Su La fei bep r Frinz PFhyrzicml Inventory Tage Beech ED BATS Patch 1 be laos E BNormmrimalirmd Only 2 Bazili Only j T Bor 5 Feoduct Lina lIczumm Lccmrinn Xin 1 1 Print Frozen Quantities TES se Tay Hitaz T Seectiag Teg Hurbar L II Pzszturt Last God Tag Ilunbrr I Cutput device F cintaz piB evims iiie Irina Field Definitions Field Name Description Batch ID Enter the ID of the batch you want to work with Print By Select the option by which you want to organize the list Select Select the type of items you want in the list Print frozen quantities If you have frozen your inventory quantities and you want to print them on the tags enter Y if not enter N Use tag numbers If you chose to use tag numbers in the Physical Inventory Selection function YES is displayed If you did not choose to use tag numbers in the Physical Inventory Selection screen you can do so now 10 12 Inventory User s Manual Physical Inventory Print Physical Inventory Tags Field Name Description Starting Tag Number Enter the number of the first tag for the physical count If restart last good tag If you are reprinting tag numbers enter the number of the last number tag number assigned Command Bar Definitions Command Description Printer Select P to send the list to a
349. w antity Seesk gt Mendor m Part TETSZSDHIE Quarnr iry Soar Unite Unite faum l OCCO 341 2100 FRG Last d r Qty 2 0000 PF 1 O0000 0000 Last Order oar r43 55 D ace Ooo Cast Ocder fic moooi 1 2000 Lust Ccder Pate 12 21 1277 1 Poe any key Line Ho joO0001 of ODD Field Definitions The information in the View Price Information window comes from the Edit Vendor Information window in the File Maintenance Item Locations function Command Bar Definitions This window has no command bar Saving and Exiting To exit to the Vendor Information screen press any key 4 54 Inventory User s Manual Lot Numbers Features Use the Lot Numbers function on the Information Inquiry menu to view the costs and quantities of lots and historical information if you keep lot history Reports No report is associated with this function Screen Use Screen Description Lot Numbers Use the Lot Numbers screen to view the lot numbers for the item quantities available and on order and the status of the lot To add or change information on this screen use the Item Locations function Lot Inquiry Use the Lot Inquiry screen to view detailed information about historical lot transactions Inventory User s Manual 4 55 Lot Numbers Lot Numbers Screen 0545 Tim Taig La Da be Information Inquiry Irem iB Dsm riprinn Lnrmtsun ID Lour Buxber av DOT LS E rEDO 15 TOTAL BEI Let Humcerz bo aE AE UE
350. want to copy the information from the item record Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Items Command Bar Definitions This window has no command bar Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the Items screen use the Proceed PgDn command Inventory User s Manual 11 15 Items File Maintenance Additional Descriptions Window TUNI gua La Du bjp tere Irem TD i n Description Electrical Fackmgue Addictions Demcripticns Field Definitions Field Name Description Additional Descriptions Enter information about the item Command Bar Definitions This window has no command bar Saving and Exiting To save your entry and exit to the Items screen press Enter 11 16 Inventory User s Manual Item Locations Features Use the Item Locations function to add and maintain the following item specific information at the location level e general default information price information cost Information vendor information bin Information lot numbers serial numbers Reports To produce a list of the information entered on the Item Locations screen use the Item Locations List function on the Master File Lists menu Screen Use Screen Description Item Locations Use the Item Locations screen to enter the item whose location information you want to add or change and to select the information that you want to add or change I
351. xiting After the report is produced the Reports menu appears Inventory User s Manual 7 29 Reports Lot History Report Lot History Report Wa 0000 Sc 00Sz Z 0000 wa 12000000 100 000NI oand p66T ST L0 S6TOZ v3 0000 Sc 00Sz Z 0000 V3 12000000 100 000NI oand p66T ST L0 S610Z V3 0000 Scc 00Sz Z 0000 Wa 12000000 TOOWIL ZOOONN Uozna vp66l GT LO S610Z Wa 0000 sSz Z 00SZ Z 0000 V3 12000000 100 000NI oand p66T ST L0 S6TOZ Wa 0000 SC 00sz Z 0000 V3 12000000 100 000NI oand p66T ST L0 S6T0Z V3 0000 Scc 00Sz Z 0000 Wa 12000000 TOOWIL ZOOONN Uozna vp66l GT LO S610Z Wa 0000 Scc 00S2 Z 0000 V3 12000000 100 000NI oand vP66l GSI L0 S610Z Wa 0000 Sc 00Sz Z 0000 Wa 12000000 100 000NI oand p66T ST L0 S6T0Z V3 0000 Scc 0062 7 0000 Wa 12000000 TOOWIL ZOOONN Uozna v66l GT LO S610Z Wa 0000 Sz 00S2 Z 0000 V3 12000000 100 000NI oand p66T ST L0 S6TOZ Wa 0000 SC 00Sz Z 0000 V3 12000000 100 000NI oand p66T ST L0 S610Z V3 0000 Scc 00Sz Z 0000 Wa 12000000 TOOWIL ZOOONN yoma vp66l GT LO S610Z Wa 0000 Sc 00S2 Z 0000 V3 12000000 100 000NI oand p66T ST L0 S6TOZ v3 0000 Sc 00Sz Z 0000 V3 12000000 100 000NI oand p66T ST L0 S610Z Wa 0000 Scc 00Sz z 0000 Wa 12000000 TOOWIL ZOOONN omma vp66l GT LO S610Z Wa 0000 sSz Z 00SZ Z 0000 V3 12000000 100 000NI oand p66T ST L0 S6TOZ Wa 0000 Sc 00Sz Z 0000 V3 12000000 100 000NI oand p66T ST L0 S610Z Wa 0000 Scc 00Sz z 0000
352. xx file stores the alternate item information for each item INBNxxx Bin Locations The INBNxxx file stores the bin ID and last physical count information for every bin in each item location INCAxxx Sales Categories The INCAxxx file stores information about sales categories INCBxxx Physical Count Batches The INCBxxx file stores batch information in use by the Physical Counts functions INCCxxx Standard Cost Makeup Codes The INCCxxx file stores the standard cost makeup codes INCJxxx COGS Journal The INCJxxx file stores the COGS and purchase price variance adjustments that are produced in the Inventory Transactions function If Accounts Payable Accounts Receivable Purchase Order and Sales Order are interfaced with Inventory they also send COGS and purchase price variance adjustments information to this file INCLxxx Customer Levels The INCLxxx file stores customer level codes Inventory User s Manual C 1 File Descriptions References INCSxxx Cost Makeup The INCSxxx file stores cost makeup codes and cost amounts for each item location INCTxxx Physical Counts The INCTxxx file stores detail information for each item location bin ID when physical counts are processed INFTxxx Forecast Types The INFTxxx file stores forecast codes and the weighting factors for each period INGLxxx Account Codes The INGLxxx file stores general ledger account codes and accounts associated with each item location INHIxxx
353. y Inquiry Screen T An OM rr Lut Price mni Availability InquirTm Irem 1B Boni ETATIS wet ive Description NWallpagsr CunremporarWy Tram Type Horer ialised Unita BOLL Price ID EATRL Track Lota Tam Location Ib CADO Lot Marber det Leh le Cu Ore Expires tmt amp Crees DDR COD Available oP Dr DII dved jab Le Total reci LEE Lire Ho jOD0001 of DDO Entec cetera bo Petes mri khvmilabilitry sccm Field Definitions Field Name Description Item ID Enter the ID of the item whose quantities and price information you want to view Units Enter the unit of measure for the item Command Bar Definitions This screen has no command bar Saving and Exiting To exit to the Price and Availability screen press Enter 4 6 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Price and Availability Serial Number Price and Availability Inquiry Screen 7 An 10M m Swriml HumEsgr Frics end bveilebility Inquiry Irem 1B anzi ErATUA Anrive Dems rigrinn Befrigermror ims Tram Type ferialized Unita EA Frica ID APPL Track Lots Ho Locarsan Ib HDD Serial Huntar Lot Humber Stet Dzir Fricuw E L12100 Anil QUU LTA iLO Avail QD LTQEizl1D0I3 Avril 0000 LTRS LOO Avail ODUU LTOS L 00S ined id LTQOizl1nD2OBb Avail OC LTOS12100T Anil OOnU L Tee i es kvnil OUO LTOS LOOF Avmil ood LTSiz LoL avail OU Lire Ho 26001 of 0O00 Entec tetura bo Fric mri ivmilability sccm Field Def
354. y item 100 Before you set up superseded alternates change the status of the item to superseded in the Items function The system will not find superseded alternates unless the status of the item is superseded Bar Code If you use bar codes set up the bar code alternate to record the identification number for an item Then whenever a bar code is scanned or entered in an item ID field the item ID appears Vendor ID If Accounts Payable Purchase Order are interfaced with Inventory you can assign vendor IDs to an item For example if a vendor uses VC200 as the identification for vacuum cleaners but your item ID is 300 you can set up VC200 as the vendor ID on the Alternate Items screen Then when you call the vendor to order more VC200 and you enter item ID VC200 a message gives you the inventory item ID 300 Inventory User s Manual Setup Entering Your Data When you set up vendor alternates you must enter the vendor ID in the source field For each alternate you set up you can define a start date and an end date If you want to keep the alternate indefinitely leave the fields blank Item Locations You can get to the Item Locations screen from the Items menu or the File Maintenance menu To save time when assigning locations to your inventory items set up one location first following all the steps through Serial Information later in this chapter Then when you assign additional locations use the Append Locatio
355. ze fast moving and slow moving items The report shows the profit cost volume and sales of the inventory items Reports A sample Slow Fast Movement Report is on page 8 14 Screen Use Screen Description Slow Fast Movement Use the Slow Fast Movement Report screen to select the Report items locations product lines and user defined fields that you want in the report Inventory User s Manual 8 11 Slow Fast Movement Report Analysis Reports Slow Fast Movement Report Screen FAS Ve Do et lmnt Repock Pick Irem 13 Trus i60 Prime Du Thru 200 1 Salen Lo bparicam Ib From MHWIUDI PPDP SR Thru TEXn i E Frnduct Ling From AFSLIAMCI ThEu MATERIAL Prost DEE hpplicazinn Froe BPEELDTEES a Amcemrding Thru MIF AFFL z Darmcanding Department TEGERE ERELD Ie 1 Thru INTERIZEF Felot For Per amp kad Text UT 1929 Point Ixcrm Dascriprian Hc Feint Ietuil TES uppresas zero Coy Iremea HG Output chrvirg fFbrizzgr p F evirt E ilg Spcrmgen E zd Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Enter the range of items locations product lines and user defined fields you want in the report Print By Select the option by which you want to organize the report Print Order Select the order that you want the information to be in ascending or descending Print For Period Year Accept the displayed period and year or enter a different period and year 8 12 Inventory User s Manual An
356. zepttng GI WJI OL queuno uoradragoseq dI 901 GI ue3r uoz Wd ET ZT 6661 81 90 Inventory User s Manual 5 62 Post Transactions Features Use the Post Transactions function on the Daily Work menu to post adjustments sales purchases and transfers Before you post complete the following tasks e Ifyou have a multiuser system make sure that no one else is using the Inventory system Print the Transactions Journal e Back up all the data files Reports A sample posting log is on page 5 66 Screen Use Screen Description Post Transactions Use the Post Transactions screen to select what you want to post and the fiscal year you want to post to Inventory User s Manual 5 63 Post Transactions Daily Work Post Transactions Screen FISAS TOUD Faing La Du bjp r Port Trmnzwctinnm Have Tou Printed the Tranmsacrion J urrnsim TES Basted Up Tour Data Files TER Post Tranaactio ns TrarsIers ab Bork Both Post Transacti rs Lo Current Tear 1999 Foart Tranafarm to Currmrt Teer 159880 Field Definitions Field Name Have You Post transactions transfers or both Post To 5 64 uk por device F cintas piR eavigw Tillg Bing Description Enter Y or N to indicate whether or not you have printed the Transactions Journal and backed up your data files If you enter N the Daily Work menu appears Enter T to post transactions R to post transfers or

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

ACCIDENT 26 juin 2005 - ULM identifié 89-NO Evénement  MANUEL D`UTILISATION LIVRET DE L`ELEVE  Prius取扱説明書 エンターテインメント編  Pando I-497  Hershey™ - Acuity Brands  Pro-2000 MkII Manual  Heavy Duty Model  USER MANUAL - Webcollage Content Publisher  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file